18 Yaskawa p1000 Guia Rapida de Inicio Toepyaip1u01

YASKAWA AC Drive P1000
Industrial Fan and Pump Drive

Quick Start Guide
Type: CIMR-PU A
Models: 200 V Class: 3/4 to 175 HP ND
400 V Class: 3/4 to 500 HP ND
600 V Class: 2 to 250 HP ND
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user
receives this manual.
MANUAL NO. TOEP YAIP1U 01A

Copyright © 2012 YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent
liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly
striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
u Quick Reference
Easily Set Parameters for Specific Applications
Preset parameter defaults are available for setting up applications. Refer to Application Selection on
page 84.
Perform Auto-Tuning
Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 112.
Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Use drive monitors to check if fans, capacitors, or other components require maintenance. Refer to Performance Life Monitors Maintenance
Monitors on page 153.
Fault Display and Troubleshooting

Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page 128.
Standards Compliance
Refer to European Standards on page 232 and Refer to UL and CSA Standards on page 239 <1> .
<1> CE marking applies to 200 V class and 400 V class models only.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP YAIP1U 01A YASKAWA AC Drive - P1000 Quick Start Guide 3
This Page Intentionally Blank
4 YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP YAIP1U 01A YASKAWA AC Drive - P1000 Quick Start Guide
Table of Contents
QUICK REFERENCE ....................................................................................... 3
i. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY.................................................................. 11

i.1 Preface ....................................................................................................................... 12
Applicable Documentation....................................................................................................... 12
i.2 General Safety ........................................................................................................... 13
Supplemental Safety Information ............................................................................................ 13
Safety Messages..................................................................................................................... 14
General Application Precautions ............................................................................................. 16
Motor Application Precautions................................................................................................. 17
Drive Label Warning Example................................................................................................. 20
Warranty Information............................................................................................................... 20
1. RECEIVING .................................................................................................... 21
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check ..................................................................... 22
Nameplate ............................................................................................................................... 22
2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..................................................................... 25
2.1 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................................. 26
Installation Environment .......................................................................................................... 26
Installation Orientation and Spacing........................................................................................ 26
3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ...................................................................... 37

3.1 Standard Connection Diagram................................................................................. 38
3.2 Main Circuit Connection Diagram............................................................................ 41
Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0004 to 2A0081
Three-Phase 600 V Class Models 5A0003 to 5A0032 .......................................................... 41
Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0110, 2A0138
Three-Phase 600 V Class Models 5A0041, 5A0052 ............................................................. 41
3.3 Terminal Cover .......................................................................................................... 43
Table of Contents
Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, 5A0003 to 5A0032

(IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure) ....................................................................................................... 43
Models 2A0110 to 2A0250, 4A0208 to 4A0675, and 5A0125 to 5A0242 (IP00/Open Type
Enclosure) ........................................................................................................................................ 44
3.4 Digital Operator and Front Cover.......................................................................................45
Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator...................................................................................... 45
Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover ............................................................................................ 45
3.5 Top Protective Cover ..........................................................................................................48
Removing the Top Protective Cover ................................................................................................. 48
Reattaching the Top Protective Cover .............................................................................................. 48
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring..............................................................................................................49
Main Circuit Terminal Functions........................................................................................................ 49
Protecting Main Circuit Terminals ..................................................................................................... 50
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque ................................................................................................ 51
Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring ............................................................................................ 57
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring .........................................................................................................60
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions .......................................................................................... 60
Terminal Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 62
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal ................................................................................................... 63
3.8 Control I/O Connections .....................................................................................................65
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs............................................................................... 65
Using the Pulse Train Output ............................................................................................................ 66
Terminals A1, A2, and A3 Input Signal Selection.............................................................................. 67
Terminal AM/FM Signal Selection ..................................................................................................... 68
3.9 Connect to a PC...................................................................................................................69
3.10 Wiring Checklist ..................................................................................................................70
4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION....................................................... 71

4.1 Using the Digital Operator ..................................................................................................72
Keys and Displays............................................................................................................................. 72
LCD Display ...................................................................................................................................... 73
ALARM (ALM) LED Displays............................................................................................................. 74
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications.............................................................................................. 74
Menu Structure for Digital Operator .................................................................................................. 75
4.2 The Drive, Programming, and Clock Adjustment Modes ................................................76
Real-Time Clock (RTC) ..................................................................................................................... 76
Clock Adjustment .............................................................................................................................. 76
Changing Parameter Settings or Values ........................................................................................... 79
Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE........................................................................................ 80
4.3 Start-Up Flowchart ..............................................................................................................82
4.4 Powering Up the Drive ........................................................................................................83
Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display....................................................................... 83
4.5 Application Selection ..........................................................................................................84
4.6 Basic Drive Setup Adjustments .........................................................................................85
EZ Sleep/Wake-up Function ............................................................................................................. 90
4.7 Auto-Tuning .......................................................................................................................112
Types of Auto-Tuning ...................................................................................................................... 112
Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes ...................................................................................... 112
Table of Contents
Auto-Tuning Operation Example ..................................................................................................... 113

4.8 No-Load Operation Test Run............................................................................................115
No-Load Operation Test Run .......................................................................................................... 115
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected........................................................................................117
Test Run with the Load Connected ................................................................................................. 117
4.10 Test Run Checklist ............................................................................................................118
4.11 Fan and Pump Application Presets .................................................................................119
A1-03 = 8008: Pump ....................................................................................................................... 119
A1-03 = 8009: Pump w/ PI .............................................................................................................. 119
A1-03 = 8010: Fan .......................................................................................................................... 120
A1-03 = 8011: Fan w/ PI ................................................................................................................. 120
Default Values for Fan and Pump Applications............................................................................... 121
4.12 Fan and Pump Application Preset Details ......................................................................122
5. TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................................... 127
5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors .....................................................................................128
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors................................................................................................ 128
5.2 Fault Detection ..................................................................................................................129
Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions ............................................................................. 129
5.3 Alarm Detection .................................................................................................................139
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions ............................................................................... 139
5.4 Operator Programming Errors .........................................................................................142
Operator Programming Error Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions........................................... 142
5.5 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection ............................................................................................143
Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions..................................................................... 143
5.6 Copy Function Related Displays .....................................................................................146
Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 146
Fault Reset Methods ....................................................................................................................... 146
6. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 149

6.1 Inspection ..........................................................................................................................150
Recommended Daily Inspection...................................................................................................... 150
Recommended Periodic Inspection................................................................................................. 151
6.2 Periodic Maintenance .......................................................................................................153
Replacement Parts.......................................................................................................................... 153
6.3 Drive Replacement ............................................................................................................155
Replacing the Drive ......................................................................................................................... 155
7. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS ................................................................. 157

7.1 Option Card Installation....................................................................................................158
Prior to Installing the Option ............................................................................................................ 158
Communication Option Installation Example................................................................................... 159
A. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................ 163

A.1 Power Ratings ...................................................................................................................164
Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive Models 2A0004 to 2A0030 .......................................................... 164
Table of Contents

A.2 Drive Specifications ..........................................................................................................173
A.3 Drive Watt Loss Data ........................................................................................................175
B. PARAMETER LIST............................................................................................... 177

B.1 A: Initialization Parameters ..............................................................................................178
A1: Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 178
A2: User Parameters....................................................................................................................... 178
B.2 b: Application.....................................................................................................................179
b1: Operation Mode Selection......................................................................................................... 179
b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking......................................................................... 179
b3: Speed Search............................................................................................................................ 180
b4: Timer Function .......................................................................................................................... 181
b5: PID Control................................................................................................................................ 181
b6: Dwell Function........................................................................................................................... 184
b8: Energy Saving ........................................................................................................................... 184
B.3 C: Tuning............................................................................................................................185
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times ....................................................................................... 185
C2: S-Curve Characteristics............................................................................................................ 185
C3: Slip Compensation.................................................................................................................... 186
C4: Torque Compensation .............................................................................................................. 186
C6: Carrier Frequency..................................................................................................................... 186
B.4 d: References.....................................................................................................................187
d1: Frequency Reference................................................................................................................ 187
d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits ................................................................................................. 188
d3: Jump Frequency........................................................................................................................ 188
d4: Frequency Reference Hold and Up/Down 2 Function............................................................... 188
d6: Field Weakening and Field Forcing........................................................................................... 189
B.5 E: Motor Parameters .........................................................................................................190
E1: V/f Pattern ................................................................................................................................. 190
E2: Motor 1 Parameters .................................................................................................................. 191
F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3) ................................................................................................... 191
F6, F7: Communication Option Card............................................................................................... 192
B.6 H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals ........................................................................196
H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs ..................................................................................................... 196
H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs................................................................................................... 199
H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs .................................................................................................... 201
H4: Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 202
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication ............................................................................. 203
H6: Pulse Train Input....................................................................................................................... 204
B.7 L: Protection Function ......................................................................................................205
L1: Motor Protection ........................................................................................................................ 205
L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru............................................................................................ 205
L3: Stall Prevention ......................................................................................................................... 206
Table of Contents
L4: Speed Detection........................................................................................................................ 207

L5: Fault Restart.............................................................................................................................. 208
L6: Torque Detection....................................................................................................................... 208
L8: Drive Protection......................................................................................................................... 210
B.8 n: Special Adjustment.......................................................................................................212
n1: Hunting Prevention.................................................................................................................... 212
n3: High Slip Braking (HSB) and Overexcitation Braking................................................................ 212
B.9 o: Operator-Related Settings ...........................................................................................213
o1: Digital Operator Display Selection............................................................................................. 213
o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions ........................................................................................... 214
o3: Copy Function ........................................................................................................................... 214
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings................................................................................................... 215
B.10 S: Special Application.......................................................................................................216
S1: Dynamic Noise Control Function .............................................................................................. 216
S2: Programmable Run Timers....................................................................................................... 216
S3: Secondary PI (PI2) Control ....................................................................................................... 219
S6: P1000 Protection ...................................................................................................................... 220
B.11 T: Motor Tuning .................................................................................................................221
T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning..................................................................................................... 221
B.12 U: Monitors.........................................................................................................................222
U1: Operation Status Monitors ........................................................................................................ 222
U2: Fault Trace................................................................................................................................ 224
U3: Fault History.............................................................................................................................. 225
U4: Maintenance Monitors .............................................................................................................. 226
U5: PID Monitors ............................................................................................................................. 228
U6: Operation Status Monitors ........................................................................................................ 229
C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .............................................................................. 231

C.1 European Standards .........................................................................................................232
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance............................................................................................ 232
EMC Guidelines Compliance .......................................................................................................... 234
C.2 UL and CSA Standards .....................................................................................................239
UL Standards Compliance .............................................................................................................. 239
CSA Standards Compliance............................................................................................................ 245
Drive Motor Overload Protection ..................................................................................................... 245
Precautionary Notes on External Heatsink (IP00/Open Type Enclosure) ....................................... 247
Table of Contents
i
Preface & General Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product that, if not heeded, may result in fatality,
personal injury, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the consequences of ignoring
these instructions.
i.1 PREFACE...............................................................................................................12
i.2 GENERAL SAFETY...............................................................................................13
i.1 Preface
i.1 Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The selection and
application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa accepts no
responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all
controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All systems or equipment
designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and
instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa must be promptly provided to
the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and
specifications published in the Yaskawa manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED.
Yaskawa assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its
products.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of drives. Read this manual before attempting to install,
operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you understand all
precautions and safety information before attempting application.
u Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for P1000 series drives:
P1000 Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide (TOEPYAIP1U01)
Read this guide first. This guide is packaged together with the product and contains basic information
required to install and wire the drive. It also gives an overview of fault diagnostics, maintenance, and
parameter settings. The purpose of this guide is to prepare the drive for a trial run with an application and
for basic operation. This manual is available for download on our documentation website,
www.yaskawa.com.
P1000 Series AC Drive Technical Manual (SIEPYAIP1U01)
This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive functions, and MEMOBUS/
Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take advantage of higher
performance features. This manual is available for download on our documentation website,
www.yaskawa.com.
i.2 General Safety
i.2 General Safety

u Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Replace the covers or shields before
operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to
which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice
to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales
office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed according
to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could result
in serious or fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
i.2 General Safety
u Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in
this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply
is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any
components.
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys and
machine loads before applying power to the drive.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation,
adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations.
Because the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA in models 4A0414 and larger, IEC 61800-5-1 states that either the power supply
must be automatically disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor or a protective earthing
conductor with a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used. Failure to comply may result in death
or serious injury.
Always use appropriate equipment for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs).
The drive can cause a residual current with a DC component in the protective earthing conductor. Where a residual current
operated protective or monitoring device is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, always use a type B GFCI
according to IEC 60755.
Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
i.2 General Safety
WARNING
Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual. Failure
to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel.
The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V class) when protected by
branch circuit protection devices specified in this supplement.
Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry to prevent accidental dropping
of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the
peripheral devices.
Contact your supplier if the cause cannot be identified after checking the above.
Do not restart the drive immediately operate the peripheral devices if a fuse is blown or a GFCI is tripped.
Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact your supplier before restarting the
drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V Class) when protected by
Bussmann Type FWH or FWP fuses as specified in Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection on page 232.
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
i.2 General Safety
u General Application Precautions

n Selection
Installing a Reactor
Use an AC reactor or DC link choke in the following situations:
• to suppress harmonic current.
• to smooth peak current that results from capacitor switching.
• when the power supply is above 600 kVA.
• when the drive is running from a power supply system with thyristor converters.
Note: A DC link choke is built in to drive models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675.
4000 Power supply harmonics

reactor required
Power Supply
Capacity (kVA)
600
Reactor
unnecessary
0
60 400
Drive Capacity (kVA)
Figure i.1 Installing a Reactor
Drive Capacity
For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than the rated output current for the drive.
When running more than one motor in parallel from a single drive, the capacity of the drive should be larger than [total motor
rated current × 1.1].
Starting Torque
The overload rating for the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect lower torque
than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and drive capacity.
Emergency Stop
During a drive fault condition, the output shuts off but the motor does not stop immediately. A mechanical brake may be
required when it is necessary to stop the motor faster than the ability of the Fast Stop function of the drive.
Options
NOTICE: The B1, B2, , –, +1, +2, and +3 terminals are used to connect optional drive-specific compatible devices only. Connecting non-
Yaskawa-approved devices to these terminals may damage the drive.
Repetitive Starting/Stopping
Laundry machines, punching presses, and other applications with frequent starts and stops often approach 150% of their rated
current values. Heat stress generated from repetitive high current will shorten the life span of the IGBTs.
Yaskawa recommends lowering the carrier frequency, particularly when audible noise is not a concern. It is beneficial to
reduce the load, increase the acceleration and deceleration times, or switch to a larger drive to help keep peak current levels
under 150%. Be sure to check the peak current levels when starting and stopping repeatedly during the initial test run, and
make adjustments accordingly.
n Installation
Enclosure Panels
Keep the drive in a clean environment by installing the drive in an enclosure panel or selecting an installation area free of
airborne dust, lint, and oil mist. Be sure to leave the required space between drives to provide for cooling, and take proper
measures so the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits and keep flammable materials away from the drive.
Yaskawa offers protective designs for drives that must be used in areas subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration. Contact
Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for details.
Installation Direction
NOTICE: Install the drive upright as specified in the manual. Refer to Mechanical Installation on page 26 for more information on
installation. Failure to comply may damage the drive due to improper cooling.
i.2 General Safety
n Settings
Upper Limits
NOTICE: The drive is capable of running the motor up to 400 Hz. Be sure to set the upper limit for the frequency of the drive to prevent the
possible danger of accidentally operating equipment at higher than rated speed. The default setting for the maximum output frequency is
60 Hz.
DC Injection Braking
NOTICE: Excessive current during DC Injection Braking and excessive duration of DC Injection Braking can cause motor overheat.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by the amount of torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the
inertia moment. Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened for as
long as the Stall Prevention function is in operation. Install one of the available braking options or increase the capacity of the
drive for faster acceleration and deceleration.
n General Handling
Wiring Check
NOTICE: Do not connect power supply lines to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3. Failure to comply will destroy the drive. Be sure to
perform a final check of all sequence wiring and other connections before turning on the power and also check for short circuits on the
control terminals, which may damage the drive.
Selecting a Circuit Breaker or Circuit Interrupter
Yaskawa recommends installing a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) to the power supply side. The GFCI should be
designed for use with AC drives (e.g., Type B according to IEC 60755).
Select a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or GFCI with a rated current 1.5 to 2 times higher than the drive rated input
current to avoid nuisance trips caused by harmonics in the drive input current.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Shut off the drive with a magnetic contactor (MC) when a fault occurs in any external equipment such as braking
resistors. Failure to comply may cause resistor overheating, fire, and injury to personnel.
NOTICE: To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the drive power supply
off and on more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the drive. Use the drive to stop and start the motor.
Inspection and Maintenance
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Capacitors in the drive do not immediately discharge after shutting off the power. Wait for at least the
amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components after shutting off the power. Failure to comply may cause injury to
personnel from electrical shock.
WARNING! Burn Hazard. Because the heatsink can get very hot during operation, take proper precautions to prevent burns. When replacing
the cooling fan, shut off the power and wait at least 15 minutes to be sure that the heatsink has cooled down. Failure to comply may cause
burn injury to personnel.
Wiring
Yaskawa recommends using ring terminals on all drive models. Drive models 2A0069 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675
require the use of use ring terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer
for crimping.
Transporting the Drive
NOTICE: Never steam clean the drive. During transport, keep the drive from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate
ester, and other such harmful chemicals.
u Motor Application Precautions

n Standard Induction Motors
Low-Speed Range
The cooling fan of a standard motor should sufficiently cool the motor at the rated speed. As the self-cooling capability of
such a motor reduces with the speed, applying full torque at low speed will possibly damage the motor. Reduce the load torque
as the motor slows to prevent motor damage from overheat. Figure i.2 shows the allowable load characteristics for a Yaskawa
standard motor. Use a motor designed specifically for operation with a drive when 100% continuous torque is needed at low
speeds.
i.2 General Safety
25% ED (or 15 min)

40% ED (or 20 min)
60% ED (or 40 min)
100
90
80
70
Torque 60
(%) 50
Continuous operation
3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)
Figure i.2 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor
Insulation Tolerance
NOTICE: Consider motor voltage tolerance levels and motor insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V or particularly
long wiring distances.
High-Speed Operation
NOTICE: Problems may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when operating a motor beyond its rated speed.
Contact the motor or machine manufacturer.
Torque Characteristics
Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The user should have a full
understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock
The drive allows selection of high carrier PWM control and low carrier PWM. Selecting high carrier PWM can help reduce
motor oscillation.
Take particular caution when adding a variable speed drive to an application running a motor from line power at a constant
speed. If resonance occurs, install shock-absorbing rubber around the base of the motor and enable the Jump frequency selection
to prevent continuous operation in the resonant frequency range.
Audible Noise
Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier frequency, audible noise from the
motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when running from line power. Operating above the rated motor speed can
create unpleasant motor noise.
n Synchronous Motors
• Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa agent when planning to use a synchronous motor not endorsed by Yaskawa.
• Use a standard induction motor when running multiple synchronous motors simultaneously. A single drive does not have
this capability.
• A synchronous motor may rotate slightly in the opposite direction of the Run command at start depending on parameter
settings and rotor position.
• The amount of generated starting torque differs depending on the control mode and motor type. Set up the motor with the
drive after verifying the starting torque, allowable load characteristics, impact load tolerance, and speed control range.
Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa agent when planning to use a motor that does not fall within these specifications:
• To restart a coasting motor rotating over 200 Hz while in V/f Control, first use the Short Circuit Braking function to bring
the motor to a stop. Short Circuit Braking requires a special braking resistor. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa agent for
details.
• To restart a coasting motor rotating below 200 Hz, use the Speed Search function if the motor cable is not too long. If the
motor cable is relatively long, stop the motor using Short Circuit Braking.
n Specialized Motors
Multi-Pole Motor
The rated current of a multi-pole motor differs from that of a standard motor, so be sure to check the maximum current when
selecting a drive. Always stop the motor before switching between the number of motor poles. The motor will coast to stop if
a regen overvoltage (ov) fault occurs or if overcurrent (oC) protection is triggered.
i.2 General Safety
Submersible Motor
The rated current of a submersible motor is greater than that of a standard motor, so select the drive capacity accordingly. Use
a motor cable large enough to avoid decreasing the maximum torque level from voltage drop caused by a long motor cable.
Explosion-Proof Motor
The motor and the drive must be tested together to be certified as explosion-proof. The drive is not designed for explosion-
proof areas.
When attaching an encoder to an explosion-proof motor, make sure the encoder is also explosion-proof. Use an insulating
signal converter to connect the encoder signal lines to the speed feedback option card.
Geared Motor
Make sure that the gear and the lubricant are rated for the desired speed range to avoid gear damage when operating at low
speeds or very high speeds. Consult with the manufacturer for applications that require operation outside the rated speed range
of the motor or gear box.
Single-Phase Motor
Variable speed drives are not designed to operate with single phase motors. Using capacitors to start the motor causes excessive
current to flow and can damage drive components. A split-phase start or a repulsion start can burn out the starter coils because
the internal centrifugal switch is not activated. The drive is for use with three-phase motors only.
Motor with Brake
Take caution when using the drive to operate a motor with a built-in holding brake. If the brake is connected to the output side
of the drive, it may not release at start due to low voltage levels, so be sure to install a separate power supply for the motor
brake. Note that motors with built-in brakes tend to generate a fair amount of noise when running at low speeds.
n Notes on Power Transmission Machinery
Installing an AC drive in machinery that was previously connected directly to the power supply will allow the machine to
operate at variable speeds. Continuous operation outside of the rated speeds can wear on lubrication material in gear boxes
and other power transmission parts. Make sure that lubrication is sufficient within the entire speed range to avoid machine
damage. Note that operation above the rated speed can increase the noise generated by the machine.
i.2 General Safety
u Drive Label Warning Example

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure i.3 in the position shown in Figure i.4.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
●
Read manual before installing.
●
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor
discharge after disconnecting
power supply.
●
To conform to requirements,
make sure to ground the supply
neutral for 400V class.
● After opening the manual switch
between the drive and motor,
please wait 5 minutes before
inspecting, performing
maintenance or wiring the drive.
Hot surfaces
●
Top and Side surfaces may
become hot. Do not touch.
Figure i.3 Warning Information Example
600V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW
Warning Label
Figure i.4 Warning Information Position
u Warranty Information
n Restrictions
The drive is not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or
health.
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health
care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in underwater applications must first contact their Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to
be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility
where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood of any accident.
1
Receiving
This chapter explains how to inspect the drive upon receipt, and gives an overview of the different
enclosure types and components.
1.1 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK....................................................22
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:
• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier.
u Nameplate
200/400 V Class A
H MODEL : CIMR-PU2A0004FAA REV : A

C/C : CIMR-PU2A0004FAA
G INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 3. 9A
IND.CONT.EQ.
F OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 3. 5A 7J48 B
MASS : 3. 3 kg PRG : 8500 B
E O/N : 6W3050-0-100 VAJ123456
D S/N : J0073D207410100
FILE NO : E131457 IP20

PASS
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION Assembled in USA
:
C
600 V Class A
H MODEL : CIMR-PU5A0003FAA REV : A
C/C : CIMR-PU5A0003FAA
G INPUT : AC3PH 500-600V 50/60Hz 3. 6A
IND.CONT.EQ.
F OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-600V 0-400Hz 2. 7A 7J48 B
MASS : 3.4 kg PRG : 8500 B
E O/N : 6W3050-2-100 VAJ123456
D S/N : J0073D207410100
FILE NO : E131457 IP20

PASS
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION Assembled in USA
A – Normal Duty Amps E – Lot number

B – Software version F – Output specifications
C – Enclosure type G – Input specifications
D – Serial number H – AC drive model
Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example
CIMR - P U 2 A 0021 F A A
Drive P1000 Customized Enclosure Design
No. No. Type <1>
Series Specifications Revision
A Standard model IP00/Open Order
Region A
No. Type
Code
U USA IP20/NEMA
No. Voltage Class F
Type 1
2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac
4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac Environmental
No.
5 3-phase, 500-600 Vac Specification <2>
A Standard
K Gas-resistant
M Humidity- and
dust-resistant
N Oil-resistant
S Vibration-resistant
Refer to the tables below
<1> Refer to Mechanical Installation on page 26 for differences regarding enclosure protection types and component
descriptions.
<2> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the environmental conditions indicated.
n Three-Phase 200 V
Table 1.1 Model Number and Specifications (200 V)
Drive Model Max. Motor Capacity kW (HP) Rated Output Current A
2A0004 0.75 (0.75) 3.5
2A0006 1.1 (1) 6.0
2A0008 1.5 (2) 8.0
2A0010 2.2 (3) 9.6
2A0012 3.0 (3) 12
2A0018 3.7 (5) 17.5
Receiving
2A0021 5.5 (7.5) 21
2A0030 7.5 (10) 30
2A0040 11 (15) 40
2A0056 15 (20) 56
1
2A0069 18.5 (25) 69
2A0081 22 (30) 81
2A0110 30 (40) 110
2A0138 37 (50) 138
2A0169 45 (60) 169
2A0211 55 (75) 211
2A0250 75 (100) 250
2A0312 90 (125) 312
2A0360 110 (150) 360
2A0415 110 (175) 415
n Three-Phase 400 V
4A0002 0.75 (0.75) 2.1
4A0004 1.5 (2) 4.1
4A0005 2.2 (3) 5.4
4A0007 3.0 (3) 6.9
4A0009 3.7 (5) 8.8
4A0011 5.5 (7.5) 11.1
4A0018 7.5 (10) 17.5
4A0023 11 (15) 23
4A0031 15 (20) 31
4A0038 18.5 (25) 38
4A0044 22 (30) 44
4A0058 30 (40) 58
4A0072 37 (50) 72
4A0088 45 (60) 88
4A0103 55 (75) 103
4A0139 75 (100) 139
4A0165 90 (125) 165
4A0208 110 (150) 208
4A0250 132 (200) 250
4A0296 160 (250) 296
4A0362 185 (300) 362
4A0414 220 (350) 414
4A0515 250 (400-450) 515
4A0675 355 (500-550) 675
n Three-Phase 600 V
5A0003 1.5 (2) 2.7
5A0004 2.2 (3) 3.9
5A0006 3.7 (5) 6.1
5A0009 5.5 (7.5) 9
5A0011 7.5 (10) 11
5A0017 11 (15) 17
5A0022 15 (20) 22
5A0027 18.5 (25) 27
5A0032 22 (30) 32
5A0041 30 (40) 41
5A0052 37 (50) 52
5A0062 45 (60) 62
5A0077 55 (75) 77
5A0099 75 (100) 99
5A0125 90 (125) 125
5A0145 110 (150) 145
5A0192 160 (200) 192
5A0242 185 (250) 242
2
Mechanical Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the drive.
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION.............................................................................26
2.1 Mechanical Installation

This section outlines specifications, procedures, and the environment for proper mechanical installation of the drive.
u Installation Environment
Install the drive in an environment matching the specifications in Table 2.1 to help prolong the optimum performance life of
the drive.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment
Environment Conditions
Installation Area Indoors
-10 °C to +40 °C (IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure)
-10 °C to +50 °C (IP00/Open Type enclosure)
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
Ambient Temperature When using the drive in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air
temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity 95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 to +60 °C
Install the drive in an area free from:
• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials
• radioactive materials
Surrounding Area • combustible materials (e.g., wood)
• harmful gases and liquids
• excessive vibration
• chlorides
• direct sunlight.
Altitude 1000 m or lower, up to 3000 m with derating
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
Vibration 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (Models 2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165, and 5A0003 to 5A0099) or
2.0 m/s2 (Models 2A0250 to 2A0415, 4A0208 to 4A0675, and 5A0125 to 5A0242)
Orientation Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive as the noise created can lead to erroneous
operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take proper steps to shield the drive from noise.
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings and wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation. Failure to comply
could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before
drive start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
u Installation Orientation and Spacing

Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 2.1 to maintain proper cooling.
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation
n Single Drive Installation

Figure 2.2 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring. Install the heatsink
against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.
Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A C
D D
B B C
A
A – 50 mm minimum C – 120 mm minimum

B – 30 mm minimum D – Airflow direction
Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing
Note: IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure and IP00/Open Type enclosure models require the same amount of space above and below the drive for
installation.
n Multiple Drive Installation (Side-by-Side Installation)

Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032 can take advantage of Side-by-Side installation.
When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to Figure 2.2.
When mounting drives with the minimum clearance of 2 mm according to Figure 2.3, set parameter L8-35 to 1 while
considering derating. Refer to Parameter List on page 177 for details..
Line up the tops of the drives.
Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance
A C A D
B D
B
A A
A – 50 mm minimum C – 2 mm minimum
B – 30 mm minimum D – 120 mm minimum
Figure 2.3 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)
Note: Align the tops of the drives when installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel. Leave space between the tops and bottoms
of stacked drives for easier cooling fan replacement.
Remove the top protective covers of all drives as shown in Figure 2.4 when mounting IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drives
side-by-side. Refer to Top Protective Cover on page 48 to remove and reattach the top protective cover.
Figure 2.4 IP20/NEMA 1 Side-by-Side Mounting in Enclosure
n IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drives

Note: Removing the top protective cover or bottom conduit bracket from an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection
while maintaining IP20 conformity.
4-d W1 4-d
W1 t2
H4
H0
H1
H0
H
H
H1
H2
H3
H2
H3
t1
t1
D1 D1
W D Max.W2 W Max.W2 D
Figure 1 Figure 2
Table 2.2 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Dimensions (in)
Drive Model
Figure W H D W1 W2 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 t1 t2 d Wt. (lb)
2A0004F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.3
2A0006F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.3
2A0008F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
2A0010F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
2A0012F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
2A0018F 1 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
<1>
2A0021F 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
2A0030F 5.51 11.81 6.57 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 9.3
2A0040F 5.51 11.81 6.57 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 9.3
2A0056F 7.09 13.39 7.36 6.30 – 11.81 11.18 0.31 1.57 0.06 2.95 0.20 – M5 13.0
2A0069F 8.66 15.75 7.76 7.56 – 13.78 13.19 0.31 1.97 0.06 3.07 0.20 – M6 20.1
2A0081F 8.66 15.75 7.76 7.56 – 13.78 13.19 0.31 1.97 0.06 3.07 0.20 – M6 22.0
2A0110F 10.00 21.02 10.16 7.68 0.31 15.75 15.16 0.30 5.28 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 50.7 2
2A0138F 2 10.98 24.17 10.16 8.66 0.31 17.72 17.13 0.30 6.46 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 61.7
<1>
2A0169F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 90.4
2A0211F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 92.6
Dimensions below are the dimensions of IP00/Open Type models after customer installation of the appropriate IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit.
2A0250A 17.95 37.80 12.99 12.80 0.31 27.76 26.77 0.49 10.04 – 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 183.0
2A0312A 2 17.95 37.80 12.99 12.80 0.31 27.76 26.77 0.49 10.04 – 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 194.0
2A0360A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 238.1
<1> Removing the top protective cover from a IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection while retaining IP20 conformity.

Dimensions (in)
Drive Model
4A0002F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
4A0004F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
4A0005F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
4A0007F 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 7.9
4A0009F 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
1
4A0011F <1> 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
4A0018F 5.51 11.81 6.57 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 9.0
4A0023F 5.51 11.81 6.57 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 9.0
4A0031F 7.09 13.39 6.57 6.30 – 11.81 11.18 0.31 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 12.6
4A0038F 7.09 13.39 7.36 6.30 – 11.81 11.18 0.31 1.57 0.06 2.95 0.20 – M5 13.2
4A0044F 8.66 15.75 7.76 7.56 – 13.78 13.19 0.31 1.97 0.06 3.07 0.20 – M6 19.2
4A0058F 10.00 18.31 10.16 7.68 0.31 15.75 15.16 0.30 2.56 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 50.7
4A0072F 10.98 20.28 10.16 8.66 0.31 17.72 17.13 0.30 2.56 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 59.5
4A0088F 2 12.95 24.80 10.16 10.24 0.31 20.08 19.49 0.30 4.72 – 4.13 0.09 0.13 M6 86.0
<1>
4A0103F 12.95 24.80 10.16 10.24 0.31 20.08 19.49 0.30 4.72 – 4.13 0.09 0.13 M6 86.0
4A0139F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 99.2
4A0165F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 101.4
4A0208A 17.95 37.80 12.99 12.80 0.31 27.76 26.77 0.49 10.04 – 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 191.8
4A0250A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 233.7
2
4A0296A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 246.9
4A0362A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 257.9
<1> Removing the top protective cover from a IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection while retaining IP20 conformity.
Dimensions (in)
Drive Model
5A0003F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
5A0004F 5.51 11.81 5.79 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 1.50 0.20 – M5 7.5
5A0006F 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
5A0009F 5.51 11.81 6.46 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 8.2
1
5A0011F <1> 5.51 11.81 6.57 4.80 – 10.24 9.76 0.24 1.57 0.06 2.17 0.20 – M5 9.0
5A0017F 7.09 13.39 7.36 6.30 – 11.81 11.18 0.31 1.57 0.06 2.95 0.20 – M5 13.2
5A0022F 7.09 13.39 7.36 6.30 – 11.81 11.18 0.31 1.57 0.06 2.95 0.20 – M5 13.2
5A0027F 8.66 15.75 7.76 7.56 – 13.78 13.19 0.31 1.97 0.06 3.07 0.20 – M6 19.2
5A0032F 8.66 15.75 7.76 7.56 – 13.78 13.19 0.31 1.97 0.06 3.07 0.20 – M6 19.2
5A0041F 10.98 20.28 10.16 8.66 0.31 17.72 17.13 0.30 2.56 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 59.5
5A0052F 10.98 20.28 10.16 8.66 0.31 17.72 17.13 0.30 2.56 – 3.94 0.09 0.09 M6 59.5
5A0062F 2 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 99.2
5A0077F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 99.2
5A0099F 12.95 28.74 11.14 10.24 0.31 21.65 21.06 0.30 7.09 – 4.33 0.09 0.09 M6 99.2
5A0125A 17.95 37.80 12.99 12.80 0.31 27.76 26.77 0.49 10.04 – 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 191.8
5A0145A 17.95 37.80 12.99 12.80 0.31 27.76 26.77 0.49 10.04 – 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 191.8
2
5A0192A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 233.7
5A0242A 19.84 45.98 13.78 14.57 0.31 31.50 30.43 0.51 14.49 – 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 257.9
<1> Removing the top protective cover or bottom conduit bracket from an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection while
maintaining IP20 conformity.
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Conduit Bracket Dimensions

W W
Ød5
W W W1 W1
Ød5
W W Ød6 W1 W1 W2 W2
Ød6 Ød6
Ød7
Ød5 Ød7
D2
D1
D1
D1
D2
D3
D3
D2
D3
D
D
W1 W1
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
W W W W Ød5
W1 W1 Ød5 W1 W1 W W
Ød5
W2 W2 W2 W2 W1 W1
Ød6
Ød6 Ød6
Ød7
D1
D1
D1
D2
D3
D2
D2
D3
D3
Ød7
D
D
D
Figure 6
Figure 4 Figure 5
W W W W
W2 Ød5
W W W1 W1
Ød5
W1 W4 W1 W1 Ød5 W4 W4
W3 W3 Ød6 W3 Ød6
W2 W2 Ød6
Ød7
D1
D1
D2
D2
D1
D3
D2
D3
D3
D4
D
D
W2 W2 Ød7
D
W3 W3 Ød7 Figure 9 2
Figure 8
Figure 7
Table 2.5 Conduit Bracket Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1

Dimensions (in) Diameter (in)
Drive Model
Figure W D W1 W2 W3 W4 D1 D2 D3 D4 d5 d6 d7
200 V Class
2A0004F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
2A0006F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
2A0008F 1 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – – – –
2A0010F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
2A0012F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –

Drive Model
2A0018F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0021F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0030F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0040F 2 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0056F 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0069F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0081F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2A0110F 4 3.4 3.9 1.5 0.9 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.4 1.1 –
2A0138F 5 3.9 3.9 3.5 1.6 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.1
2A0169F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
7
2A0211F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
2A0250A 6.9 5.1 3.6 3.3 1.0 – 5.4 2.0 1.6 – 2.0 2.4 1.4
8
2A0312A 6.9 5.1 3.6 3.3 1.0 – 5.4 2.0 1.6 – 2.0 2.4 1.4
2A0360A 9 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
400 V Class
4A0002F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0004F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0005F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0007F 1 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0009F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0011F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0018F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
4A0023F 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
4A0031F 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2
4A0038F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
4A0044F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
4A0058F 3.4 3.9 1.5 0.9 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.4 1.1 2.0
3
4A0072F 3.5 3.9 1.6 0.9 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.4 1.1 2.0
4A0088F 3.3 4.1 0.9 – – – 3.9 2.6 1.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.1
6
4A0103F 3.3 4.1 0.9 – – – 3.9 2.6 1.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.1
4A0139F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
7
4A0165F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
4A0208A 8 6.9 5.1 3.6 3.3 1.0 – 5.4 2.0 1.6 – 2.0 2.4 1.4
4A0250A 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
4A0296A 9 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
4A0362A 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
600 V Class
5A0003F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
5A0004F 1.7 1.5 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
5A0006F 1 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
5A0009F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –
5A0011F 1.7 2.2 1.5 – – – 1.6 2.8 3.1 – 0.9 1.4 –

Drive Model
5A0017F 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
5A0022F 1 3 2.2 – – – 1.9 3.3 2.1 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
2
5A0027F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
5A0032F 1.1 3.1 2.5 – – – 2 3.4 2.2 – 1.4 0.9 1.7
5A0041F 3.5 3.9 1.6 0.9 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.4 1.1 2.0
3
5A0052F 3.5 3.9 1.6 0.9 – – 3.9 1.7 1.0 – 2.4 1.1 2.0
5A0062F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
5A0077F 7 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
5A0099F 4.4 4.3 2.2 0.6 1.2 2.6 4.7 4.3 2.1 1.6 2.0 1.4 2.4
5A0125A 6.9 5.1 3.6 3.3 1.0 – 5.4 2.0 1.6 – 2.0 2.4 1.4
8
5A0145A 6.9 5.1 3.6 3.3 1.0 – 5.4 2.0 1.6 – 2.0 2.4 1.4
5A0192A 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
9
5A0242A 7.5 5.1 4.1 1.2 1.1 2.8 6.2 2.8 2.0 – 2.0 2.4 1.7
Note: Removing the top protective cover or bottom conduit bracket from an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection
while maintaining IP20 conformity.
n IP00/Open Type Enclosure Drives

W1 4-d
t2
W1 4-d
t2
H1
H
H1
H
t1
H2
t1 D1
D1
H2
Max W2 Max W2 D Max W2 W Max W2 D

W
Figure 1
Figure 2
W1 6-d
W3 W3 t2
2
H1
H
t1
H2
D1
D
Max W2 W Max W2
Figure 3
Table 2.6 Dimensions for IP00/Open Type Enclosure: 200 V Class

Drive Dimensions (in)
Model Figure W H D W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d Wt. (lb)
2A0250A
<1> 17.72 27.76 12.99 12.80 0.39 26.77 0.49 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 167.6
2A0312A
<1> 17.72 27.76 12.99 12.80 0.39 26.77 0.49 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 176.4
1
2A0360A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 216.1
2A0415A 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 218.3
<1> Customers may convert these models to IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosures using an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit. Refer to IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit
Selection on page 35 to select the appropriate kit.
Dimensions (in)
Drive
Model Wt.
Figure W H D W1 W2 W3 W4 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (lb)
4A0208A 17.72 27.76 12.99 12.80 0.39 – – 26.77 0.49 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 174.2
<1>
4A0250A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 – – 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 211.6
1
4A0296A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 – – 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 224.9
4A0362A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 – – 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 235.9
4A0414A 2 19.69 37.40 14.57 14.57 0.31 – – 36.34 0.51 5.31 0.18 0.18 M12 275.6
4A0515A 26.38 44.88 14.57 17.32 0.24 8.66 – 43.70 0.59 5.91 0.18 0.18 M12 476.2
3
4A0675A 26.38 44.88 14.57 17.32 0.24 8.66 – 43.70 0.59 5.91 0.18 0.18 M12 487.2
Dimensions (in)
Drive
Model Wt.
Figure W H D W1 W2 W3 W4 H1 H2 D1 t1 t2 d (lb)
5A0125A 17.72 27.76 12.99 12.80 0.39 – – 26.77 0.49 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 174.2
<1>
5A0145A
<1> 17.72 27.76 12.99 12.80 0.39 – – 26.77 0.49 5.12 0.13 0.13 M10 174.2
1
5A0192A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 – – 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 235.9
5A0242A
<1> 19.69 31.50 13.78 14.57 0.39 – – 30.43 0.51 5.12 0.18 0.18 M12 235.9
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit Selection

Customers may convert IP00/Open Type models to IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosures. Refer to Table 2.9 to select the appropriate
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit when performing the conversion.
Contact a Yaskawa representative for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit availability for IP00/Open Type models not listed.
Table 2.9 IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit Selection
IP00/Open Type IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit Code Comments
Drive Model
2A0250A
2A0312A
100-054-503
2A0360A
4A0208A
4A0250A Refer to IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure
4A0296A 100-054-504 Drives on page 29 for drive dimensions with the
IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit installed.
4A0362A
5A0125A
100-054-503
5A0145A
5A0192A
100-054-504
5A0242A
2
3
Electrical Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control circuit terminals, motor, and power
supply.
3.1 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM.................................................................38

3.2 MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM............................................................41
3.3 TERMINAL COVER................................................................................................43
3.4 DIGITAL OPERATOR AND FRONT COVER........................................................45
3.5 TOP PROTECTIVE COVER...................................................................................48
3.6 MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING.........................................................................................49
3.7 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING................................................................................60
3.8 CONTROL I/O CONNECTIONS.............................................................................65
3.9 CONNECT TO A PC...............................................................................................69
3.10 WIRING CHECKLIST.............................................................................................70
3.1 Standard Connection Diagram

Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.1. It is possible to set and run the drive via the digital operator
without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up Programming &
Operation on page 71 for instructions on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate wiring could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class),
480 Vac maximum (400 V class), 600 Vac maximum (600 V class).
NOTICE: When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor
insulation voltage or use a drive duty motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.
Note: The minimum load for the relay outputs M1-M2, M3-M4, MA-MB-MC, and MD-ME-MF is 10 mA.
<12>
Terminals -, +1, +2, B1, B2 are DC link choke <1> FU
for connection options. Never (option)
connect power supply lines to U X FV M
these terminals Braking resistor
Jumper FW Cooling fan
(option) <2>
Wiring sequence should shut off
power to the drive when a fault +2 +1 － B1 B2
output is triggered. U
Main Circuit U/T1
Main V
Three-Phase Switch Fuse V/T2 M
Power Supply R
200 to 600 V
50/60 Hz S
EMC
Filter
R/L1
S/L2 P1000 Drive W/T3
W
(Depending on T T/L3
model capacity)
Control Circuit <3>
Ground
Forward Run / Stop S1 Option board

connectors
Reverse Run / Stop S2 CN5-C
CN5-B
External fault S3
CN5-A
Fault reset S4
Terminal board
jumpers and switches
Multi-function Multi-speed step 1 S5
digtial inputs DIP Switch S2
(default setting) Off On
Term. Res. On/Off
Multi-speed step 2 S6
V
Jumper S1
Jog speed S7 I
A1/A2/A3 Volt./Curr.
Selection
A1 A2 A3
External Baseblock S8
Jumper S5
V
SN AM/FM Volt./Curr.
I Selection
Sink / Source mode SC FM AM
selection wire link

(default: Sink) <4> SP MA
Fault output
+24 V <5> MB 250 Vac, max. 1 A
30 Vdc, max 1 A
MC (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
Shield ground terminal
MD Multi-function relay output (Speed Agree H2-03)
RP Pulse Train Input (max 32 kHz)
ME 250 Vac, max. 1 A
<6> 30 Vdc, max 1 A
+V Power supply +10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA
MF (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
2 kΩ
A1 Analog Input 1 (Frequency Reference Bias)
0 to +/-10Vdc (20 kΩ) M1 Multi-function relay output (During Run H2-01)
Multi-function 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) / 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) 250 Vac, max. 1 A
analog/pulse M2 30 Vdc, max 1 A
train inputs
A2 Analog Input 2 (Frequency Reference Bias)
0 to +10Vdc (20 kΩ) (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) / 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) <7>
M3 Multi-function relay output (Zero Speed H2-02)
250 Vac, max. 1 A
A3 Analog Input 3 (Aux. Frequency Reference) M4 30 Vdc, max 1 A
0 to +/-10Vdc (20 kΩ) (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA)
AC 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) / 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) <8>
0 V Note: When A1 & A3 using current input
Resolution = 10 bit plus sign
Termination resistor
(120 Ω , 1/2 W)
DIP
Switch S2
R+
R- <9>
MEMOBUS/Modbus comm. FM
RS-422/RS-485 S+ Multi-function analog output 1
max. 115.2 kBps － + (Output frequency)
S- FM -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA)
or 4 to 20 mA <10>
IG <11> AM
Multi-function analog output 2
3
AC － +
AM (Output current)
+24 Vdc + -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA)
24V 0V
Transducer or 4 to 20 mA <10>
Supply SN E (G)
(max. 150 mA) －
shielded line twisted-pair shielded line control circuit terminal main circuit terminal
Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: model 2A0040)

<1> Remove the jumper when installing a DC link choke. Models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675 come with a built-in
DC link choke.
<2> Set L8-55 to 0 to disable the protection function of the built-in braking transistor of the drive when using an optional regenerative
converter or dynamic braking option. Leaving L8-55 enabled may cause a braking resistor fault (rF). Additionally, disable Stall
Prevention (L3-04 = 0) when using an optional regenerative converter, regenerative or braking units, or dynamic braking option.
Leaving If L3-04 enabled may prevent the drive from stopping within the specified deceleration time.
<3> Supplying power to the control circuit separately from the main circuit requires 24 V power supply (option).
<4> This figure illustrates an example of a sequence input to S1 through S8 using a non-powered relay or an NPN transistor. Install
the wire link between terminals SC-SP for Sink mode, between SC-SN for Source mode, or leave the link out for external power
supply. Never short terminals SP and SN, as it will damage the drive.
<5> This voltage source supplies a maximum current of 150 mA.
<6> The maximum output current capacity for the +V terminal on the control circuit is 20 mA. Never short terminals +V and AC, as
it can cause erroneous operation or damage the drive.
<7> Set jumper S1 to select between a voltage or current input signal to terminal A2. The default setting is for current input.
<8> Set jumper S1 to select between a voltage or current input signal to terminal A1 and A3. The default setting is for voltage input.
<9> Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
<10> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not
intended for use as a feedback-type signal.
<11> Use jumper S5 to select between voltage or current output signals at terminals AM and FM. Set parameters H4-07 and H4-08
accordingly.
<12> Self-cooling motors do not require the same wiring necessary for motors with cooling fans.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal parameters are
properly set. Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary
closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When using a 3-Wire sequence, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence prior to wiring the control terminals
and set parameter b1-17 to 0 so the drive will not accept a Run command at power up (default). If the drive is wired for a 3-Wire sequence
but set up for a 2-Wire sequence (default), and parameter b1-17 is set to 1 so the drive accepts a Run command at power up, the motor
will rotate in reverse direction at drive power up and may cause injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before executing the application preset
function. Executing the application preset function or setting A1-03 ≠ 0 will change the drive I/O terminal functions and may cause unexpected
equipment operation. Failure to comply may cause death or serious injury.
NOTICE: When using the automatic fault restart function with wiring designed to shut off the power supply upon drive fault, make sure the
drive does not trigger a fault output during fault restart (L5-02 = 0, default). Failure to comply will prevent the automatic fault restart function
from working properly.
3.2 Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to diagrams in this section when wiring the main circuit of the drive. Connections may vary based on drive capacity.
The DC power supply for the main circuit also provides power to the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “–” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper wiring
connections could damage the drive.
u Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0004 to 2A0081

B1 B2
+1
+2 Relay
Current
sensor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 +
V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Control Operator
Gate board board
Figure 3.2 Connecting Main Circuit Terminals
u Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0110, 2A0138

B1 B2
+1
Relay
DC link Current
choke sensor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 + V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
–
3
Gate board Control Operator

board

+3
+1
Relay
DC link Current
choke sensor
R/L1 U/T1
+
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Gate board Control Operator

board

+3
+1
Relay
DC link Current
choke sensor
R/L1 U/T1
+
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
24 V Control
Power Gate board Operator
Supply board
3.3 Terminal Cover
3.3 Terminal Cover

Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal cover for wiring and to reattach the terminal cover after wiring is complete.
u Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, 5A0003 to 5A0032

(IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure)
n Removing the Terminal Cover
1. Loosen the terminal cover screw using a #2 Phillips screwdriver. Screw sizes vary by drive model.
Figure 3.6 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
2. Push in on the tab located on the bottom of the terminal cover and gently pull forward to remove the terminal cover.
Figure 3.7 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
n Reattaching the Terminal Cover
Power lines and signal wiring should pass through the opening provided. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on
page 58 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 63 for details on wiring.
Reattach the terminal cover after completing the wiring to the drive and other devices.
Connect ground wiring first,

followed by the main circuit,
and then wire the control circuit.
Power lines and signal wiring
exit through the opening provided.
Figure 3.8 Reattaching the Terminal Cover on an IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drive
3.3 Terminal Cover
u Models 2A0110 to 2A0250, 4A0208 to 4A0675, and 5A0125 to 5A0242 (IP00/Open Type
Enclosure)
n Removing the Terminal Cover
1. Loosen the screws on the terminal cover, then pull down on the cover.
Note: The terminal cover and the number of terminal cover screws differ depending on the drive model.
CAUTION! Do not completely remove the cover screws, just loosen them. If the cover screws are removed completely, the terminal
cover may fall off causing an injury.
Figure 3.9 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP00/Open Type Enclosure Drive
2. Pull forward on the terminal cover to free it from the drive.
Figure 3.10 Removing the Terminal Cover on an IP00/Open Type Enclosure Drive
n Reattaching the Terminal Cover

After wiring the terminal board and other devices, double-check connections and reattach the terminal cover. Refer to Wiring
the Main Circuit Terminal on page 58 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 63 for details on wiring.
<1>
Figure 3.11 Reattaching the Terminal Cover on an IP00/Open Type Enclosure Drive
<1> Connect the ground wiring first, then the main circuit wiring, and finally the control circuit wiring.
3.4 Digital Operator and Front Cover

Detach the digital operator from the drive for remote operation or when opening the front cover to install an option card.
NOTICE: Be sure to remove the digital operator prior to opening or reattaching the front cover. Leaving the digital operator plugged into the
drive when removing the front cover can result in erroneous operation caused by a poor connection. Firmly fasten the front cover back into
place before reattaching the digital operator.
u Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator

n Removing the Digital Operator
While pressing on the tab located on the right side of the digital operator, pull the digital operator forward to remove it from
the drive.
Figure 3.12 Removing the Digital Operator
n Reattaching the Digital Operator

Insert the digital operator into the opening in the top cover while aligning it with the notches on the left side of the opening.
Next, press gently on the right side of the operator until it clicks into place.
Figure 3.13 Reattaching the Digital Operator
u Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover
n Removing the Front Cover
Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032
After removing the terminal cover and the digital operator, loosen the screw that affixes the front cover (models
2A0056, 4A0038, 5A0022, and 5A0027 do not use a screw to affix the front cover) . Pinch in on the tabs found on each side
of the front cover, then pull forward to remove it from the drive.
3
Figure 3.14 Remove the Front Cover (2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032)
Models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675

1. Remove the terminal cover and the digital operator.
2. Loosen the installation screw on the front cover.
3. Use a straight-edge screwdriver to loosen the hooks on each side of the cover that hold it in place.
Hook Hook
Front cover Free hooks on both

installation screw sides of the cover
Figure 3.15 Remove the Front Cover (2A0010 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675)
4. Unhook the left side of the front cover then swing the left side towards you as shown in Figure 3.16 until the cover
comes off.
Figure 3.16 Remove the Front Cover (2A0010 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675)
n Reattaching the Front Cover

Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032
Reverse the instructions given in Remove the Front Cover (2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032)
on page 45 to reattach the front cover. Pinch inwards on the hooks found on each side of the front cover while guiding it back
into the drive. Make sure it clicks firmly into place.
Models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675
1. Slide the front cover so the hooks on the top connect to the drive.
Figure 3.17 Reattach the Front Cover (2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675)
2. After connecting the hooks to the drive, press firmly on the cover to lock it into place.
3
3.5 Top Protective Cover
3.5 Top Protective Cover

Drive models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032 are designed to IP20/NEMA Type 1
specifications with a protective cover on the top. Removing this top protective cover or the bottom conduit bracket from an
IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids the NEMA Type 1 protection while maintaining IP20 conformity.
u Removing the Top Protective Cover

Insert the tip of a straight-edge screwdriver into the small opening located on the front edge of the top protective cover. Gently
apply pressure as shown in the figure below to free the cover from the drive.
Note: Removing the top protective cover or the bottom conduit bracket from an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids the NEMA Type 1
protection while maintaining IP20 conformity.
Figure 3.18 Removing the Top Protective Cover
u Reattaching the Top Protective Cover

Insert the two small protruding hooks on the rear side of the top protective cover into the provided mounting holes near the
back of the drive, then press down on the front side of the top protective cover to fasten the cover into place.
Protective Cover
Mounting Holes
Figure 3.19 Reattaching the Protective Cover
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit in
the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
NOTICE: Do not switch the drive input to start or stop the motor. Frequently switching the drive on and off shortens the life of the DC bus
charge circuit and the DC bus capacitors, and can cause premature drive failures. For the full performance life, refrain from switching the
drive on and off more than once every 30 minutes.
Refer to Input Fuse Installation on page 243 for details on fuse selection.
u Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type
200 V 2A0004 to 2A0081 2A0110 to 2A0138 2A0169 to 2A0415
Class
400 V Function Page
Drive Model 4A0002 to 4A0044 4A0058, 4A0072 4A0088 to 4A0675
Class
600 V 5A0003 to 5A0032 5A0041 to 5A0052 5A0062 to 5A0242
Class
R/L1
S/L2 Main circuit power supply input Connects line power to the drive 39
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor 39
W/T3
B1 Available for connecting a braking
Braking resistor Not available –
B2 resistor or a braking resistor unit option
+2 • DC link choke Not available
connection
+1 (+1, +2) For connecting:
(remove the
shorting bar • the drive to a DC power supply
DC power supply • DC power supply (terminals +1 and – are not EU/CE
between input –
input (+1, −) or UL approved)
– +1 and +2) (+1, −) • Braking unit • dynamic braking options
• DC power supply
connection (+3, −)
input • a DC link choke
(+1, −)
+3 Not available
For 200 V class: 100 Ω or less
For 400 V class: 10 Ω or less Grounding terminal 58
For 600 V class: 10 Ω or less
Note: Use terminals B1 and – when installing a CDBR-type braking unit on drives with built-in braking transistors (Models 2A0004 to 2A0138,
4A0002 to 4A0072, and 5A0003 to 5A0052). 3
u Protecting Main Circuit Terminals

n Insulation Caps or Sleeves
Use insulation caps or sleeves when wiring the drive with crimp terminals. Take particular care to ensure that the wiring does
not touch nearby terminals or the surrounding case.
n Insulation Barrier
Insulation barriers are packaged with drive models 4A0414 through 4A0675 to provide added protection between terminals.
Yaskawa recommends using the provided insulation barriers to ensure proper wiring. Refer to Figure 3.20 for instructions on
placement of the insulation barriers.
Insulation Barrier
Figure 3.20 Installing Insulation Barriers
u Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.
Gauges listed in the tables are for use in the United States.
Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings (ND) using 75 °C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient
temperature within 40 °C and wiring distance less than 100 m.
2. Terminals +1, +2, +3, –, B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a DC link choke or braking resistor. Do not connect
other nonspecific devices to these terminals.
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater
than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to
calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
• Refer to instruction manual TOBP C720600 00 for braking transistor option or braking resistor option wire gauges.
• Use terminals +1 and – when connecting a regenerative converter or a regen unit.
NOTICE: Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or –. Failure to comply may cause damage to the drive circuitry.
• Use terminals B1 and – when installing a CDBR-type braking unit on drives with built-in braking transistors (models 2A0004
to 2A0138, 4A0002 to 4A0072, and 5A0003 to 5A0052).
NOTICE: Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or –. Failure to comply may cause damage to the drive circuitry.
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 239 for information on UL compliance.
Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires the use of closed-
loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models 2A0110 to 2A0415 and 4A0058 to 4A0675. Use
only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Refer to Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size on page
239 for closed-loop crimp terminal recommendations.
The wire gauges listed in the following tables are Yaskawa recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge
selections.
n Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Drive Model Terminal Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque
AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Size N·m (lb.in.)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
2A0004 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
2A0006 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
M4
2A0008 (10.6 to 13.3)
2A0010 B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 <1> 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0012 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 <1> 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 10 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 14 to 10
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0018 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 <1> 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 10
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
2A0021 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 <1> 12 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (18.4 to 20.4)
2A0030
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 <1> 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 8 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 8 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
–, +1, +2 – 6 (18.4 to 20.4)
2A0040
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 <1> 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
5.4 to 6.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4 M6
(47.8 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
2A0056
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 6 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 4 to 3
9.9 to 11.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 4 to 3 M8
(87.6 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 4 to 3
2A0069
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 8 to 6 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 3 to 2
9.9 to 11.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 3 to 2 M8
(87.6 to 97.4)
–, +1, +2 – 3 to 2
2A0081
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 6 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 3 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 3 to 1/0
9 to 11
2A0110 <2> –, +1 – 2 to 1/0 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 1/0
6 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 1 to 2/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1 to 2/0 18 to 23
M10
–, +1 – 1/0 to 3/0 (159 to 204)
2A0138 <2>
B1, B2 – 4 to 2/0
9 to 11
4 4 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 2/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0
18 to 23
2A0169 <2> –, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0
18 to 23
2A0211 <2> –, +1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 1/0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0250 <2> 18 to 23
+3 – 2 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
3 3 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 3/0 to 300
2A0312 <2> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P 4/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 2P 4/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 250 to 600
2A0360 <2> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 350 × 2P 250 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P 300 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 300 to 600
2A0415 <2> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
<1> When installing an EMC filter, additional measures must be taken to comply with IEC61800-5-1. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 234
for details.
<2> Drive models 2A0110 to 2A0415 require the use of UL-Listed closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended
by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0002 –, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
M4
4A0004 (10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
12 14 to 12
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
4A0005
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0007 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
4A0009 B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
4A0011 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 12 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 12 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (18.4 to 20.4)
4A0018
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 14 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 2.1 to 2.3
M4
–, +1, +2 – 12 to 6 (18.4 to 20.4)
4A0023
B1, B2 – 12 to 10
2 to 2.5
10 12 to 10 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 8 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 to 6 M5 2.7 to 3.0
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (23.9 to 26.6)
4A0031
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
4 to 6
8 10 to 8 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 8 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 8 to 6 M5 2.7 to 3.0
–, +1, +2 – 6 (23.9 to 26.6)
4A0038
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
4 to 6
6 10 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 6 to 4
5.4 to 6.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 4 M6
(47.8 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
4A0044
2.7 to 3.0
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(23.9 to 26.6)
4 to 6
6 8 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 6 to 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 6 to 4
9 to 11
4A0058 <1> –, +1 – 6 to 1 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 8 to 4
6 8 to 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 4 to 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 4 to 3
9 to 11
4A0072 <1> –, +1 – 4 to 1 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 6 to 3
6 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 3 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 3 to 1/0
9 to 11
4A0088 <1> –, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 6 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 2 to 1/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 2 to 1/0
9 to 11
4A0103 <1> –, +1 – 3 to 1/0 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
+3 – 4 to 1/0
4 6 to 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 1/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1/0 to 4/0
18 to 23
4A0139 <1> –, +1 – 1/0 to 4/0 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 4/0
4 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 3/0 to 4/0
18 to 23
4A0165 <1> –,+1 – 1 to 4/0 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 4/0
4 4 to 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 2 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 2 to 300
18 to 23
4A0208 <1> –,+1 – 1 to 250 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 3 to 3/0
4 4 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 400 1 to 600
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 400 1/0 to 600
18 to 23
4A0250 <1> –,+1 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1 to 325
2 2 to 350
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 500 2/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 500 2/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–,+1 – 3/0 to 600
4A0296 <1> 18 to 23
+3 – 1 to 325 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
2 2 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–,+1 – 4/0 to 600
4A0362 <1> 18 to 23
+3 – 3/0 to 600 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 × 2P 4/0 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P 4/0 to 300
32 to 40
4A0414 <1> <2> –,+1 – 3/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
+3 – 3/0 to 300
1 1 to 3/0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 4P 3/0 to 300 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 4P 3/0 to 300
32 to 40
4A0515 <1> <2> –,+1 – 1/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
+3 – 1/0 to 300
1/0 1/0 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 × 4P 4/0 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 4P 4/0 to 300
32 to 40
4A0675 <1> <2> –,+1 – 1/0 to 300 M12
(283 to 354)
+3 – 1/0 to 300
2/0 2/0 to 300
<1> Drive models 4A0058 to 4A0675 require the use of UL-Listed closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended
by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.
<2> When installing an EMC filter, additional measures must be taken to comply with IEC61800-5-1. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 234
for details.

Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque
Drive Model Terminal
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
5A0003
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
5A0004 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
5A0006 B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 10
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 10 1.2 to 1.5
5A0009 M4
(10.6 to 13.3)
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
10 12 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 14 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 6 1.2 to 1.5
M4
–, +1, +2 – 14 to 6 (10.6 to 13.3)
5A0011
B1, B2 – 14 to 10
2 to 2.5
8 12 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 2 to 2.5
M5
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (17.7 to 22.1)
5A0017
B1, B2 – 10 to 8
4 to 6
8 12 to 8 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 to 6 2 to 2.5
M5
–, +1, +2 – 10 to 6 (17.7 to 22.1)
5A0022
B1, B2 – 10 to 8
4 to 6
8 10 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 6 to 4
4 to 6
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 4 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
–, +1, +2 – 6 to 4
5A0027
5A0032 2 to 2.5
B1, B2 – 10 to 8 M5
(17.7 to 22.1)
4 to 6
6 10 to 6 M6
(35.4 to 53.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 to 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 10 to 3
–, +1 – 6 to 1 9 to 11
5A0041 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 12 to 3
6 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 10 to 3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 10 to 3
–, +1 – 6 to 1 9 to 11
5A0052 M8
(79.7 to 97.4)
B1, B2 – 8 to 3
6 6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 10 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 10 to 4/0
–, +1 – 4 to 4/0 18 to 23
5A0062 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 6 to 4/0
4 4
Recomm. Gauge Wire Range Screw Tightening Torque

Drive Model Terminal
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 10 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 10 to 4/0
–, +1 – 3 to 4/0 18 to 23
5A0077 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 6 to 4/0
4 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 10 to 4/0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 10 to 4/0
–, +1 – 2 to 4/0 18 to 23
5A0099 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 4 to 4/0
4 4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 1 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 1 to 300
–, +1 – 2/0 to 3/0 18 to 23
5A0125 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1 to 1/0
3 4 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 2/0 to 300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 2/0 to 300
–, +1 – 3/0 to 4/0 18 to 23
5A0145 M10
(159 to 204)
+3 – 1/0 to 2/0
3 4 to 300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 2/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 250 2/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 2/0 to 400
5A0192
18 to 23
+3 – 2/0 to 250 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 400 2/0 to 600
32 to 40
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 350 2/0 to 600 M12
(283 to 354)
–, +1 – 2/0 to 500
5A0242
18 to 23
+3 – 250 to 300 M10
(159 to 204)
32 to 40
1 1 to 350 M12
(283 to 354)
u Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect the AC power line to the output terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
3
NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order for the drive and motor should
match. Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Failure to comply could result in damage
to the drive, phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters or ground fault circuit interrupters.
n Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

Voltage drop along the motor cable may cause reduced motor torque when the wiring between the drive and the motor is too
long, especially at low frequency output. This can also be a problem when motors are connected in parallel with a fairly long
motor cable. Drive output current will increase as the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in leakage current
may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to Table 3.5. If the motor wiring distance exceeds 100 m because of the system
configuration, reduce the ground currents. Refer to C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection on page 94.
Table 3.5 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

Cable Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Greater than 100 m
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
Note: When setting carrier frequency for drives running multiple motors, calculate cable length as the total wiring distance to all connected motors.
n Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions below when wiring the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety
regulations. Because the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA in models 4A0414 and larger, IEC 61800-5-1 states that either the power supply
must be automatically disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor or a protective earthing conductor with a
cross-section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize
the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal (200 V class: ground to 100 Ω or less; 400 V class: ground
to 10 Ω or less; 600 V class: ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting
ungrounded electrical equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper
equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper equipment grounding could result in
abnormal operation of drive or equipment.
Refer to Figure 3.21 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
Figure 3.21 Multiple Drive Wiring
n Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply may
result in death or serious injury.
Wire the main circuit terminals after the terminal board has been properly grounded.
Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, and 5A0003 to 5A0032 have a cover placed over the DC bus and braking
circuit terminals prior to shipment to help prevent miswiring. Use wire cutters to cut away covers as needed for terminals.
B1 B2
B
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 _
+1 +2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
A – Braking circuit protective cover B – DC bus protective cover

Figure 3.22 Protecting Cover to Prevent Miswiring (Model 5A0011)
n Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 41 when wiring terminals on the main power circuit of the drive.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking resistors to any other terminals.
Improper wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
3
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring

u Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions
Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to S8), multi-function digital outputs
(M1 to M4), multi-function analog inputs (A1 to A3), and multi-function analog monitor output (FM, AM). The default setting
is listed next to each terminal in Figure 3.1 on page 39.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being wired. Operating a drive with
untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Setting parameter
A1-03 may change the I/O terminal function automatically from the factory setting. Refer to Application Selection on page 84. Failure
to comply may result in death or serious injury.
n Input Terminals
Table 3.6 lists the input terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function input.
Table 3.6 Control Circuit Input Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting Page
Multi-function input 1
S1 (Closed: Forward run, Open: Stop)
S2 (Closed: Reverse run, Open: Stop)
S3 (External fault, N.O.)
Multi-function input 4 • Photocoupler
S4 (Fault reset) • 24 Vdc, 8 mA
Multi-function input 5 • Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs on 196
S5 (Multi-step speed reference 1) page 65.
Multi-Function Multi-function input 6
Digital Inputs S6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
S7 (Jog reference)
S8 (Baseblock command (N.O.))
SC Multi-function input common Multi-function input common
SP Digital input power supply +24 Vdc 24 Vdc power supply for digital inputs, 150 mA max 65
Digital input power supply 0 V NOTICE: Do not jumper or short terminals SP and SN. Failure
SN to comply will damage the drive. 65
24 V transducer power supply 0 V
• Input frequency range: 0 to 32 kHz

Multi-function pulse train input • Signal Duty Cycle: 30 to 70% 87
RP (Frequency reference) • High level: 3.5 to 13.2 Vdc, low level: 0.0 to 0.8 Vdc 204
• Input impedance: 3 kΩ
+V Power supply for analog inputs 10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) 86
24 V use Vdc transducer power supply for customer 150 mA maximum capacity
+24 –
• -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ)

Analog Inputs / A1 Multi-function analog input 1 • 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (input impedance: 250 Ω) 86
Pulse Train (Frequency reference bias) 104
• Voltage or current input must be selected by jumper S1 and H3-01.
Input
• -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) 86
A2 Multi-function analog input 2 • 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (input impedance: 250 Ω) 86
(Frequency reference bias)
• Voltage or current input must be selected by jumper S1 and H3-09. 106
• -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
A3 Multi-function analog input 3 • 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (input impedance: 250 Ω) 86
(Frequency reference bias)
• Voltage or current input must be selected by jumper S1 and H3-05.
AC Frequency reference common 0V 86
E (G) Ground for shielded lines and option cards – –
n Output Terminals
Table 3.7 lists the output terminals on the drive. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function output.
Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type No. Terminal Name (Function) Function (Signal Level) Default Setting Page
MA N.O.
Fault Relay 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
MB N.C. output 102
Output Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
MC Fault output common
MD N.O.
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
ME N.C. Output Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
Multi-Function MF Common (Speed agree)
Digital Output M1 102
<1> Multi-function digital output (During run)
M2 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
M3 Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA
Multi-function digital output (Zero speed)
M4
FM Analog monitor output 1 (Output frequency)
Monitor -10 to +10 Vdc, or 0 to +10 Vdc 202
AM Analog monitor output 2 (Output current)
Output
AC Monitor common 0V –
<1> Refrain from assigning functions to digital relay outputs that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life. Switching
life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).
Connect a suppression diode as shown in Figure 3.23 when driving a reactive load such as a relay coil. Ensure the diode rating
is greater than the circuit voltage.
B
C
A D
A – External power, 48 V max. C – Coil

B – Suppression diode D – 50 mA or less
Figure 3.23 Connecting a Suppression Diode
n Serial Communication Terminals

Table 3.8 Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications
Type No. Signal Name Function (Signal Level)
R+ Communications input (+) RS-422/RS-485
R- Communications input (-) MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use an MEMOBUS/Modbus
MEMOBUS/Modbus
S+ Communications output (+) RS-422 or RS-485 cable to connect the drive. communication
Communication <1> protocol
S- Communications output (-) 115.2 kbps (max.)
IG Shield ground 0V
<1> Enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position. Refer to Control
I/O Connections on page 65 for more information on the termination resistor.
3
u Terminal Configuration
The control circuit terminals are arranged as shown in Figure 3.24.
E(G) IG R+ R- S+ S- M1 M2 M3 M4
MD ME MF
V+ AC A1 A2 A3 FM AM AC RP AC 24V
E(G) IG R+ R- S+ S-
M1 M2 M3 M4
V+ AC A1 A2 A3 FM AM AC RP AC 24V MD ME MF
MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 SN SC SP MA MB MC S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 SN SC SP
Figure 3.24 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement
n Wire Size and Torque Specifications

Select appropriate wire type and gauges from Table 3.9. For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the wire
ends. Refer to Table 3.10 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 3.9 Wire Gauges
Tightening Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal
Screw Torque Applicable Recomm. Applicable Recomm.
Terminal Wire Type
Size N•m wire size wire size wire size wire size
(lb. in) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG)
S1-S8, SC, SN, SP
RP, V+, A1, A2, A3,
AC, 24 V Stranded wire:
0.2 to 1.0
MA, MB, MC, MD, ME, 0.5 to 0.6 (24 to 16) 0.25 to 0.5 Shielded wire,
MF M3 0.75 (18) 0.5 (20)
(4.4 to 5.3) Solid wire: (24 to 20) etc.
M1-M4 0.2 to 1.5
(24 to 16)
FM, AM, AC
R+, R-, S+, S-, IG
n Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals

Yaskawa recommends using CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT, to prepare wire ends
with insulated sleeves before connecting to the drive. See Table 3.10 for dimensions.
d1
8 mm
L
d2
Figure 3.25 Ferrule Dimensions
Table 3.10 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes

Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-8YE 12.5 0.8 1.8
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-8TQ 10.5 0.8 1.8 PHOENIX CONTACT
AI 0.5-8WH or
0.5 (20) 14 1.1 2.5
AI 0.5-8OG
u Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and other
high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB, MC, MD, ME, MF and M1 to M4 from wiring to other control circuit lines.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in
drive performance degradation due to improper power supply. Refer to NEC Article 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control,
Signaling, and Power Limited Circuits for requirements concerning class 2 power supplies.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could
result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or
equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
Wire the control circuit only after terminals have been properly grounded and main circuit wiring is complete. Refer to
Terminal Board Wiring Guide on page 64 for details. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in Figure
3.28. Refer to Wire Gauges on page 62.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may result in erroneous operation, damage to the
terminal block, or cause a fire.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or
equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
3
Connect control wires as shown in Figure 3.26 and Figure 3.27.
Preparing wire D
terminal ends
C
A – Loosen screw to insert wire. C – Avoid fraying wire strands when

B – Single wire or stranded wire stripping insulation from wire. Strip
length 5.5 mm.
D – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or less
Blade width of 2.5 mm or less
Figure 3.26 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
Figure 3.27 Terminal Board Location Inside the Drive
When setting the frequency by analog reference from an external potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires (preparing
wire ends as shown in Figure 3.28) and connect the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
E B
A C
D
A – Drive side D – Shield sheath (insulate with tape)
B – Insulation E – Shield
C – Control device side
Figure 3.28 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
NOTICE: The analog signal wiring between the drive and the operator station or peripheral equipment should not exceed 50 meters when
using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.
3.8 Control I/O Connections

u Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch for Digital Inputs
Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SP or SC and SN to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external power
supply for the digital inputs S1 to S8 as shown in Table 3.11 (Default: Sink mode, internal power supply).
NOTICE: Do not short terminals SP and SN. Failure to comply will damage the drive.
Table 3.11 Digital Input Sink/Source/External Power Supply Selection
Drive Internal Power Supply
Mode External 24 Vdc Power Supply
(Terminals SN and SP)
S7 S7
S8 S8
Sinking Mode (NPN) SN SN
SC SC
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
SP External SP
24 Vdc
S7 S7
S8 S8
Sourcing Mode (PNP) SN SN
SC SC
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
External
SP SP
24 Vdc
3
u Using the Pulse Train Output

The pulse train output terminal MP can supply power or be used with an external power supply.
NOTICE: Connect peripheral devices in accordance with the specifications. Failure to comply may cause unexpected drive operation, and
can damage the drive or connected circuits.
n Using Power from the Pulse Output Terminal (Source Mode)

The high voltage level of the pulse output terminal depends on the load impedance.
Load Impedance RL (kΩ) Output Voltage VMP (V) (insulated)
1.5 kΩ 5V
4 kΩ 8V
10 kΩ 10 V
Note: The load resistance needed in order to get a certain high level voltage VMP can be calculated by: RL = VMP• 2 / (12 – VMP)
Load Impedance
MP
VMP RL
AC
Figure 3.29 Pulse Output Connection Using Internal Voltage Supply
n Using External Power Supply (Sink Mode)

The high voltage level of the pulse output signal depends on the external voltage applied. The voltage must be between 12
and 15 Vdc. The load resistance must be adjusted so that the current is lower than 16 mA.
External Power Supply (V) Load Impedance (kΩ)
12 to 15 Vdc ±10% 1.0 kΩ or higher
External Power Supply
Load Impedance
MP
Sink Current
AC
Figure 3.30 Pulse Output Connection Using External Voltage Supply
u Terminals A1, A2, and A3 Input Signal Selection

Terminals A1, A2, and A3 can be used to input either a voltage or a current signal. Select the signal type using jumper S1 as
explained in Table 3.12. Set parameters H3-01, H3-05, and H3-09 accordingly as shown in Table 3.13.
Note: If terminals A1 and A2 are both set for frequency bias (H3-02 = 0 and H3-10 = 0), both input values will be combined to create the frequency
reference.
Jumper S1
A1 A2 A3
Figure 3.31 Terminal A2 Set to Current Input; A1 and A3 Set to Voltage Input
Table 3.12 Jumper S1 Settings
Setting Description
V (top position) Voltage input (-10 to +10 V or 0 to 10 V)
I (bottom position) Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA)
Table 3.13 Voltage/Current Selection Parameter Details

Setting Default
No. Parameter Name Description Range Setting
Selects the signal level for terminal A1. 3
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
H3-01 Terminal A1 signal level selection 1: -10 to 10 Vdc 0 to 3 0
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
Selects the signal level for terminal A3.
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
Selects the signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
u Terminal AM/FM Signal Selection

The signal type for terminals AM and FM can be set to either voltage or current output using jumper S5 on the terminal board
as explained in Table 3.14. When changing the setting of jumper S5, parameters H4-07 and H4-08 must be set accordingly.
The default selection is voltage output for both terminals.
Table 3.14 Jumper S5 Settings
Terminal Voltage Output Current Output
V V
Terminal AM I I
FM AM FM AM
V V
Terminal FM I I
FM AM FM AM
Table 3.15 Parameter H4-07 and H4-08 Details

Setting Default
No. Parameter Name Description Range Setting
H4-07 Terminal AM signal level selection 0: 0 to 10 Vdc
1: -10 to 10 Vdc 0 to 2 0
H4-08 Terminal FM signal level selection 2: 4 to 20 mA
3.9 Connect to a PC
3.9 Connect to a PC
This drive is equipped with a USB port (type-B).
The drive can connect to a USB port on a PC using a USB 2.0, AB-type cable (sold separately). After connecting the drive to
a PC, Yaskawa DriveWizard Industrial software can be used to monitor drive performance and manage parameter settings.
Contact Yaskawa for more information on DriveWizard Industrial.
USB Cable
(Type-AB)
(Type-B) (Type-A)
PC
Figure 3.32 Connecting to a PC (USB)
3
3.10 Wiring Checklist
3.10 Wiring Checklist

No. Item Page(s)
Drive, Peripherals, Option Cards
1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. 22
2 Make sure you have the correct braking resistors, DC link chokes, noise filters, and other peripheral devices. –
3 Check the option card model number. –
Installation Area and Physical Setup
4 Ensure that the area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 26
Power Supply Voltage, Output Voltage
5 The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the drive. 96
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications. 22
7 Verify that the drive is properly sized to run the motor. 221
Main Circuit Wiring

8 Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes. 38
9 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. 41
Properly wire the drive and motor together.
10 The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 should match in order to produce the desired phase 57
order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
11 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 51
Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 51. 51
• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is
greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following
12 formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop: 58
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3
• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency set to C6-02 accordingly.
13 Properly ground the drive. Review page 58. 58
14 Tighten control circuit and grounding terminal screws. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 51. 51
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power supply Drive MC1 OL1
M1
MC2 OL2
15 M2
MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor
OL 1 - OL n ... thermal relay
–
MCn OLn
Mn
Note: Close MC1 – MCn before operating the drive. MC1 – MCn cannot be switched off during run.
Install a magnetic contactor when using a dynamic braking option. Properly install the resistor and ensure that overload
16 –
protection shuts off the power supply using the magnetic contactor.
17 Verify phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or GFCIs are NOT installed on the output side of the drive. –
Control Circuit Wiring
18 Use twisted-pair line for all drive control circuit wiring. 63
19 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND terminal. 63
20 For 3-Wire sequence, set parameters for multi-function contact input terminals S1 – S8, and wire control circuits. –
21 Properly wire any option cards. 63
22 Check for any other wiring mistakes. Only use a multimeter to check wiring. –
23 Properly fasten drive control circuit terminal screws. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 51. 51
24 Pick up all wire clippings. –
25 Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. –
26 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. –
27 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m. –
28 Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m. –
4
Start-Up Programming & Operation
This chapter explains the functions of the digital operator and how to program the drive for initial
operation.
4.1 USING THE DIGITAL OPERATOR........................................................................72

4.2 THE DRIVE, PROGRAMMING, AND CLOCK ADJUSTMENT MODES...............76
4.3 START-UP FLOWCHART......................................................................................82
4.4 POWERING UP THE DRIVE..................................................................................83
4.5 APPLICATION SELECTION..................................................................................84
4.6 BASIC DRIVE SETUP ADJUSTMENTS................................................................85
4.7 AUTO-TUNING.....................................................................................................112
4.8 NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN....................................................................115
4.9 TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED...............................................................117
4.10 TEST RUN CHECKLIST.......................................................................................118
4.11 FAN AND PUMP APPLICATION PRESETS.......................................................119
4.12 FAN AND PUMP APPLICATION PRESET DETAILS.........................................122
4.1 Using the Digital Operator

Use the digital operator to enter Run and Stop commands, edit parameters, and display data including fault and alarm
information.
u Keys and Displays

DIGITAL OPERATOR ALM 12
1
11
F1 F2
2 ESC
LO
RE
9
3 RESET ENTER
8
10 RUN STOP
4 5 6 7
Figure 4.1 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator
No. Display Name Function

F1
Function Key The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the currently displayed menu. The
1 (F1, F2) name of each function appears in the lower half of the display window.
F2
• Returns to the previous display.

2 ESC ESC Key • Moves the cursor one space to the left.
• Pressing and holding this button will return to the Frequency Reference display.
• Moves the cursor to the right.
3 RESET Key
• Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
4 RUN RUN Key Starts the drive in LOCAL mode.
Scrolls up to display the next item, selects parameter numbers, and increments setting
5 Up Arrow Key values.
Scrolls down to display the previous item, selects parameter numbers, and decrements
6 Down Arrow Key setting values.
7 STOP STOP Key <1> Stops drive operation.
• Enters parameter values and settings.
8 ENTER Key
• Selects a menu item to move between displays
<2> Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and an external source (REMOTE)
9 LO/RE Selection Key for the Run command and frequency reference.
10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to page 74 for details.
Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode). Refer to page 74 for
11 LO/RE Light details.
12 ALM LED Light Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page 74.
<1> The STOP key has highest priority. Pressing the STOP key will always cause the drive to stop the motor, even if a Run command is active at any
external Run command source. To disable the STOP key priority, set parameter o2-02 to 0.
<2> The LO/RE key can only switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is stopped. To disable the LO/RE key to prohibit switching between
LOCAL and REMOTE, set parameter o2-01 to 0.
u LCD Display
1 2 3
4
5
9 8 7
Figure 4.2 LCD Display
Table 4.1 Display and Contents

No. Name Display Content
MODE Displayed when in Mode Selection.
MONITR Displayed when in Monitor Mode.
VERIFY Indicates the Verify Menu.
1 Operation Mode Menus
PRMSET Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode.
A.TUNE Displayed during Auto-Tuning.
SETUP Displayed when in Setup Mode.
DRV Displayed when in Drive Mode.
2 Mode Display Area
PRG Displayed when in Programming Mode.
3 Ready Rdy Indicates the drive is ready to run.
4 Data Display — Displays specific data and operation data.
OPR Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the LCD Operator Option.
AI Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the Analog Input of the drive.
Frequency
Reference Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
5 COM Inputs of the drive.
Assignment <1>
Start-Up Programming
OP Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to an Option Unit of the drive.
RP Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the Pulse Train Input of the drive.
RSEQ Displayed when the run command is supplied from a remote source.
& Operation
LO/RE LSEQ Displayed when the run command is supplied from the operator keypad.
6
Display <2> RREF Displayed when the run command is supplied from a remote source.
LREF Displayed when the run command is supplied from the operator keypad.
FWD/REV Pressing F2
switches between forward and reverse. 4
DATA Pressing F2
scrolls to the next display.
Function Key 2
7 (F2)
→ Pressing F2
scrolls the cursor to the right.
RESET Pressing F2 resets the existing drive fault error.
FWD Indicates forward motor operation.
8 FWD/REV
REV Indicates reverse motor operation.
No. Name Display Content

JOG Pressing F1
executes the Jog function.
HELP Pressing F1
displays the Help menu.
Function Key 1
9 ← Pressing F1
scrolls the cursor to the left.
(F1)
HOME Pressing F1
returns to the top menu (Frequency Reference).
ESC Pressing F1
returns to the previous display.
<1> Displayed when in Frequency Reference Mode.
<2> Displayed when in Frequency Reference Mode and Monitor Mode.
u ALARM (ALM) LED Displays

Table 4.2 ALARM (ALM) LED Status and Contents
State Content Display
Illuminated When the drive detects an alarm or error.
• When an alarm occurs.

Flashing • When an oPE is detected.
• When a fault or error occurs during Auto-Tuning.
Off Normal operation (no fault or alarm).
u LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

Table 4.3 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly Off
When the operator is selected When a device other than the operator
for Run command and is selected for Run command and
— —
frequency reference control frequency reference control
(LOCAL) (REMOTE)
• While the drive was set to LOCAL,
a Run command was entered to the
input terminals then the drive was
switched to REMOTE.
• A Run command was entered via
the input terminals while the drive
• During deceleration to was not in Drive Mode.
stop • During deceleration when a Fast
During run • When a Run command is Stop command was entered. During stop
input and frequency • The drive output is shut off by the
reference is 0 Hz Safe Disable function.
• The STOP key was pressed while
drive was running in REMOTE.
• The drive was powered up with
b1-17 = 0 (default) while the Run
command is active.
Examples
u Menu Structure for Digital Operator

Turn the power on
(RUN LED lit)
- MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR) FREF (d1-01)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-01= 000.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ （0.00～60.00）
U1-03= 0.00A LREF “0.00Hz”
JOG FWD FWD/REV
← FWD
→ <3>
- MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

Monitor Menu Monitor Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0.00Hz U1 -01= 0.00Hz U1- 01 = 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV JOG FWD FWD/REV JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - PRG -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy

Fault Trace Output Freq
Modified Consts
U2 -01= oC U1- 02 = 0.00Hz
Modified
U2-02= oPr LSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LSEQ
X Parameters U2-03= 0.00Hz LREF U1-04= 0 LREF
HELP FWD DATA <4> JOG FWD FWD/REV JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - PRG
Quick Setting
Initial Display <5>
P1000
HELP FWD DATA XXXV, X.X/X.XkW
P1000 XX.XX/XX.XXA
YASKAWA <XXXXXXXXX>
<6>
- MODE - PRG
Programming
HELP FWD DATA
- MODE - PRG Rdy

Auto-Tuning
AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
Figure 4.3 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure
& Operation
<1> RUN
Pressing will start the motor.
<2> Drive cannot operate motor.
<3> Flashing characters are shown as 0 .
<4> “X” characters are used as examples in this manual. The LCD Operator will display the actual setting values.
<5> The Frequency Reference appears after the initial display that shows the product name.
4
<6> The information that appears on the display will vary depending on the drive.
4.2 The Drive, Programming, and Clock Adjustment Modes

The drive has a Drive Mode to operate the motor, a Programming Mode to edit parameter settings, and a Clock Adjustment
Mode to adjust the Real Time Clock.
Drive Mode: In Drive Mode the user can operate the motor and observe U Monitor parameters. Parameter settings cannot be
edited or changed when in Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: In Programming Mode the user can edit and verify parameter settings and perform Auto-Tuning. When
the drive is in Programming Mode it will not accept a Run command unless b1-08 is set to 1.
Note: 1. If b1-08 is set to 0, the drive will only accept a Run command in Drive Mode. After editing parameters, the user must exit the Programming
Mode and enter Drive Mode before operating the motor.
2. Set b1-08 to 1 to allow motor operation from the drive while in Programming Mode.
u Real-Time Clock (RTC)

The drive has a Clock Adjustment Mode to set and adjust the Real-Time Clock.
Clock Adjustment Mode: When o4-17 is set to 1, the digital operator will show the Clock Adjustment display. In Clock
Adjustment Mode, the user can adjust the Real-Time Clock. When the drive is in Clock Adjustment Mode, it will not accept
a Run command.
u Clock Adjustment
The digital operator will display the Real Time Clock Adjustment Display in Figure 4.4 when the drive is powered up for the
first time. Refer to Manual Clock Adjustment Procedure by Setting o4-17 to 1 on page 77 for the Real-Time Clock setting
procedure.
Note: Setting the Real-Time Clock will clear a “TIM” alarm.
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM A
20 1 0/01/01 00:00
Second per month
+ 0 sec B
FWD
A – Real Time Clock Setting Display B – Gain/Loss Adjustment Display
Figure 4.4 Real Time Clock Adjustment Display
Display Description
YYYY Set the year with the last two digits.
MM Set the month with two digits.
DD Set the day with two digits.
HH:MM Set the hours and minutes, with two digits for each.
Second per month Set the gain or loss in seconds per month.
Moving the Cursor

Pressing the F2 key or the RESET key will move the cursor to the digit on the right. Pressing the F1 key will move the cursor
to the left.
Changing Settings
• Changing YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM: Pressing the up arrow key will increase the number selected by the cursor from 0 to
9. Pressing the down arrow key will decrease the number selected by the cursor from 0 to 9.
• Setting the Seconds per Month: Pressing the up arrow key will increase the number selected by the cursor from -504 to
+488 in increments of 8. Pressing the down arrow key will decrease the number selected by the cursor from -504 to +488
in increments of 8.
Verifying the New Time Setting

After pressing ENTER , the display will indicate “Entry accepted” and the new time value will be saved to the Real-Time
Clock (RTC).
If there is a problem with the entered time, the operator will indicate “Input error” and the screen will return to the time setting
display.
Canceling the Input
Pressing the ESC key will display “Aborted” on the operator, and no value will be saved to the RTC. Pressing OFF will abort
the setting process without any display, and no setting changes will be saved to the RTC.
Exiting from the Time Setting Screen Without Making Any Changes
If no changes are entered, the display will exit Real Time Clock Adjustment Display after a few seconds and no changes will
be saved.
n Real-Time Clock Setting at Initial Power-up of a New Drive
Setting the Real-time clock is required at power-up of a new drive or after digital operator battery replacement.
Table 4.4 illustrates how to set the Real-Time Clock at initial power-up of a new drive.
Table 4.4 Clock Adjustment Procedure at Power-up of a New Drive
Procedure Display
ALM
Turn the power on. The Real Time Clock Adjustment Display will appear. Use the right arrow YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
1 key to select the desired digit, then set the correct date and time using the up and down arrow 20 1 0/01/01 00:00
keys. Second per month
+ 0 sec
ALM
After entering the Real-Time Clock data, press the ENTER key to save the changes.
2 The display will indicate “Entry Accepted” and return to the initial display in step 3 and the alarm
Entry accepted
LED will be OFF.
- MODE - DRV Rdy

Freq Ref (AI)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
3 Initial display. U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00 A LREF
JOG FWD
n Manual Clock Adjustment by Setting o4-17 to 1
The following actions are possible in the Clock Adjustment Mode:
• Set the current time
• Check the time set to the drive Real-Time Clock
& Operation
Table 4.5 illustrates how to set the Real-Time Clock manually.
Table 4.5 Manual Clock Adjustment Procedure by Setting o4-17 to 1
Procedure Display
ALM
4
- MODE - DRV
The “Time Not Set” (TIM) display will appear if the Real-Time Clock data is not entered within
1 30 seconds of power-up on a new drive. TIM
Refer to 137 for details on the TIM display. Time Not Set
FWD RESET
ALM
- MODE - PRG
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through display menu until the screen shows Programming
2 “Programming”.
HELP FWD DATA
Procedure Display
ALM
- PRMSET - PRG
Initialization
3 Press the ENTER key to enter select the parameter setting mode.
A1-00 = 0
Select Language
FWD
ALM
- PRMSET - PRG
Maintenance
4 Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through display menu until parameter o4-17 appears.
o4-17 = 0
Set time
FWD
ALM
- PRMSET - PRG
Set time
o4-17= 0 *0*
5 Press the ENTER key until “0” flashes. --
“0”
FWD
ALM
- PRMSET - PRG
Set time
o4-17= 1 *0*
6 Press the up arrow key so that the display changes to “1”. Set
“0”
FWD
ALM
Press the ENTER key and the time setting screen will appear. Use the right arrow key to select YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
7 20 1 0/01/01 00:00
the desired digit, then set the correct date and time using the up and down arrow keys.
Second per month
+ 0 sec
ALM
After entering the correct time, press the ENTER key to save the changes.
8 The display will return to the display shown in step 5 and the alarm LED will be OFF. Entry accepted
n o4-17: Real-Time Clock Setting

No.
(Addr. Name Description Values
Hex)
Sets the current date and time for the Real-Time Clock.
o4-17 Set/Reset Real-time Clock 0: — — No Setting0: — — Default: 0
(3100) Set Time 1: Real-Time Clock Set 1: Set Range: 0 to 2
2: Real-Time Clock Reset2: Reset
Setting 0: — —
No Setting (Default)
Setting 1: Set
When o4-17 is set to 1, the digital operator will show the Clock Adjustment display. In Clock Adjustment Mode the user can
adjust the Real-Time Clock.
Setting 2: Reset
When o4-17 is set to 2, the Real-Time Clock data is cleared. A TIM fault will occur until o4-17 is set to 1 and the Real-Time
Clock is set.
u Changing Parameter Settings or Values

This example explains changing C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to 20.0 seconds.
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - PRG
Programming
2. Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears.
HELP FWD DATA
-PRMSET- PRG
Initialization
A1-00= 0
3. Press to enter the parameter menu tree. Select Language
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Basic Setup
C1-01= 10.0 sec
4. Press or to select the C parameter group. Accel Time 1
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG -PRMSET- PRG
Accel/Decel Accel Time 1
C1-01= 10.0 sec C1-01= 10.0Sec
5. Press two times. Accel Time 1 (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→ ← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 10.0Sec
6. Press or to select parameter C1-02. (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 0010.0Sec
7. Press to view the current setting value (10.0 s). The leftmost digit flashes. (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Time 1
C1-02=0010.0Sec
8. Press F1
, F2
, or until the desired number is selected. “1” flashes. (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Time 1
& Operation
C1-02=0020.0Sec
9. Press and enter 0020.0. (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→
10. Press to confirm the change. Entry Accepted

4
-PRMSET- PRG
Decel Time 1
C1-02= 20.0Sec
11. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4. (0.0~6000.0)
“10.0 sec”
← FWD
→
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
12. Press as many times as necessary to return to the initial display. U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
n Setup Group Parameters

Table 4.6 lists the parameters available by default in the Setup Group. Selecting an Application Preset in through initialization
in parameter A1-03 automatically changes the parameters selected for the Setup Group. Refer to Fan and Pump Application
Presets on page 119 for details on parameters and default values for the fan and pump Setup Groups.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default
0, 1110, 2220, 3330, 5550,
A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0
8008, 8009, 8010, 8011
Setting 0: No initialization (default)
Setting 1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03)
Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialize
Setting 3330: 3-Wire Initialize
Setting 5550: Terminal/Control Initialize
Setting 8008: Pump
Setting 8009: Pump w/ PI
Setting 8010: Fan
Setting 8011: Fan w/ PI
Use the Programming Mode to access parameters not displayed in the Setup Group.
Table 4.6 General Purpose Application Setup Group Parameters (A1-03 = 0)
Parameter Name Parameter Name
A1-06 Application Preset Selection (Monitor only) E2-01 Motor Rated Current
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection L6-01 Torque Detection 1 Selection
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection L6-02 Torque Detection 1 Level
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 L6-03 Torque Detection 1 Time
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 o1-07 Second Line Monitor Selection
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit o1-08 Third Line Monitor Selection
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit
u Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE

LOCAL mode is when the drive is set to accept the Run command from the digital operator RUN key. REMOTE mode is
when the drive is set to accept the Run command from an external device (i.e., input terminals or serial communications).
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching from
LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery.
Switch the operation between LOCAL and REMOTE using the LO/RE key on the digital operator or via a digital input.
Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
n Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator

Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (A1/A2)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-02= 0.00Hz RSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A RREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
2. Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in LOCAL.
F1 F2
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the key again. RUN STOP
n Using Input Terminals S1 through S8 to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE

It is possible to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE modes using one of the digital input terminals S1 through S8 (set the
corresponding parameter H1-oo to “1”).
Setting H1-oo to 1 disables the LO/RE key on the digital operator. Refer to H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs on page
196 for details.
& Operation
4
4.3 Start-Up Flowchart
4.3 Start-Up Flowchart

Figure 4.5 summarizes steps required to start the drive and gives quick references to help familiarize the user with start-up
procedures.
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2, and 3.
Apply main power to the drive while following safety guidelines.
Application Presets YES

A1-03 used?
Refer to
NO
Application
Selection Section
Set the basic parameters
 b1-01/b1-02 for frequency reference selection and run command source selection
 H1-oo,H2-oo,H3-oo,H4-oo,H6-oo for I/O terminal setting
 d1-oo for using multi-speed references
 C1-oo and C2-oo for accel/decel and S-curve time settings
 L3-04 if using dynamic braking options
 L8-55 = 0 if using a regen converter
Set or verify the V/f pattern settings E1-oo.
Energy Savings (b8-01 = 1) NO

or Speed Estimation Search (b3-24 = 1)
enabled when b3-01 = 1 or L2-01 = 1, 2?
YES
Is the motor cable
YES longer than 50 meters?
Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning NO

for V/f Control (T1-01 = 3) Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning
for Stator Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor.

Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 4.5 Simple Setup with Energy Savings or Speed Search
Note: 1. Execute Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance if the drive has been Auto-Tuned and then moved to a different location
where the motor cable length exceeds 50 m.
2. Perform Auto-Tuning again after installing an AC reactor or other such components to the output side of the drive.
4.4 Powering Up the Drive
4.4 Powering Up the Drive

u Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display
n Powering Up the Drive
Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check Description
200 V class: Three-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power supply voltage
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals and Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V, and W.
motor terminals
Control circuit terminals Check control circuit terminal connections.
Drive control terminal status Open all control circuit terminals (off).
Status of the load and connected Decouple the motor from the load.
machinery
n Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the digital operator lights will appear as follows:
Status Name Description
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180
ALARM
Normal - MODE - DRV Rdy
The data display area displays the frequency reference. is lit.

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
Operation U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
LSEQ
LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
LO
ESC
ALM
RE
RESET ENTER
- MODE - DRV
RUNEF3 STOP Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible
Fault Ext Fault S3
Solutions on page 129 for more information. and are lit.
FWD RESET
External fault (example)

ESC
LO
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
& Operation
4
4.5 Application Selection
4.5 Application Selection

Application Presets are available to facilitate drive setup for commonly used applications. Selecting one of these Application
Presets automatically assigns functions to the input and output terminals and sets a predefined group of parameters to values
appropriate for the selected application.
In addition, the parameters most likely to be changed are assigned to the group of User Parameters, A2-01 through A2-16.
User Parameters are part of the Setup Group, which provides quicker access by eliminating the need to scroll through multiple
menus.
Note: 1. Application Presets can only be selected if all drive parameters are at their original default settings.
2. Entering a value to A1-03 to enable an Application Preset will fix that value to the parameter. The value cannot be changed without first
setting A1-03 to 2220 or 3330 to initialize the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before performing a test run. Setting parameter
A1-03 may automatically change the I/O terminal function from the default setting. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
No. Parameter Name Settings Default

0: No initialization (default)
1110: User Initialize (parameter values
must be stored using parameter o2-03)
2220: 2-Wire Initialize
3330: 3-Wire Initialize
A1-03 Initialize Parameters 5550: Terminal/Control Initialize 0
8008: Pump <1>
8009: Pump w/ PI <1>
8010: Fan <1>
8011: Fan w/ PI <1>
0: Disabled
8: Pump
A1-06 Application Presets (monitor only) 9: Pump w/ PI 0
10: Fan
11: Fan w/ PI
<1> Refer to Fan and Pump Application Presets on page 119 for drive setup using A1-03 = 8008, 8009, 8010, or 8011.
4.6 Basic Drive Setup Adjustments

This section explains the basic settings required for initial drive operation. Checking these basic parameter settings will help
to ensure a successful drive start-up. Refer to Parameter List on page 177 for a complete listing of drive parameters if more
information is required for parameters not listed in this section.
n A1-03: Initialize Parameters

Resets parameters to default values or performs an Application Preset for fan or pump applications. After initialization, the
setting for A1-03 automatically returns to 0.
0, 1110, 2220, 3330, 5550,
A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0
8008, 8009, 8010, 8011
Setting 1110: User Initialize
Resets parameters to the values selected by the user as User Settings. User Settings are stored when parameter o2-03 is set to
“1: Set defaults”.
Note: User Initialization resets all parameters to a user-defined set of default values previously saved to the drive. Set parameter o2-03 to 2 to
clear the user-defined default values.
Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialization
Resets parameters to default settings with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward run and Reverse run, respectively.
Setting 3330: 3-Wire Initialization
Resets parameters to default settings with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5 configured as Run, Stop, and Forward/Reverse
respectively. Refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 102 for more information on digital input functions.
Notes on Parameter Initialization
The parameters shown in Table 4.7 will not be reset when the drive is initialized by setting A1-03 = 2220 or 3330.
Table 4.7 Parameters Not Changed by Drive Initialization
No. Parameter Name
A1-00 Language Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
F6-08 Communication Parameter Reset
L8-35 Installation Selection
o2-04 Drive/kVA Selection
Setting 5550: Terminal/Control Initialize
An oPE04 error appears on the digital operator when a terminal block with settings saved to its built-in memory is installed
in a drive that has edited parameters. Set A1-03 to 5550 to use the parameter settings saved to the terminal block memory.
Setting 8008: Pump
& Operation
Application Preset for pump applications. Refer to Fan and Pump Application Presets on page 119 for a list of parameters
and default values for this Application Preset.
Setting 8009: Pump w/ PI
Application Preset for pump with PI applications. Refer to Fan and Pump Application Presets on page 119 for a list of 4
parameters and default values for this Application Preset.
Setting 8010: Fan
Application Preset for fan applications. Refer to Fan and Pump Application Presets on page 119 for a list of parameters and
default values for this Application Preset.
Setting 8011: Fan w/ PI
Application Preset for fan with PI applications. Refer to Fan and Pump Application Presets on page 119 for a list of
parameters and default values for this Application Preset.
n b1-01: Frequency Reference Selection 1

Selects the frequency reference source 1 for the REMOTE mode.
Note: 1. If a Run command is input to the drive but the frequency reference entered is 0 or below the minimum frequency, the RUN indicator
LED on the digital operator will light and the STOP indicator will flash.
2. Press the LO/RE key to set the drive to LOCAL and use the operator keypad to enter the frequency reference.

b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0 to 4 1
Setting 0: Operator keypad
Using this setting, the frequency reference can be input by:
• switching between the multi-speed references in the d1-oo parameters.
• entering the frequency reference on the operator keypad.
Setting 1: Terminals (analog input terminals)
Using this setting, an analog frequency reference can be entered as a voltage or current signal from terminals A1, A2, or A3.
Voltage Input
Voltage input can be used at any of the three analog input terminals. Make the settings as described in Table 4.8 for the input
used.
Table 4.8 Analog Input Settings for Frequency Reference Using Voltage Signals
Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal Level Signal Level Notes
Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
0 to 10 Vdc H3-01 = 0 H3-02 = 0
A1 H3-03 H3-04 –
-10 to +10 Vdc H3-01 = 1 (Frequency Reference Bias)
0 to 10 Vdc H3-09 = 0 H3-10 = 0 Set jumper S1 on the terminal
A2 H3-11 H3-12
-10 to +10 Vdc H3-09 = 1 (Frequency Reference Bias) board to “V” for voltage input.
0 to 10 Vdc H3-05 = 0 H3-06 = 0 Set DIP switch S4 on the
A3 H3-07 H3-08
-10 to +10 Vdc H3-05 = 1 (Frequency Reference Bias) terminal board to “AI”.
Drive Drive
+V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply +10 V +V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
0 to 10 V -10 to 10 V
2k A1 Analog Input 1 4k A1 Analog Input 1
Customer
+/- 10 V
A2 Analog Input 2 Supply A2 Analog Input 2
OR -10 V
A3 Analog Input 3 A3 Analog Input 3
AC Analog input common Common AC Analog input common
Figure 4.6 Setting the Frequency Reference as a Voltage Signal at Terminal A1
Current Input
Input terminals, A1, A2, and A3 can accept a current input signal. Refer to Table 4.9 for an example to set terminal A2 for
current input.
Table 4.9 Analog Input Settings for Frequency Reference Using a Current Signal
Parameter Settings
Signal
Terminal Signal Level Function Notes
Level Gain Bias
Selection Selection
4 to 20 mA H3-09 = 2 Make sure to set jumper S1 on the
H3-10 = 0
A2 H3-11 H3-12 terminal board to “I” for current
0 to 20 mA H3-09 = 3 (Frequency Bias) input.
Jumper S1
A1/A2/A3
Voltage/Current
V
I
Drive
Selection
A1 A2 A3
+V 10.5 V, 20 mA power supply
A1 Analog Input 1
0 or 4 to 20 mA
A2 Analog Input 2
A3 Analog Input 3
AC Analog input common
Figure 4.7 Setting the Frequency Reference as a Current Signal to Terminal A2
Switching between Main/Auxiliary Frequency References

The frequency reference input can be switched between the analog terminals A1, A2, and A3 using multi-speed inputs. Refer
to Multi-Step Speed Selection on page 95 for details on using this function.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
This setting requires entering the frequency reference via the RS-485/422 serial communications port (control terminals R+,
R-, S+, S-).
Setting 3: Option card
This setting requires entering the frequency reference via an option board plugged into connector CN5-A on the drive control
board. Consult the option board manual for instructions on integrating the drive with the communication system.
Note: If the frequency reference source is set for Option PCB (b1-01 = 3), but an option board is not installed, an oPE05 Operator Programming
Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the drive will not run.
Setting 4: Pulse Train Input
This setting requires a pulse train signal to terminal RP to provide the frequency reference. Follow the directions below to
verify that the pulse signal is working properly.
Verifying the Pulse Train is Working Properly
• Set b1-04 to 4 and set H6-01 to 0.
• Set the H6-02 to the pulse train frequency value that equals 100% of the frequency reference.
• Enter a pulse train signal to terminal RP and check for the correct frequency reference on the display.
n b1-02: Run Command Selection 1
Determines the Run command source 1 in the REMOTE mode.
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 0 to 3 1
& Operation
Setting 0: Operator
This setting requires entering the Run command via the digital operator RUN key and also illuminates the LO/RE indicator
on the digital operator.
Setting 1: Control Circuit Terminal 4
This setting requires entering the Run command via the digital input terminals using one of following sequences:
• 2-Wire sequence 1:
Two inputs (FWD/Stop-REV/Stop). Set A1-03 to 2220 to initialize the drive and preset terminals S1 and S2 to these
functions. This is the default setting of the drive.
• 2-Wire sequence 2:
Two inputs (Start/Stop-FWD/REV).
• 3-Wire sequence:
Three inputs (Start-Stop-FWD/REV). Set A1-03 to 3330 to initialize the drive and preset terminals S1, S2, and S5 to these
functions. Refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 102.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

This setting requires entering the Run command via serial communications by connecting the RS-485/422 serial
communication cable to control terminals R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block.
Setting 3: Option Card
This setting requires entering the Run command via the communication option board by plugging a communication option
board into the CN5-A port on the control PCB. Refer to the option board manual for instructions on integrating the drive into
the communication system.
Note: If b1-02 is set to 3, but an option board is not installed in CN5-A, an oPE05 operator programming error will be displayed on the digital
operator and the drive will not run.
n b1-03: Stopping Method Selection

Selects how the drive stops the motor when the Run command is removed or when a Stop command is entered.
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: Ramp to Stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will decelerate the motor to stop. The deceleration rate is determined by the
active deceleration time. The default deceleration time is set to parameter C1-02.
When the output frequency falls below the level set in parameter b2-01, the drive will start DC injection, Zero Speed Control,
or Short Circuit Braking. Refer to b2-01: DC Injection Braking Start Frequency on page 90 for details.
Setting 1: Coast to Stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will shut off its output and the motor will coast (uncontrolled deceleration) to
stop. The stopping time is determined by the inertia and the friction in the driven system.
Run
command ON OFF
Output
frequency
Drive output is shut off
Motor speed
Figure 4.8 Coast to Stop
Note: After a stop is initiated, any subsequent Run command entered will be ignored until the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has expired. Do
not enter Run command until it has come to a complete stop. Use DC Injection at Start (Refer to b2: DC Injection Braking and Short
Circuit Braking on page 179) or Speed Search (Refer to b3: Speed Search on page 180) to restart the motor before it has completely
stopped.
Setting 2: DC Injection Braking to Stop
When the Run command is removed, the drive will enter baseblock (turn off its output) for the minimum baseblock time
(L2-03). When the minimum baseblock time has expired, the drive will inject the amount DC Injection Braking is set in
parameter b2-02 into the motor windings to brake the motor. The stopping time in DC Injection Braking to Stop is significantly
faster compared to Coast to Stop.
Run
command ON OFF
DC Injection Braking
Output with the current set in
frequency b2-02
Motor speed
Motor coasts
Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Figure 4.9 DC Injection Braking to Stop
DC Injection Braking time is determined by the value set to b2-04 and the output frequency at the time the Run command is
removed. It can be calculated by:
(b2-04) x 10 x Output frequency
DC Injection brake time = Max. output frequency (E1-04)
DC Injection braking time
b2-04×10
b2-04
Output frequency when 100%

10%
Stop command was entered (Maximum output
frequency)
Figure 4.10 DC Injection Braking Time Depending on Output Frequency
Note: If an overcurrent (oC) fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to Stop, lengthen the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) until the fault no
longer occurs.
Setting 3: Coast to Stop with Timer
When the Run command is removed, the drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to stop. The drive will not start
if a Run command is input before the time t (C1-02) has expired. Cycle the Run command that was activated during time t
after t has expired to start the drive.
& Operation
Run command ON OFF ON OFF ON
Output Drive output shut off

frequency
4
Run wait time t
Figure 4.11 Coast to Stop with Timer
The wait time t is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and by the active deceleration time.
Run wait time t
Active deceleration time
Min Baseblock Time (L2-03)
Min output Output frequency 100%

frequency when Stop command (Max output
was entered frequency)
Figure 4.12 Run Wait Time Depending on Output Frequency
n b2-01: DC Injection Braking Start Frequency

Active when “Ramp to Stop” is selected as the stopping method (b1-03 = 0).
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz 0.5
V/f Control
Sets the starting frequency for DC Injection Braking at Stop. When the output frequency falls below the setting of b2-01, DC
Injection Braking is enabled for the time set in parameter b2-04.
DC Injection
Braking
E1-09 Min. Frequency
b2-01 Zero Speed Level
Output
Frequency Time
b2-04
Figure 4.13 DC Injection Braking at Stop for V/f
Note: If b2-01 is set to a smaller value than E1-09 (Minimum Frequency), then DC Injection Braking will begin when the frequency falls to the
E1-09 value.
n b3-01: Speed Search Selection at Start

Determines if Speed Search is automatically performed when a Run command is issued.
b3-01 Speed Search Selection at Start 0, 1 0
Setting 0: Disabled
This setting starts operating the drive at the minimum output frequency when the Run command is entered. If external Speed
Search 1 or 2 is already enabled by a digital input, the drive will start operating with Speed Search.
Setting 1: Enabled
This setting performs Speed Search when the Run command is entered. The drive begins running the motor after Speed Search
is complete.
u EZ Sleep/Wake-up Function
To enable EZ Sleep/Wake-up functionality on the drive, first set parameter b5-89 to 1. The default setting for b5-89 is 0, which
disables the EZ Sleep functionality and related parameters, except for parameter b5-91, EZ Sleep Minimum Speed.
Setting b5-89 to 1 disables the existing PID Sleep function (b5-15) and enables the EZ Sleep/Wake-up functionality.
EZ Sleep and Minimum Speed Units
Parameter b5-90, EZ Sleep Unit, determines the unit, range, and resolution of parameters b5-92 and b5-93. When set to Hz,
the range is 0.1 to 400.0 Hz. When set to RPM, the range is 0 to 24000 RPM. Changing b5-90 will NOT automatically re-
scale the values of b5-92 and b5-93.
Minimum Speed
Parameter b5-91, EZ Minimum Speed, acts as a lower limit on the PID output. This value is internally limited to the higher
value between b5-34 or d2-02 and is active regardless of the b5-89 setting. When this limit is active, the PID integrator will
be held to avoid integral wind-up. Parameter b5-90 determines whether the value is input in Hz or RPM.
Sleep
When the output frequency (or speed) is at or below the EZ Sleep Level (b5-92) for the time set in EZ Sleep Time (b5-93),
the drive will sleep. The EZ Sleep Level is internally lower limited to the b5-92 setting.
Wake-up using Absolute Level (b5-95 = 0)
For Normal Acting PID, the PID Feedback must drop below the EZ Wake-up Level (b5-94) for the time set in EZ Wake-up
Time (b5-96) in order for the drive to wake-up.
For Reverse Acting PID, the PID Feedback must rise above the b5-94 level for the time set in b5-96 in order for the drive to
wake-up.
Wake-up using Setpoint Delta Level (b5-95 = 1)
For Normal Acting PID, the wake-up level is determined by the PID Setpoint minus the b5-94 level. The PID Feedback must
drop below the wake-up level for the time set in b5-96 in order for the drive to wake-up
For Reverse Acting PID, the wake-up level is determined by the PID Setpoint plus the b5-94 level. The PID Feedback must
rise above the wake-up level for the time set in b5-96 in order for the drive to wake-up.
Refer to Figure 4.14 and Figure 4.15 for detailed diagrams of EZ Sleep/Wake-up functions.
Refer to Table 4.10 for descriptions of EZ Sleep/Wake-up parameters.
Wake-up Wake-up Sleep Above Sleep Sleep Wake-up Wake-up Wake-up Wake-up
Level Timer Level Sleep Level Timer Level Level Level Timer
reached expired reached Level reached expired reached reached reached expired
Above Above
Wake-up Wake-up
Level Level
PID Set-point
PID Feedback
Wake-up Level <1>
b5 -96 b5 -93 b5 -93 b5-9 6 b5-9 6 b 5-96
Minimum Speed
(b 5-91) <2>
Output Frequency
Run Command
Sleeping Sleeping
<1> Determined by EZ Wake-up Level (b 5-94) and EZ Wake-up Mode (b 5-95)

<2> EZ Sleep Level (b 5-92) is left at default (0.0 Hz), thus effectively making b 5-91 the Sleep Level
Figure 4.14 EZ Sleep/Wake-up with Normal Acting PID and b5-92 = 0.0 Hz
& Operation
4
Wake-up Wake-up Sleep Sleep Wake-up Wake-up Wake-up Wake-up

Level Timer Level Timer Level Level Level Timer
reached expired reached expired reached reached reached expired
Above Above
Wake-up Wake-up
Level Level
Wake-up Level <1>

PID Feedback
PID Set-point
b5-96 b5-96 b5-96 b5-96
b5-93
EZ Sleep Level
(B5-92)
Minimum Speed
(B5-91)
Output Frequency
Run Command
Sleeping
<1> Determined by EZ Wake-up Level (B5-94) and EZ Wake-up Mode (B5-95)
Figure 4.15 EZ Sleep/Wake-up with Reverse Acting PID and b5-92 > b5-91
Table 4.10 EZ Sleep/Wake-up Parameters

No. Name Description Values
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (100% = max output frequency) Default: 1
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling 2: RPM (number of motor poles must entered) Range: 0 to 3
3: User-set (set scaling to b5-38 and b5-39, units based on b5-46 setting)
Scales the PID units to the maximum output frequency. Default: 1000
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display Min.: 1
Max.: 60000
0: No decimal places
1: One decimal place Default: 2
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 2: Two decimal places Range: 0 to 3
3: Three decimal places
Sets the display units for parameter b5-19, and monitors U5-01, U5-04 and U5-99
0: WC (Inch of water)
1: PSI (Pounds per square inch)
2: GPM (Gallons per minute)
3: F (Degrees Fahrenheit)
4: CFM (Cubic feet per minute)
5: CMH (Cubic meters per hour)
6: LPH (Liters per hour)
7: LPS (Liters per second) Default: 0
b5-46 PID Units Selection 8: Bar (Bar) Range: 0 to 15; 25
9: Pa (Pascal)
10: C (Degrees Celsius)
11: Mtr (Meters)
12: Ft (Feet)
13: LPM (Liters per minute)
14: CMM (Cubic meters per minute)
15: “Hg (Inches of Mercury)
25: None
Determines how the drive sleeps and wakes-up when using PID. Default: 0
b5-89 Sleep Method Selection 0: Standard Range: 0, 1
1: EZ Sleep/Wake-up
b5-90 Sets the unit, range, and resolution of parameters b5-91 and b5-92. Default: 0
<1> EZ Sleep Unit 0: Hz Range: 0, 1
1: RPM (number of motor poles must be entered)
Sets the PID minimum speed and integral lower limit. Default: 0.0 Hz
The internal value is lower limited to the higher setting between b5-34 and d2-02. Range: 0.0 to
b5-91 400.0 Hz
<1> EZ Minimum Speed
or 0 to 24000 RPM
<2>
No. Name Description Values

The drive will go to sleep when the drive output frequency (or speed) is at or below Default: 0.0 Hz
this level for the time set in b5-93. Range: 0.0 to
b5-92 This parameter is internally lower limited to b5-91 (EZ Min Speed) + 1 Hz. 400.0 Hz
<1> EZ Sleep Level
or 0 to 24000 RPM
<2>
b5-93 The drive will go to sleep when the drive output frequency is at or below the level Default: 5.0 s
<1> EZ Sleep Time set to b5-92 for the time set in this parameter. Min.: 0.0
Max.: 1000.0
When b5-95 is set to 0 (Absolute), the drive wakes-up when the PID Feedback (H3-
oo = 20) drops below this level for the time set in b5-96.
For reverse-acting, the PID Feedback must be above this level for the time set in
b5-94 b5-96. Default: 0.00%
<1> <1> EZ Wake-up Level When b5-95 is set to 1 (Setpoint Delta), the drive wakes-up when the PID Feedback Min.: 0.00
(H3-oo = 20) drops below the PID Setpoint minus this level (for normal acting Max.: 600.00
PID) for the time set in b5-96.
For reverse-acting, Wake-up level is PID Setpoint plus this level. The PID Feedback
must be above the wake-up level for the time set in b5-96.
b5-95 Sets how the wake-up level is determined. Default: 0
<1> EZ Wake-up Mode 0: Absolute Range: 0, 1
1: Setpoint Delta
b5-96 The drive will wake up when the PID Feedback drops below the b5-94, EZ Wake- Default: 1.0 s
<1> EZ Wake-up Time up Level for the time set in this parameter. Min.: 0.0
Max.: 1000.0
<1> Parameter is only effective when EZ Sleep is enabled by setting b5-89 to 1.
<2> Unit, range and resolution is determined by b5-90. Changing b5-90 will not automatically update the value of this parameter.
n C1-01 to C1-04: Accel, Decel Times 1 and 2

Two different sets of acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive by digital inputs, motor selection, or switched
automatically.
Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to 0 Hz. C1-01 and C1-02
are the default active accel/decel settings.
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2
<1> The setting range for the acceleration and deceleration times is determined by the accel/decel time setting units in C1-10. For example, if the time
is set in units of 0.01 s (C1-10 = 0), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Switching Acceleration Times by Digital Input
Accel/decel time 1 is active by default if no input is set. Activate accel/decel times 2, 3, and 4 by digital inputs
& Operation
(H1-oo = 7 and 1A) as explained in Table 4.11.
Table 4.11 Accel/Decel Time Selection by Digital Input
Accel/Decel Time Sel. 1 Accel/Decel Time Sel. 2 Active Times
H1-oo = 7 H1-oo = 1A Acceleration Deceleration 4
0 0 C1-01 C1-02
1 0 C1-03 C1-04
Figure 4.16 shows an operation example for changing accel/decel. times. The example below requires that the stopping method
be set for “Ramp to stop” (b1-03 = 0).
Decel Time 1
(C1-02) Decel Time 2
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 (C1-04)
Output (C1-01) (C1-03)
frequency
Decel Time 1
(C1-02)
Time
ON OFF ON
FWD (REV)
Run command
ON OFF
Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
(Terminals S1 to S8, H1- oo = “7”)
Figure 4.16 Timing Diagram of Accel/Decel Time Change
n C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection

Sets the switching frequency of the drive output transistors. Changes to the switching frequency lower audible noise and reduce
leakage current.
Note: Increasing the carrier frequency above the default value automatically lowers the drive current rating.

C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to F 7
Settings:
C6-02 Carrier Frequency C6-02 Carrier Frequency C6-02 Carrier Frequency
1 2.0 kHz 5 12.5 kHz 9 Swing PWM 3
2 5.0 kHz 6 15.0 kHz A Swing PWM 4
3 8.0 kHz 7 Swing PWM 1
F User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
4 10.0 kHz 8 Swing PWM 2
Note: Swing PWM uses a carrier frequency of 2.0 kHz as a base, then applies a special PWM pattern to reduce the audible noise.
Guidelines for Carrier Frequency Parameter Setup
Symptom Remedy
Speed and torque are unstable at low speeds
Noise from the drive affects peripheral devices
Lower the carrier frequency.
Excessive leakage current from the drive
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long <1>
Audible motor noise is too loud Increase the carrier frequency or use Swing PWM. <2>
<1> The carrier frequency may need to be lowered if the motor cable is too long. Refer to Table 4.12.
<2> The default carrier frequency is Swing PWM (C6-02 = 7), using a 2 kHz base. Increasing the carrier frequency is permissible , however the drive
rated current is reduced when the carrier frequency is increased.
Table 4.12 Wiring Distance and Carrier Frequency
Wiring Distance Up to 50 m Up to 100 m Greater than 100 m
1 to 2 (up to 5 kHz),
Recommended setting value for C6-02 1 to F (up to 15 kHz) 1 (up to 2 kHz), 7 (Swing PWM)
7 (Swing PWM)
n d1-01 to d1-17: Frequency Reference 1 to 16 and Jog Frequency Reference

The drive lets the user switch between up to 17 preset frequency references during run (including the Jog reference) through
the digital input terminals. The drive uses the acceleration and deceleration times that have been selected when switching
between each frequency reference.
The Jog frequency overrides all other frequency references and must be selected by a separate digital input.
The multi-speed references 1, 2, and 3 can be provided by analog inputs.

d1-01 to d1-16 Frequency Reference 1 to 16 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> 0.00 Hz
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference 0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1> 6.00 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the maximum output frequency (E1-04) and upper limit for the frequency reference (d2-01).
Multi-Step Speed Selection
To use several speed references for a multi-step speed sequence, set the H1-oo parameters to 3, 4, 5, and 32. To assign the
Jog reference to a digital input, set H1-oo to 6.
Notes on using analog inputs as Multi-Speed 1, 2, and 3:
• Multi-Step Speed 1
Set b1-01 to 1 to set terminal A1 analog input to Multi-Step Speed 1.
Set b1-01 to 0 when setting d1-01, Frequency Reference 1, to Multi-Step Speed 1.
Set H3-06, Terminal A3 Function Selection, to 2 (Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1) when setting terminal A3 analog input
to Multi-Step Speed 2.
Set H3-06 to F (Through mode) when setting d1-02, Frequency Reference 2, to Multi-Step Speed 2.
Set H3-10, Terminal A2 Function Selection, to 3 (Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2) when setting terminal A2 analog input
to Multi-Step Speed 3.
Set H3-10 to F (Through mode) when setting d1-03, Frequency Reference 3, to Multi-Step Speed 3.
Set H3-09 to 0 and set jumper S1 on the control circuit terminal board to V (voltage) for A2 when inputting 0 to 10 V to
terminal A2 analog input.
Select the different speed references as shown in Table 4.13. Figure 4.17 illustrates the multi-step speed selection.
Table 4.13 Multi-Step Speed Reference and Terminal Switch Combinations
Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Jog Reference
Reference Speed Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 4 H1-oo = 6
H1-oo = 3 H1-oo = 4 H1-oo = 5 H1-oo = 32
Frequency Reference 1 (set in b1-01) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 2 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
(d1-02 or input terminal A1, A2, A3)
Frequency Reference 3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
(d1-03 or input terminal A1, A2, A3)
Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04) ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 5 (d1-05) OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 6 (d1-06) ON OFF ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 7 (d1-07) OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 8 (d1-08) ON ON ON OFF OFF
& Operation
Frequency Reference 9 (d1-09) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 10 (d1-10) ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 11 (d1-11) OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Frequency Reference 12 (d1-12) ON ON OFF ON OFF
4
Frequency Reference 13 (d1-13) OFF OFF ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 14 (d1-14) ON OFF ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 15 (d1-15) OFF ON ON ON OFF
Frequency Reference 16 (d1-16) ON ON ON ON OFF
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17) <1> − − − − ON
<1> The Jog frequency overrides all other frequency references.
d1-16
Frequency d1-15
reference
d1-14
d1-13
d1-12
d1-07
d1-06
d1-05
d1-04
d1-01
(A3)
d1-02
(A2)
d1-01
(A1)
d1-17
Time
FWD (REV) Run/Stop
ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 2 ON ON ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 3 ON ON
Multi-step Speed Ref. 4 ON
Jog Reference ON
Figure 4.17 Preset Reference Timing Diagram
n E1-01: Input Voltage Setting

Adjusts the levels of some protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). Set this parameter to the nominal
voltage of the AC power supply.
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the
protective features to function properly. Failure to set the correct drive input voltage will result in improper drive operation.

E1-01 Input Voltage Setting 155 to 255 V <1> 230 V <1>
<1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives. Multiply the value by 2.875 for 600 V class drives.
E1-01 Related Values
The input voltage setting determines the overvoltage and undervoltage detection levels, the operation levels of the braking
transistor, the KEB function, and the overvoltage suppression function.
(Approximate Values)
ov Detection Level/Dynamic
Setting Value Braking Transistor Detection ov Suppression /
Voltage Uv Detection Level Desired DC Bus Voltage Stall
of E1-01 Prevention Level
Level <1> (rr Detection Level) (L2-05) during KEB (L2-11) (L3-17)
200 V All settings 410 V / 394 V 190 V 260 V 375 V
Class
400 V setting ≥ 400 V 820 V / 788 V 380 V 500 V 750 V
Class setting < 400 V 820 V / 788 V 350 V 460 V 750 V
600 V All settings 1178 V / 1132 V 475 V 635 V 930 V
Class
<1> The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the drive internal braking transistor. When using a CDBR braking unit, refer to instruction
manual TOBPC72060000 or TOBPC72060001.
n V/f Pattern Settings (E1-03)

The drive uses a V/f pattern to adjust the output voltage relative to the frequency reference. There are 15 different predefined
V/f patterns (setting 0 to E) from which to select, each with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels (frequency at which
maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. Additionally, one custom V/f pattern is available (setting F) that
requires the user to create the pattern using parameters E1-04 through E1-10.
n E1-03: V/f Pattern Selection
Selects the V/f pattern for the drive and motor from 15 predefined patterns or creates a custom V/f pattern.
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection 0 to F F <1>
<1> Parameter is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized using A1-03.
Setting a Predefined V/f Pattern (Setting 0 to E)

Choose the V/f pattern that best meets the application demands from Table 4.14. These settings are available only in
V/f Control modes. Set the correct value to E1-03. Parameters E1-04 to E1-13 can only be monitored, not changed.
Note: 1. Setting an improper V/f pattern may result in low motor torque or increased current due to overexcitation.
2. Drive initialization does not reset parameter E1-03.
Table 4.14 Predefined V/f Patterns
Setting Specification Characteristic Application
0 50 Hz
1 60 Hz For general purpose applications. Torque remains constant
Constant torque
2 60 Hz (with 50 Hz base) regardless of changes to speed.
3 72 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
4 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
5 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1 For fans, pumps, and other applications where the required
Variable torque
6 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1 torque changes as a function of the speed.
7 50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
8 50 Hz, mid starting torque Select high starting torque when:
9 50 Hz, high starting torque • Wiring between the drive and motor exceeds 150 m.
High starting torque
A 60 Hz, mid starting torque • A large amount of starting torque is required.
B 60 Hz, high starting torque • An AC reactor is installed.
C 90 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
Output voltage is constant when operating at greater than
D 120 Hz (with 60 Hz base) Constant output 60 Hz.
E 180 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
F For general purpose applications. Torque remains constant
<1> 60 Hz Constant torque regardless of changes to speed.
& Operation
<1> Setting F enables a custom V/f pattern by changing parameters E1-04 to E1-13. When the drive is shipped, the default values for parameters E1-04
to E1-13 are the same as those of setting 1.
The following tables show details on predefined V/f patterns.
Predefined V/f Patterns for Models 2A0004 to 2A0021, 4A0002 to 4A0011, and 5A0003 to 5A0009 4
The values in the following graphs are specific to 200 V class drives. Double the values for 400 V class drives. Multiply the
values by 2.875 for 600 V drives.
Table 4.15 Constant Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
Setting = 0 50 Hz Setting = 1 60 Hz Setting = 2 60 Hz Setting = 3 72 Hz
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
15 15 15 15
9 9 9 9
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Table 4.16 Derated Torque Characteristics, Settings 4 to 7

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
9 9
8 8
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60
Table 4.17 High Starting Torque, Settings 8 to B

Setting = 8 50 Hz Setting = 9 50 Hz Setting = A 60 Hz Setting = B 60 Hz
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
24 24
19 19
13 15
11 11
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 4.18 Rated Output Operation, Settings C to F

Setting = C 90 Hz Setting = D 120 Hz Setting = E 180 Hz Setting = F 60 Hz
200 200 200 230
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
15 15 15 17.3
9 9 9 10.2
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Predefined V/f Patterns for Models 2A0030 to 2A0211, 4A0018 to 4A0103, and 5A0011 to 5A0077
values by 2.875 for 600 V class drives.
Table 4.19 Rated Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
7 7
6 6
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
23 23
18 18
11 13
9 9
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 4.22 Constant Output, Settings C to F

200 200 200 230
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
14 14 14 16.1
7 7 7 8.1
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Predefined V/f Patterns for Models 2A0250 to 2A0415, 4A0139 to 4A0675, and 5A0099 to 5A0242
values by 2.875 for 600 V class drives.
Table 4.23 Rated Torque Characteristics, Settings 0 to 3
200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
12 12 12 12
6 6 6 6
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72

200 200 200 200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 50
35 35
6 6
5 5
0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.5 30 60 0 1.5 30 60
& Operation
200 200 200 200
4
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
20 20
15 15
9 11
7 7
0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.5 3 60
Table 4.26 Constant Output, Settings C to F

200 200 200 230
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
12 12 12 13.8
6 6 6 6.9
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180 0 1.5 3 60
Setting a Custom V/f Pattern (Setting F: Default)

Setting parameter E1-03 to F allows the user to set up a custom V/f pattern by changing parameters E1-04 to E1-13.
When initialized, the default values for parameters E1-04 to E1-13 will be equal to Predefined V/f pattern 1.
n V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-13
If E1-03 is set to a preset V/f pattern (i.e., a value other than F), the user can monitor the V/f pattern in parameters E1-04
through E1-13. To create a new V/f pattern, set E1-03 to F. Refer to V/f Pattern on page 100 for an example custom V/f
pattern.
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
E1-05 Maximum Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <4> 575.0 V
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] 60.0 Hz
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] 3.0 Hz
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <4> 15.0 V
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to [E1-04] 1.5 Hz
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <4> 9.0 V
E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to [E1-04] 0.0 Hz <6>
E1-12 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 0.0 to 255.0 V <4> 0.0 V <5> <6>
E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <4> 0.0 V <5> <7>
<5> The drive changes these settings when Auto-Tuning is performed (Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2).
<6> Parameter ignored when E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0.
<7> E1-13 and E1-05 are set to the same value when Auto-Tuning is performed.
Output Voltage (V)
E1-05
E1-12
E1-13
E1-08
E1-10
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 4.18 V/f Pattern
Note: 1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line below E1-06, set E1-09 equal to E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded.
3. E1-03 is unaffected when the drive is initialized, but E1-04 through E1-13 return to their default values.
4. Only use E1-11, E1-12, and E1-13 to fine-tune the V/f pattern in the constant output range. These parameters rarely need to be changed.
n E2-01: Motor Rated Current

Provides motor control, protects the motor, and calculates torque limits. Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on
the motor nameplate. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-04 will automatically be saved to E2-01.

10% to 200% of the drive Determined by
E2-01 Motor Rated Current rated current o2-04
Note: 1. The number of decimal places in the parameter value depends on the drive model. This value has two decimal places (0.01 A) if the
drive is set for a maximum applicable motor capacity up to and including 11 kW, and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the maximum applicable
motor capacity is higher than 11 kW. Refer to Power Ratings on page 164 for details.
2. An oPE02 error will occur if the motor rated current in E2-01 is set lower than the motor no-load current in E2-03. Set E2-03 correctly
to prevent this error.
n H1-01 to H1-08: Functions for Terminals S1 to S8

These parameters assign functions to the multi-function digital inputs. The various functions and settings are listed in Table
4.27.
Setting
No. Parameter Name Default
Range
H1-01 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1 Function Selection 1 to 9F 40 (F) <1> : Forward Run Command (2-Wire sequence)
H1-02 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S2 Function Selection 1 to 9F 41 (F) <1> : Reverse Run Command (2-Wire sequence)
H1-03 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S3 Function Selection 0 to 9F 24: External Fault
H1-04 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S4 Function Selection 0 to 9F 14: Fault Reset
H1-05 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function Selection 0 to 9F 3 (0) <1> : Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
H1-06 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S6 Function Selection 0 to 9F 4 (3) <1> : Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
H1-07 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S7 Function Selection 0 to 9F 6 (4) <1> : Jog Reference Selection
H1-08 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S8 Function Selection 0 to 9F 8: (6) <1> : External Baseblock Command
<1> Number appearing in parenthesis is the default value after performing a 3-Wire initialization (A1-03 = 3330).
Table 4.27 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal Settings
Setting Function Page Setting Function Page
0 3-Wire Sequence 102 30 PID Integral Reset —
1 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection — 31 PID Integral Hold —
2 External Reference 1/2 Selection — 32 Multi-Step Speed Reference 4 —
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 34 PID Soft Starter Cancel —
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 — 35 PID Input Level Selection —
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 40 Forward Run Command (2-Wire sequence)
—
6 Jog reference Selection — 41 Reverse Run Command (2-Wire sequence)
7 Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 — 42 Run Command (2-Wire sequence 2)
—
8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) 43 FWD/REV Command (2-Wire sequence 2)
—
9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 47 Node Setup —
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold — 51 Disable Sequence Timers —
B Drive Overheat Alarm (oH2) — 52 Cancel Active Sequence Timer —
& Operation
C Analog Terminal Input Selection — 60 DC Injection Braking Command —
F Through Mode — 61 External Speed Search Command 1 —
10 Up Command 62 External Speed Search Command 2 —
—
11 Down Command 63 Field Weakening —
4
12 Forward Jog 65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.)
— —
13 Reverse Jog 66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.)
14 Fault Reset — 67 Communications Test Mode —
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) — 68 High Slip Braking (HSB) —
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) — 6A Drive Enabled —
18 Timer Function Input — 75 Up 2 Command
—
19 PID Disable — 76 Down 2 Command
1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 — 7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.)
—
1B Program Lockout — 7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.)
1E Reference Sample Hold — A8 Secondary PI Disable (N.O.) —
20 to 2F External Fault — A9 Secondary PI Disable (N.C.) —
Setting Function Page Setting Function Page

AA Secondary PI Inverse Operation — AD Select Secondary PI Parameters —
AB Secondary PI Integral Reset — AF Emergency Override Forward Run —
AC Secondary PI Integral Hold — B0 Emergency Override Reverse Run —
Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence
The digital input programmed for 3-Wire control becomes the forward/reverse directional input, S1 becomes the Run command
input, and S2 becomes the Stop command input.
The drive starts the motor when the input S1 set for the Run command closes for longer than 2 ms. The drive stops the operation
when the Stop input S2 releases for 2 ms. When the digital input programmed for a forward/reverse operation is open, the
drive is set for forward operation. When the digital input is closed, the drive is set for reverse operation.
Note: Input the Run and Stop commands via S1 and S2 when selecting a 3-Wire sequence.
Stop Switch Run Switch DRIVE
(N.C.) (N.O.)
S1
Run Command (Runs when Closed)
S2
Stop Command (Stops when Open)
S5
FWD/REV (Multi-Function Input)
(H1-05 = 0)
SN
Standard Digital Input Common
Figure 4.19 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram
2 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF

Run command
Stop command OFF (stopped)
Forward/reverse OFF (forward) ON (reverse)

command
Motor speed
TIME
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Foward
Figure 4.20 3-Wire Sequence
Note: 1. The Run command must be closed for more than 2 ms.
2. If the Run command is active at power up and b1-17 = 0 (Run command at power up not accepted), the Run LED will flash to indicate
that protective functions are operating. If required by the application, set b1-17 to 1 to automatically issue the Run command upon drive
power up.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before applying
power to the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly in reverse direction after power up if it is wired for 3-Wire sequence
but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default). Make sure b1-17 is set to “0” (drive does not accept a Run command active at power up). When
initializing the drive use 3-Wire initialization. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
n H2-01 to H2-03: Terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, and MD-ME-MF Function Selection

The drive has three multi-function output terminals. Table 4.28 lists the functions available for theses terminals using H2-01,
H2-02, and H2-03.
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection (relay) 0 to 192 0: During Run
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 Function Selection (relay) 0 to 192 1: Zero Speed
H2-03 Terminal MD-ME-MF Function Selection (relay) 0 to 192 2: Speed agree 1
Table 4.28 Multi-Function Digital Output Terminal Settings

Setting Function Setting Function
0 During Run — 1 Zero Speed —
Setting Function Setting Function

— 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) —
2 Speed Agree 1 103 20 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH) —
—
3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection —
104
2F Maintenance Period —
4 Frequency Detection 1 —
37 During Frequency Output —
5 Frequency Detection 2 —
38 Drive Enabled —
6 Drive Ready —
39 Watt Hour Pulse Output —
7 DC Bus Undervoltage —
3C LOCAL/REMOTE Status —
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) —
3D During Speed Search —
9 Frequency Reference Source —
3E PID Feedback Low —
A Run Command Source —
3F PID Feedback High —
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) —
4A During KEB Operation —
C Frequency Reference Loss —
4C During Fast Stop —
D Braking Resistor Fault —
4D oH Pre-Alarm Time Limit —
E Fault —
F Through Mode — 4E <2> Braking Transistor Fault (rr) —
10 Minor Fault — 4F <2> Braking Resistor Overheat (rH) —
11 Fault Reset Command Active — 50 Waiting to Run —
12 Timer Output — 51 Sequence timer 1 —
13 Speed Agree 2 — 52 Sequence timer 2 —
14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 — 53 Sequence timer 3 —
15 Frequency Detection 3 — 54 Sequence timer 4 —
16 Frequency Detection 4 — 58 UL6 Detected —
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) 60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm —
—
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) 71 Secondary PI Feedback Low —
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) — 72 Secondary PI Feedback High —
1A During Reverse — 100 to 192 Functions 0 to 92 with Inverse Output —
1B During Baseblock (N.C.) —
1E Restart Enabled —
<2> Not available in models 2A0169 to 2A0415 and 4A0088 to 4A0675.
Setting 2: Speed Agree 1 (fref/fout Agree 1)
Closes when the actual output frequency is within the Speed Agree Width (L4-02) of the current frequency reference regardless
of the direction.
Status Description
Open Output frequency or motor speed does not match the frequency reference while the drive is running.
Closed Output frequency or motor speed is within the range of frequency reference ±L4-02.
& Operation
Note: Detection works in forward and reverse.
Frequency
reference
Output Frequency L4-02 4

or Motor Speed
L4-02
Speed agree 1 OFF ON
Figure 4.21 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart
Setting 3: User-Set Speed Agree 1 (fref/fset Agree 1)

Closes when the actual output frequency and the frequency reference are within the speed agree width (L4-02) of the
programmed speed agree level (L4-01).
Status Description
Open Output frequency or motor speed and frequency reference are not both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02.
Closed Output frequency or motor speed and the frequency reference are both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02.
Note: Frequency detection works in forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 is used as the detection level for both directions.
Frequency reference + L4-02
Frequency reference
L4-01 + L4-02
Frequency reference – L4-02
L4-01
L4-01 – L4-02 Output frequency

During
Forward
0 Hz
During Reverse
Output frequency –L4-01 + L4-02
–L4-01
Frequency reference + L4-02
–L4-01 – L4-02
Frequency reference
Frequency reference – L4-02

User Set OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON
Speed Agree 1
Figure 4.22 User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart
n H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection

Selects the input signal level for analog input A1.
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal due to gain and bias
settings will be read as 0%.
Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc
The input level is -10 to 10 Vdc. If the resulting voltage is negative after being adjusted by gain and bias settings, then the
motor will rotate in reverse.
Setting 2: 4 to 20 mA
n H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection
Selects the input signal level for analog input A3.
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection 0 to 32 0
n H3-03, H3-04: Terminal A1 Gain and Bias Settings

Parameter H3-03 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A1 (gain).
Parameter H3-04 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A1 (bias).
Use both parameters to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A1.
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Setting Examples
• Gain H3-03 = 200%, bias H3-04 = 0, terminal A1 as frequency reference input (H3-02 = 0):
A 10 Vdc input is equivalent to a 200% frequency reference and 5 Vdc is equivalent to a 100% frequency reference. Since
the drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), the frequency reference will be equal to E1-04
above 5 Vdc.
H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1
Gain = 200 % Gain = 200 %
Frequency 100%
reference E1-04
-10 V -5 V
100 % 0V 5V 10 V
E1-04
-100%
E1-04
Bias = 0 % Gain = -200 %

0V 5V 10 V
Figure 4.23 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Increased Gain
• Gain H3-03 = 100%, bias H3-04 = -25%, terminal A1 as frequency reference input:
An input of 0 Vdc will be equivalent to a -25% frequency reference.
When parameter H3-01 = 0, the frequency reference is 0% between 0 and 2 Vdc input.
When parameter H3-01 = 1, the motor will rotate in reverse between -10 and 2 Vdc input.
H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1
100 %
100%
Frequency H3-01 = 0
reference -10 V -6.0 V
2.0 V 10 V
-25% Analog Input
Voltage
0
2.0 V 10 V
Analog Input -100%
-25% Voltage E1-04
H3-01 = 1 -150%
Figure 4.24 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Negative Bias

Determines the function assigned to analog input terminal A3.
& Operation
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. See the explanation provided for H3-01. Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc on page 104.
The input level is -10 to 10 Vdc. See the explanation provided for H3-01. Refer to Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc on page 104. 4
n H3-07, H3-08: Terminal A3 Gain and Bias Setting

Parameter H3-07 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A3 (gain).
Parameter H3-08 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A3 (bias).

Selects the input signal level for analog input A2. Set DIP switch S1 on the terminal board accordingly for a voltage input or
current input.
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc on page 104.
The input level is -10 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc on page 104.
The input level is 4 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0%.
The input level is 0 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0%.
n H3-11, H3-12: Terminal A2 Gain and Bias Setting

Parameter H3-11 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 10 Vdc input or 20 mA input to terminal A2.
Parameter H3-12 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 0 V, 4 mA or 0 mA input at terminal A2.
Use both parameters to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A2. The setting works in the same way
as parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for analog input A1.
n H4-01, H4-04: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM, AM Monitor Selection

Sets the desired drive monitor parameter Uo-oo to output as an analog value via terminal FM and AM. Refer to U1:
Operation Status Monitors on page 222 for a list of all monitors. The “Analog Output Level” column indicates whether a
monitor can be used for analog output.
Example: Enter “103” for U1-03.
H4-01 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 102
H4-04 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 103
A setting of 031 or 000 applies no drive monitor to the analog output. With this setting, terminal functions as well as FM and
AM output levels can be set by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus (through mode).
n H4-02, H4-03: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain and Bias

H4-05, H4-06: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain and Bias
Parameters H4-02 and H4-05 set the terminal FM and AM output signal level when the value of the selected monitor is at
100%. Parameters H4-03 and H4-06 set the terminal FM and AM output signal level when the value of the selected monitor
is at 0%. Both are set as a percentage, where 100% equals 10 Vdc or 20 mA analog output and 0% equals 0 V or 4 mA. The
output voltage of both terminals is limited to +/-10 Vdc.
The output signal range can be selected between 0 to +10 Vdc or -10 to +10 Vdc, or 4 to 20 mA using parameter H4-07 and
H4-08. Figure 4.25 illustrates how gain and bias settings work.
H4-02 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
H4-03 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
H4-05 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 50.0%
H4-06 Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
Using Gain and Bias to Adjust Output Signal Level
The output signal is adjustable while the drive is stopped.
Terminal FM
1. View the value set to H4-02 (Terminal FM Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the
parameter being set in H4-01 will be output from terminal FM.
2. Adjust H4-02 viewing the monitor connected to the terminal FM.
3. View the value set to H4-03 on the digital operator; terminal FM will output a voltage equal to 0% of the parameter
being set in H4-01.
4. Adjust H4-03 viewing the output signal on the terminal FM.
Terminal AM
1. View the value set to H4-05 (Terminal AM Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the
parameter being set in H4-04 will be output from terminal AM.
2. Adjust H4-05 viewing the monitor connected to the terminal AM.
3. View the value set to H4-06 on the digital operator; terminal AM will output a voltage equal to 0% of the parameter
being set in H4-04.
4. Adjust H4-06 viewing the output signal on the terminal AM.
H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1
15 V
Gain = 150%
Output Voltage
Bias = 0%
10 V
Gain = 100%
10 V Bias = 0%
Gain 150% 5V
Bias 0% Gain = 50%
Output Voltage Bias = 0%
& Operation
-100%
Gain 100%
5V Bias 0% 100%
Monitor Value
-5 V
Gain 50%
Bias 0%
0V -10 V
0% Monitor Value 100% 4
-15 V
Figure 4.25 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 1 and 2
Set H4-03 to 30% for an output signal of 3 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 0%.
Gain = 100%
H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1
Bias = 30%
10V
Gain = 100%
10 V Output Voltage Bias = 0%
Bias 30% 3V
Output Voltage Gain 100% -100%
100%
Bias 0% Monitor Value
3V -4 V
Gain 100%
0V -10 V
0% Monitor Value 100%
Figure 4.26 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 3
n H4-07, H4-08: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM, AM Signal Level Selection
Sets the voltage output level of U parameter (monitor parameter) data to terminal FM and terminal AM using parameters
H4-07 and H4-08.
Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM
H4-07 0 to 2 0
Signal Level Selection
Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM
H4-08 0 to 2 0
Signal Level Selection
Setting 0: 0 to 10 V
Setting 1: -10 V to 10 V
n L3-01: Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration
Stall Prevention during acceleration prevents tripping with overcurrent (oC), motor overload (oL1), or drive overload (oL2)
faults common when accelerating with heavy loads.
L3-01 determines the type of Stall prevention the drive should use during acceleration.
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration 0 to 2 1
Setting 0: Disabled
No Stall Prevention is provided. If the acceleration time is too short, the drive may not be able to get the motor up to speed
fast enough, causing an overload fault.
Setting 1: Enabled
Enables Stall Prevention during acceleration.
Acceleration is reduced when the output current value exceeds 85% of the level set to parameter L3-02 for a longer than the
time set to L3-27. The acceleration stops when the current exceeds L3-02. Acceleration continues when the current falls below
L3-02 for longer than the time set to L3-27.
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced in the constant power range. Refer to L3-03: Stall Prevention Limit during
Acceleration on page 109.
Output current
Stall Prevention Level

During Acceleration
L3-02
L3-02
-15%
Time
Output frequency
Controls the output frequency

to prevent the motor from stalling
Time
Figure 4.27 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Induction Motors
Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention

The drive disregards the selected acceleration time and attempts to accelerate in the minimum time. The acceleration rate is
adjusted so the current does not exceed the value set to parameter L3-02.
n L3-02: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration
Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention during acceleration is activated.
L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration 0 to 150% <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default value is determined by parameter L8-38, Carrier Frequency Reduction.
• Lower L3-02 if stalling occurs when using a motor that is relatively small compared to the drive.
• Also set parameter L3-03 when operating the motor in the constant power range.
n L3-03: Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced when the motor is operated in the constant power range. L3-03 sets the
lower limit for this reduction as a percentage of the drive rated current.
L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration 0 to 100% 50%
& Operation
Stall Prevention level during Acceleration
L3-02
4
L3-03
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency
Figure 4.28 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
n L3-04: Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration

Stall Prevention during deceleration controls the deceleration based on the DC bus voltage and prevents an overvoltage fault
caused by high inertia or rapid deceleration.
L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration 0 to 5 1
Setting 0: Disabled
The drive decelerates according to the set deceleration time. With high inertia loads or rapid deceleration, an overvoltage fault
may occur. If an overvoltage fault occurs, use dynamic braking options or switch to another L3-04 selection.
Setting 1: General-purpose Stall Prevention
The drive tries to decelerate within the set deceleration time. The drive pauses deceleration when the DC bus voltage exceeds
the Stall Prevention level and then continues deceleration when the DC bus voltage drops below that level. Stall Prevention
may be triggered repeatedly to avoid an overvoltage fault. The DC bus voltage level for Stall Prevention depends on the input
voltage setting E1-01.
Drive Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
200 V Class 377 Vdc
400 V Class 754 Vdc
600 V Class 1084 Vdc
Note: 1. Do not use this setting in combination with a Dynamic Braking Resistor or other dynamic braking options. If Stall Prevention during
deceleration is enabled, it will be triggered before the braking resistor option can operate.
2. This method may lengthen the total deceleration time compared to the set value. If this is not appropriate for the application consider
using a dynamic braking option.
Figure 4.29 illustrates the function of Stall Prevention during deceleration.
Output Frequency
Deceleration characteristics
when Stall Prevention was
triggered during deceleration
Time
specified deceleration time
Figure 4.29 Stall Prevention During Deceleration
Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention

The drive adjusts the deceleration rate so the DC bus voltage is kept at the level set to parameter L3-17. This produces the
shortest possible deceleration time while protecting the motor from stalling. The selected deceleration time is disregarded and
the achievable deceleration time cannot be smaller than 1/10 of the set deceleration time.
This function uses the following parameters for adjusting the deceleration rate:
• DC bus voltage gain (L3-20)
• Deceleration rate calculations gain (L3-21)
• Inertia calculations for motor acceleration time (L3-24)
• Load inertia ratio (L3-25)
Note: The deceleration time is not constant. Do not use Intelligent Stall Prevention in applications where stopping accuracy is a concern. Use
dynamic braking options instead.
Setting 3: Stall Prevention with dynamic braking option
Enables the Stall Prevention function while using a dynamic braking resistor.
Setting 4: Overexcitation Deceleration 1
Overexcitation Deceleration 1 (increasing the motor flux) is faster than deceleration with no Stall Prevention (L3-04 = 0).
Setting 4 changes the selected decel time and functions to provide protection from an overvoltage trip.
Setting 5: Overexcitation Deceleration 2

Overexcitation Deceleration 2 slows down the motor while trying to maintain the DC bus voltage at the level set to parameter
L3-17. This function shortens the achievable deceleration time more than by using Overexcitation Deceleration 1. Setting 5
will shorten/lengthen the decel time to maintain the L3-17 bus level.
n L3-05: Stall Prevention Selection during Run
Determines how Stall Prevention works during Run. Stall Prevention during run prevents the motor from stalling by
automatically reducing the speed when a transient overload occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection During Run 0 to 2 1
Note: Stall Prevention during run is disabled when the output frequency is 6 Hz or lower regardless of the L3-05 and L3-06 settings.
Setting 0: Disabled
Drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC or oL fault.
Setting 1: Decelerate using C1-02
If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level set in parameter L3-06, the drive will decelerate at decel time 1 (C1-02). When
the current level drops below the value of L3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms, the drive accelerates back to the frequency reference
at the active acceleration time.
Setting 2: Decelerate using C1-04
Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at decel time 2 (C1-04).
n L3-06: Stall Prevention Level during Run
Sets the current level to trigger Stall Prevention during run. Depending on the setting of parameter L3-23, the level is
automatically reduced in the constant power range (speed beyond base speed). A setting of 100% is equal to the drive rated
current.
The Stall Prevention level can be adjusted using an analog input.
L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Run 30 to 150% <1> <1>
<1> The upper limit and default for this setting is determined by L8-38.
& Operation
4
4.7 Auto-Tuning
4.7 Auto-Tuning
u Types of Auto-Tuning
The drive offers different types of Auto-Tuning for induction motors. Refer to the tables below to select the type of Auto-
Tuning that bests suits the application. Refer to Start-Up Flowchart on page 82 for directions on executing Auto-Tuning.
n Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
This feature automatically sets the V/f pattern and motor parameters E1-oo and E2-oo for an induction motor.
Table 4.29 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Type Setting Application Conditions and Benefits
• The drive is used in V/f Control and other Auto-Tuning selections are not possible.
• Perform when entering motor data manually while using motor cables longer than 50
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to- m.
T1-01 = 2
Line Resistance • Drive and motor capacities differ.
• Tunes the drive after the cable between the drive and motor has been replaced with a
cable over 50 m long. Assumes Auto-Tuning has already been performed.
• Recommended for applications using Speed Estimation Speed Search or using the
Energy Saving function in V/f Control.
Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f T1-01 = 3 • Assumes motor can rotate while Auto-Tuning is executed. Increases accuracy for
Control
certain functions like torque compensation, slip compensation, Energy Saving, and
Speed Search.
Table 4.30 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure this data is available before starting Auto-Tuning.
The necessary information is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by the motor
manufacturer. Refer to Start-Up Flowchart on page 82 for details on the Auto-Tuning process.
Table 4.30 Auto-Tuning Input Data
Tuning Type (T1-01)
Input Value Input Parameter Unit 3
2 Rotational for V/f
Line-to-Line Resistance Control
Motor rated power T1-02 kW YES YES
Motor rated voltage T1-03 Vac – YES
Motor rated current T1-04 A YES YES
Motor rated frequency T1-05 Hz – YES
Number of motor poles T1-06 - – YES
Motor rated Speed T1-07 r/min – YES
Motor iron loss T1-11 W – YES
u Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes

If tuning results are abnormal or the STOP key is pressed before completion, Auto-Tuning will be interrupted and a fault code
will appear on the digital operator.
A B
ALM DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180
ALM
- A.TUNE - DRV Rdy - MODE - DRV
Tune Proceeding
X.XX Hz/ X.XXA Er-03
STOP key
<<<<<< >>> >>>
FWD FWD RESET
A – During Auto-Tuning
ESC
LO B – Auto-Tuning
ESC
Aborted
LO
RE RE
Figure 4.30 Auto-Tuning Aborted Display
RESET ENTER RESET ENTER
RUN STOP RUN STOP
4.7 Auto-Tuning
u Auto-Tuning Operation Example

The following example demonstrates Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance.
n Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - PRG
Auto-Tuning
2. Press or until the Auto-Tuning display appears. AUTO
HELP FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy

Tuning Mode Sel
T1-01= 2 *2*
3. Press to begin setting parameters. Term Resistance
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy

Tuning Mode Sel
T1-01= 2 *2*
4. Press to display the value for T1-01. Term Resistance
“2”
FWD
5. Save the setting by pressing . Entry Accepted
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy

Tuning Mode Sel
T1-01= 2 *2*
6. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3. Term Resistance
ESC FWD DATA
n Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate

After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning”.
Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 0.75kW
1. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02. (0.00 ~ 650.00)
“0.75kW”
ESC FWD DATA
& Operation
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 000.75kW
2. Press to view the default setting. (0.00 ~ 650.00)
“0.75kW”
FWD
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy

4
Mtr Rated Power
F1 F2
T1-02= 000.40kW
3. Press left , right , , , and to enter the motor power nameplate data in (0.00 ~ 650.00)
kW. “0.75kW”
FWD
4. Press to save the setting. Entry Accepted
4.7 Auto-Tuning
Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - PRG Rdy
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02= 0.40kW
5. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1. (0.00 ~ 650.00)
“0.75kW”
ESC FWD DATA
- A.TUNE - PRG
Rated Voltage
T1-03= 200.0VAC
Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters: (0.0 ~ 255.0)
“200.0VAC”
• T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage (Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control only) ESC FWD DATA
• T1-04, Motor Rated Current

6.
• T1-05, Motor Base Frequency (Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control only)
• T1-06, Number of Motor Poles (Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control only) - A.TUNE - PRG
Rated Current
• T1-07, Motor Base Frequency (Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control only) T1-04= X.XX A
(0.35 ~ 7.00)
“X.XX A”
ESC FWD DATA
n Starting Auto-Tuning
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death or
serious injury. Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with Auto-Tuning.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. High voltage will be supplied to the motor when Stationary Auto-Tuning is performed even with the
motor stopped, which could result in death or serious injury. Do not touch the motor until Auto-Tuning has been completed.
NOTICE: Rotational Auto-Tuning will not function properly if a holding brake is engaged on the load. Failure to comply could result in improper
operation of the drive. Ensure the motor can freely spin before beginning Auto-Tuning.
Enter the required information from the motor nameplate. Press to proceed to the Auto-Tuning start display.
Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate”.
Step Display/Result
- A.TUNE - DRV Rdy
Auto-Tuning
0.00 Hz/ 0.00A
1. After entering the data listed on the motor nameplate, press to confirm. Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
ESC FWD
Press to activate Auto-Tuning. flashes. The drive begins by injecting current - A.TUNE - DRV Rdy
Tune Proceeding
into the motor for about 1 min, and then starts to rotate the motor.
X.XX Hz/ X.XXA
2. Note: The first digit on the display indicates which motor is undergoing <<<<<< >>> >>>
Auto-Tuning. The second digit indicates the type of Auto-Tuning being FWD
performed.
- MODE - DRV
End
3. Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes. Tune Successful
FWD RESET
4.8 No-Load Operation Test Run

u No-Load Operation Test Run
This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor decoupled from the load during a test run.
n Before Starting the Motor
Check the following items before operation:
• Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
• Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions have been taken.
n During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
• The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n No-Load Operation Instructions
The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note: Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy
FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALARM
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1 F2
LO
2.
ESC
RE
Press to select LOCAL. The LO/RE light will turn on. RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
Off On
DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALARM
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 6.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1 F2
LO
ESC
RE
3. Press to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and the motor will rotate RESET ENTER
at 6 Hz.
& Operation
RUN STOP
RUN RUN
Off On
Motor
4
4. Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that no faults or alarms occur.
Forward
If there is no error in step 4, press to increase the frequency reference. Increase the
5. frequency in increments of 10 Hz, verifying smooth operation at all speeds. For each – –
frequency, check the drive output current using monitor U1-03. The current should be well
below the motor rated current.
Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy

FREF (OPR)
U1-01= 60.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz LSEQ
U1-03= 0.00A LREF
JOG FWD FWD/REV
F1 F2
LO
ESC
STOP
RE
6. The drive should operate normally. Press to stop the motor. RUN flashes until the RESET ENTER
motor comes to a complete stop. RUN STOP
RUN RUN
Off On
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected
4.9 Test Run with Load Connected

u Test Run with the Load Connected
After performing a no-load test run, connect the motor and proceed to run the motor and load together.
n Precautions for Connected Machinery
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. System may
start unexpectedly upon application of power, causing death or serious injury.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation of any fast stop circuits after they are wired. Fast stop circuits are
required to provide safe and quick shutdown of the drive. Prepare to initiate an emergency stop during the test run. Operating a drive with
untested emergency circuits could result in death or serious injury.
• The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
• Connect the load and machinery to the motor.
• Fasten all installation screws properly and check that the motor and connected machinery are held in place.
n Checklist Before Operation
• The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions
Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery to the motor.
• Monitor U1-03 for overcurrent during operation.
• If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, change the motor direction and the frequency reference
while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or vibration.
• Correct any problems that occur with hunting, oscillation, and other control-related issues.
& Operation
4
4.10 Test Run Checklist
4.10 Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.
No. Checklist Page
1 Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run. –
2 Turn the power on. 83
3 Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01. 96
Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary
closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
No. Checklist Page

4 Select the best V/f pattern according to the application and motor characteristics. –
Select Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance or Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control if using Energy
5 112
Saving functions.
6 Decouple the motor for Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control. 112
Enter the following data depending on Auto-Tuning method according to the information listed on the motor nameplate:
• Motor rated power to T1-02 (kW)
• Motor rated voltage to T1-03 (V)
7 • Motor rated current to T1-04 (A) –
• Motor base frequency to T1-05 (Hz)
• Number of motor poles to T1-06
• Motor base speed to T1-07 (r/min)
8 The should light after giving a Run command. –
9 To give Run command and frequency reference from the digital operator, press “LO/RE” key to set to LOCAL. 80
10 If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during test run, switch two of U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, or change b1-14. 83
11 Set motor rated current (E2-01) and motor protection (L1-01) values for motor thermal protection. –
12 Set the drive for REMOTE when control circuit terminals provide the Run command and frequency reference. 80
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct voltage input signal level
13 86
(0 to +10 V or -10 to +10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA).
14 Set the proper signal level to terminals A1, A2, A3 (0 to 20 mA, 4to 20 mA, 0 to +10 V or -10 to +10 V). 86
For A1, A2, and A3, when current input is used, switch the jumper on S1 from the V-side to I-side. Set the level for current
15 signal used with parameter H3-01 for terminal A1, H3-09 for terminal A2, H3-05 for terminal A3, (set “2” for 4 to 20 86
mA, or “3” for 0 to 20 mA). V = Voltage, I = Current analog input signal.
If an analog input supplies the frequency reference, make sure it produces the desired frequency reference. Make the
following adjustments if the drive does not operate as expected:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input gain (H3-03 for A1, H3-11 for A2,
16 –
H3-07 for A3) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired value.
Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input bias (H3-04 for A1, H3-12 for A2,
H3-08 for A3) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired minimum value.
4.11 Fan and Pump Application Presets

The following sections list the parameters affected by the different Application Presets.
u A1-03 = 8008: Pump

Table 4.31 Pump Application Parameters
Parameter Name Page
A1-06 Application Preset Selection (monitor only) 84
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 86
b1-02 Run Command Selection 87
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 88
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 122
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 93
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 93
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 94
E2-01 Motor Rated Current 100
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 124
L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts 125
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time 125
o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode 126
o1-07 Second Line Monitor Selection 126
o1-08 Third Line Monitor Selection 126
u A1-03 = 8009: Pump w/ PI

Table 4.32 Pump w/ PI Application Parameters
Parameter Name Page
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value 122
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display 123
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 123
b5-46 PID Unit Selection 123
b5-90 EZ Sleep Unit 123
b5-91 EZ Minimum Speed 123
& Operation
b5-92 EZ Sleep Level 124
b5-94 EZ Wake-up Level 124
4
H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 106
u A1-03 = 8010: Fan

Table 4.33 Fan Application Parameters
Parameter Name Page
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 86
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 94
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit 124
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 124
o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode 126
u A1-03 = 8011: Fan w/ PI

Table 4.34 Fan Application Parameters
Parameter Name Page
b5-12 PI Feedback Loss Detection Selection 122
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value 122
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display 123
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 123
b5-46 PID Unit Selection 123
b5-90 EZ Sleep Unit 123
b5-91 EZ Minimum Speed 123
b5-92 EZ Sleep Level 124
b5-94 EZ Wake-up Level 124
H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 106
u Default Values for Fan and Pump Applications

Table 4.35 Fan and Pump Application Defaults
A1-03 Setting
Parameter 8008 8009 8010 8011
A1-02 0: V/f Control 0: V/f Control 0: V/f Control 0: V/f Control
b1-04 – – 1: Reverse Disabled 1: Reverse Disabled
b3-05 – – 10.0 s 10.0 s
b5-01 – 1: PID Enabled – 1: PID Enabled
b5-03 – – – 5.0 s
b5-08 – – – 2.00 s
b5-13 – – – 2%
b5-14 – – – 25.0 s
b5-18 – 1: Enabled (b5-19) – 1: Enabled (b5-19)
b5-20 – 3: User Set – 3: User Set
b5-46 – – – 1: PSI
b5-89 – 1: EZ Sleep/Wake Up – 1: EZ Sleep/Wake Up
C1-01 – – 90.0 s 60.0 s
C1-02 – – 90.0 s 60.0 s
C2-01 – – 5.00 s 5.00 s
C2-02 – – 5.00 s 5.00 s
C2-03 – – 5.00 s 5.00 s
C2-04 – – 5.00 s 5.00 s
H3-10 – B: PID Feedback B: PID Feedback
L2-01 2: CPU Active 2: CPU Active 2: CPU Active 2: CPU Active
L3-02 – – 110% 110%
L3-06 – – 100% 100%
L4-05 – – 0: Stop –
L5-04 – – 180.0 s 180.0 s
L5-05 1: L5-04 Interval 1: L5-04 Interval 1: L5-04 Interval 1: L5-04 Interval
o1-06 – 1: Selectable – 1: Selectable
o1-07 – 102: Output Frequency – 102: Output Frequency
o1-08 – 501: Feedback – 501: Feedback
& Operation
4
4.12 Fan and Pump Application Preset Details

n b1-04: Reverse Operation Selection
Enables and disables Reverse operation. For some applications, reverse motor rotation is not appropriate and may cause
problems (e.g., air handling units, pumps, etc.).
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 0, 1 0
Setting 0: Reverse operation enabled
Possible to operate the motor in both forward and reverse directions.
Setting 1: Reverse operation disabled
Drive disregards a Reverse run command or a negative frequency reference.
n b5-12: PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection
Enables or disables the feedback loss detection and sets the operation when a feedback loss is detected.
b5-12 PID Feedback Loss Detection Selection 0 to 5 0
Setting 0: Digital Output Only
A digital output set for “PID feedback low” (H2-oo = 3E) will be triggered if the PID feedback value is below the detection
level set to b5-13 for the time set to b5-14 or longer. A digital output set for “PID feedback high” (H2-oo = 3F) will be
triggered if the PID feedback value is beyond the detection level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37. Neither a
fault nor an alarm is displayed on the digital operator and the drive will continue operation. The output resets when the feedback
value leaves the loss detection range.
Setting 1: Feedback Loss Alarm
If the PID feedback value falls below the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14, a “FBL - Feedback Low”
alarm will be displayed and a digital output set for “PID feedback low” (H2-oo = 3E) will be triggered. If the PID feedback
value exceeds the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37, a “FBH - Feedback High” alarm will be displayed
and a digital output set for “PID feedback high” (H2-oo = 3F) will be triggered. Both events trigger an alarm output (H1-
oo = 10). The drive will continue operation. The alarm and outputs reset when the feedback value leaves the loss detection
range.
Setting 2: Feedback Loss Fault
If the PID feedback value falls below the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14, a “FbL - Feedback Low”
fault will be displayed. If the PID feedback value exceeds the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37, a “FbH
- Feedback High” fault will be displayed. Both events trigger a fault output (H1-oo = E) and cause the drive to stop the
motor.
Setting 3: Digital output only, even if PID is disabled by digital input
Same as b5-12 = 0. Detection remains active when PID is disabled by a digital input (H1-oo = 19).
Setting 4: Feedback loss alarm, even if PID is disabled by digital input
Setting 5: Feedback loss fault, even if PID is disabled by digital input
n b5-19: PID Setpoint Value
Used as the PID setpoint if parameter b5-18 = 1.
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00%
n b5-38, b5-39: PID Setpoint User Display, PID Setpoint Display Digits
When parameter b5-20 is set to 3, parameters b5-38 and b5-39 set a user-defined display for the PID setpoint (b5-19) and PID
feedback monitors (U5-01, U5-04).
Parameter b5-38 determines the display value when the maximum frequency is output and parameter b5-39 determines the
number of digits. The setting value is equal to the number of decimal places.
Determined by
b5-38 PID Setpoint User Display 1 to 60000 b5-20
Determined by
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 0 to 3 b5-20
n b5-46: PI Setpoint Monitor Unit Selection

Sets the digital operator display units in U5-01 and U5-04 when b5-20 is set to 3.
b5-46 PI Setpoint Monitor Unit Selection 0 to 15; 25 0
Setting 0: WC (Inch of Water)
Setting 1: PSI (Pounds per Square Inch)
Setting 2: GPM (Gallons per Minute)
Setting 3: F (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Setting 4: CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute)
Setting 5: CMH (Cubic Meters per Hour)
Setting 6: LPH (Liters per Hour)
Setting 7: LPS (Liters per Second)
Setting 8: Bar (Bar)
Setting 9: Pa (Pascal)
Setting 10: C (Degrees Celsius)
Setting 11: Mtr (Meters)
Setting 12: Ft (Feet)
Setting 13: LPN (Liters per Minute)
Setting 14: CMM (Cubic Meters per Minute)
Setting 15: “Hg (Inches of Mercury)
Setting 25: None
n b5-90: EZ Sleep Unit
Sets the unit, range, and resolution of parameters b5-91 and b5-92.
& Operation
b5-90 EZ Sleep Unit 0, 1 0
Setting 0: Hz
Setting 1: RPM (number of motor poles must be entered) 4
n b5-91: EZ Minimum Speed
Sets the PID minimum speed and integral lower limit.
The lower limit of the internal value is the higher of b5-34 and d2-02.
b5-91 EZ Minimum Speed 0.0 to 400.0 Hz <1> 0.0
<1> Unit, range and resolution is determined by b5-90. Changing b5-90 will not automatically update the value of this parameter. Range is 0 to 24000
RPM when b5-90 is set to 1.
n b5-92: EZ Sleep Level

When the drive output frequency (or speed) is at or below this level for the time set in b5-93, the drive will go to sleep.
The internal lower limit of this parameter is b5-91 (EZ Min Speed) + 1 Hz.
b5-92 EZ Sleep Level 0.0 to 400.0 Hz <1> 0.0
<1> Unit, range and resolution is determined by b5-90. Changing b5-90 will not automatically update the value of this parameter. Range is 0 to 24000
RPM when b5-90 is set to 1.
n b5-94: EZ Wake-up Level

If b5-95 is set to 0 (Absolute), the drive wakes-up when the PID Feedback (H3-oo = 20) drops below this level for the time
set in b5-96. For reverse-acting, the PID Feedback has to be above this level for the time set in b5-96.
If b5-95 is set to 1 (Setpoint Delta), the drive wakes-up when the PID Feedback (H3-oo = 20) drops below the PID Setpoint
minus this level (for normal acting PID) for the time set in b5-96. For reverse-acting, Wake-up level is PID Setpoint plus this
level. The PID Feedback has to be above the wake-up level for the time set in b5-96.
b5-94 EZ Wake-up Level 0.00 to 600.00% <1> 0.00
<1> Unit and resolution are determined by b5-20, b5-39, and b5-46. Internally limited to b5-38. Changing b5-20, b5-38 and b5-39 will not automatically
update the value of this parameter.
n d2-01: Frequency Reference Upper Limit

Sets the maximum frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. This limit applies to all frequency
references.
Even if the frequency reference is set to a higher value, the drive internal frequency reference will not exceed this value.
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 100.0%
n d2-02: Frequency Reference Lower Limit

Sets the minimum frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. This limit applies to all frequency
references.
If a lower reference than this value is entered, the drive will run at the limit set to d2-02. If the drive is started with a lower
reference than d2-02, it will accelerate up to d2-02.
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 0.0%
Internal frequency
reference
d2-01
Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Operating
range
Frequency Reference Lower Limit

d2-02
Set frequency reference
Figure 4.31 Frequency Reference: Upper and Lower Limits
n L2-01: Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

When a momentary power loss occurs (DC bus voltage falls below the level set in L2-05), the drive can automatically return
to the operation it was performing prior to the power loss based on certain conditions.
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 0 to 5 2
Setting 0: Disabled (default)

If power is not restored within 15 ms, a Uv1 fault will result and the motor coasts to stop.
Setting 1: Recover within L2-02
When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive output will be shut off. If the power returns within the time set to parameter
L2-02, the drive will perform Speed Search and attempt to resume operation. If power is not restored within this time (i.e.,
DC bus voltage level remains below Uv1 detection level L2-05), then a Uv1 fault is triggered and the drive will stop.
Setting 2: Recover as long as CPU has power
When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive output will be shut off. If the power returns and the drive control circuit has
power, the drive will attempt to perform Speed Search and resume the operation. This will not trigger a Uv1 fault.
Setting 3: Kinetic Energy Backup (KEB) Ride-Thru operation within L2-02
The drive decelerates using regenerative energy from the motor until the time set in L2-02 has expired. It then tries to accelerate
back to the frequency reference. If the power does not return within the time set to L2-02, it will trigger a Uv1 fault and the
drive output will shut off. The type of KEB operation is determined by the L2-29 setting.
Setting 4: KEB Ride-Thru as long as CPU has power
The drive decelerates using regenerative energy from the motor until the power returns and then restarts. If the motor comes
to a stop before the power returns, the drive loses control power and the drive output shuts off. A Uv1 fault is not triggered.
The type of KEB operation is determined by the L2-29 setting.
Setting 5: Ramp to stop with KEB deceleration
The drive ramps to stop using the regenerative energy from the motor. Even if the power is restored, the drive will continue
to decelerate until the motor comes to a complete stop. The type of KEB operation is determined by the L2-29 setting. If an
input terminal set for KEB 1 (H1-oo = 65, 66) is triggered while the drive is decelerating, it will accelerate back up to speed
when the input is released.
Notes on Settings 1 through 5
• “Uv” will flash on the operator while the drive is attempting to recover from a momentary power loss. A fault signal is not
output at this time.
• A Momentary Power Loss Unit is available to allow for a longer momentary power loss ride through time in models
2A0004 to 2A0056 and 4A0002 to 4A0031. This option makes it possible to continue running the drive after up to two
seconds of power loss.
• When using a magnetic contactor between the motor and the drive, keep the magnetic contactor closed as long as the drive
performs KEB operation or attempts to restart with Speed Search.
• Keep the Run command active during KEB operation or the drive cannot accelerate back to the frequency reference when
the power returns.
• When L2-01 is set to 3, 4, or 5, KEB Ride-Thru will be executed as specified in L2-29.
n L5-01: Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Sets the number of times that the drive may attempt to restart itself.
Parameter L5-05 determines the method of incrementing the restart counter. When the counter reaches the number set to L5-01,
& Operation
the operation stops and the fault must be manually cleared and reset.
The restart counter is incremented at each restart attempt, regardless of whether the attempt was successful. When the counter
reaches the number set to L5-01, the operation stops and the fault must be manually cleared and reset.
The number of fault restarts is reset to zero when:
• The drive operates normally for 10 minutes following a fault restart. 4
• A fault is cleared manually after protective functions are triggered.
• The power supply is cycled.
L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts 0 to 10 Times 0 Times
n L5-04: Fault Reset Interval Time

Determines the amount of time to wait between restart attempts when parameter L5-05 is set to 1.
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time 0.5 to 600.0 s 10.0 s
n o1-06: User Monitor Selection Mode

Select between standard sequential monitors or selectable monitors to be displayed on the 2nd and 3rd lines of the digital
operator display.
Use parameters o1-07 and o1-08 to select and fix the second and third monitors shown in the Home (Frequency Reference)
and Monitor screen to ensure that those monitors are always visible when scrolling through the monitor list.
o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode 0, 1 0
Setting 0: 3 Mon Sequential (displays the next 2 sequential monitors)
Setting 1: 3 Mon Selectable (set by o1-07 and o1-08)
n o1-07: Second Line User Monitor Selection
Selects the monitor that is shown in the second line. Effective only when o1-06 is set to 1.
Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter number to be displayed: Uo-oo. For example, set “403” to display
monitor parameter U4-03.
o1-07 Second Line User Monitor Selection 101 to 799 102
n o1-08: Third Line User Monitor Selection

Selects the monitor that is shown in the third line. Effective only when o1-06 is set to 1.
Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter number to be displayed: Uo-oo. For example, set “403” to display
monitor parameter U4-03.
o1-07 Second Line User Monitor Selection 101 to 799 103
5
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms, errors, related displays, and guidance for
troubleshooting. This chapter can also serve as a reference guide for tuning the drive during a trial run.
5.1 DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS........................................................128

5.2 FAULT DETECTION.............................................................................................129
5.3 ALARM DETECTION...........................................................................................139
5.4 OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS............................................................142
5.5 AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION..................................................................143
5.6 COPY FUNCTION RELATED DISPLAYS...........................................................146
5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
5.1 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors

u Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Check the digital operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using the Digital
Operator on page 72.
If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with the following
information:
• Drive model
• Software version
• Date of purchase
• Description of the problem
Table 5.1 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the drive.
Table 5.1 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type Drive Response
When the drive detects a fault:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset.
• The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Faults
• Some faults allow the user to select the stopping method when the fault occurs.
• Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open.
The drive will remain inoperable until the fault is cleared. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 146.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
• The drive continues running the motor, although some alarms allow the user to select a stopping method when the alarm
Minor Faults and occurs.
Alarms • A multi-function contact output set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2- oo = 10) closes. If the output is set to be tripped
by an alarm, the contact will not close.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of the problem to reset a minor fault or alarm.
An operation error occurs when parameter settings conflict or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card).
When the drive detects an operation error:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.
Operation Errors
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to clear
the error.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning.
When the drive detects a tuning error:
Tuning Errors
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
• Motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
Copy Function Errors occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy, read, or verify parameter settings.
Copy Function Errors • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Investigate the cause of the problem (such as model incompatibility)
and try again.
5.2 Fault Detection
5.2 Fault Detection

u Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Faults are detected for drive protection, and cause the drive to stop while triggering the fault output terminal MA-MB-MC.
Remove the cause of the fault and manually clear the fault before attempting to run the drive again.
Table 5.2 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Fault Name
bAT bAT Digital Operator Battery Voltage Low
Cause Possible Solution
The digital operator battery is low Replace the digital operator battery.

Braking Transistor Overload Fault
boL
The braking transistor reached its overload level.
Option Communication Error

bUS • The connection was lost after establishing initial communication.
• Only detected when the run command frequency reference is assigned to an option card.
No signal was received from the PLC • Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring or an existing • Correct the wiring.
short circuit • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if
Communication data error occurred due to necessary.
noise • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or the
drive input power side.
• Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive
power supply input.
The option card is damaged Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur.
The option card is not properly connected to • The connector pins on the option card do not line up properly with the connector pins on the drive.
the drive • Reinstall the option card.

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
CE
Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
• Check for faulty wiring.
Faulty communications wiring or an existing • Correct the wiring.
Troubleshooting
short circuit
• Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or the
Communication data error occurred due to drive input power side.
noise • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge suppressors if
required.
5
• Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive
power supply input.
CPF11 to CPF14
or Control Circuit Error
CPF16 to CPF19
A/D Conversion Error

CPF02
An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.
5.2 Fault Detection
Control Board Connection Error

CPF03
Connection error between the control board and the drive
EEPROM Memory Data Error

CPF06
Error in the data saved to EEPROM
• Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive.
There is an error in EEPROM control circuit • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa
representative for instructions on replacing the control board.
The power supply was switched off while Reinitialize the drive (A1-03 = 2220, 3330).
parameters were being saved to the drive

CPF07
Terminal Board Connection Error
CPF08
or CPF20 or CPF21 Control Circuit Error
CPF22 Hybrid IC Failure
Control Board Connection Error

CPF23
Connection error between the control board and the drive
Drive Unit Signal Fault

CPF24
The drive capacity cannot be detected correctly (drive capacity is checked when the drive is powered up).
CPF25 Terminal Board Not Connected
to CPF26 to CPF35 Control Circuit Error

to CPF40 to CPF43 CPU error
If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa
Hardware is damaged representative for instructions on replacing the control board.
SI-T3 Watchdog Timer Error

E5
The watchdog timed out.
Option Card External Fault

EF0
An external fault condition is present.
An external fault was received from the PLC • Remove the cause of the external fault.
and F6-03 is set to a value other than 3. • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
Problem with the PLC program Check the PLC program and correct problems.

External Fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
EF6
5.2 Fault Detection

EF7
EF8
An external device tripped an alarm function Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
• Properly connect the signal lines to the terminals assigned for external fault detection
Wiring is incorrect (H1-oo = 20 to 2B).
• Reconnect the signal line.
Multi-function contact input setting is • Check for unused terminals set for H1-oo = 20 to 2B (External Fault).
incorrect • Change the terminal settings.

EEPROM Write Error
Err
Data cannot be written to the EEPROM
Internal Fan Fault

FAn
Fan or magnetic contactor failure
Excessive PID Feedback

FbH PID feedback input is greater than the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37. Set b5-12
to 2 or 5 to enable fault detection.
PID Feedback Loss

FbL PID feedback loss detection is programmed to trigger a fault (b5-12 = 2 or 5) and the PID feedback level
is below the detection level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14.
Ground Fault
GF • A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
• Setting L8-09 to 1 enables ground fault detection.
• Check the insulation resistance of the motor.
Motor insulation is damaged
• Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cable.
A damaged motor cable is creating a short • Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the drive
circuit • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal .
• Replace the cable.
• Reduce the carrier frequency.
Excessive leakage current at the drive output
• Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.
The drive started to run during a current offset • Set b3-01 to 1 to enable Speed Search at Start.
fault or while coasting to a stop • Perform Speed Search 1 or 2 (H1-oo = 61 or 62) via one of the external terminals.
Troubleshooting
Hardware problem representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Output Phase Loss
LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive. 5
• Setting L8-07 to 1 or 2 enables Phase Loss Detection.
• Check for wiring errors and properly connect the output cable.
The output cable is disconnected
• Correct the wiring.
• Check the resistance between motor lines.
The motor winding is damaged
• Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges
The output terminal is loose and Tightening Torque on page 51 for details.
5.2 Fault Detection
The rated current of the motor being used is Check the drive and motor capacities.
less than 5% of the drive rated current
An output transistor is damaged representative for instructions on replacing the control board.
A single-phase motor is being used The drive cannot operate a single phase motor.

Node Setup Error
nSE
A terminal assigned to the node setup function closed during run.
The node setup terminal closed during run.
A Run command was issued while the node Stop the drive when using the node setup function.
setup function was active.

Overcurrent
oC
Drive sensors detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.
The motor has been damaged due to • Check the insulation resistance.
overheating or the motor insulation is
damaged • Replace the motor.
• Check the motor cables.
One of the motor cables has shorted out or • Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the drive.
there is a grounding problem • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
• Replace damaged cables.
• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity drive if the current value exceeds the rated current.
The load is too heavy
• Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
• Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive.
Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the specified acceleration
time. If it is not possible to set the proper amount of torque, make the following changes:
The acceleration or deceleration times are too • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, C1-03).
short
• Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04).
• Increase the capacity of the drive.
The drive is attempting to operate a specialized • Check the motor capacity.
motor or a motor larger than the maximum size • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating found on the
allowed motor nameplate.
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output side of Set up the operation sequence so the MC does not trip while the drive is outputting current.
the drive has turned on or off
• Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.
V/f setting is not operating as expected • Set parameters E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately.
• Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency.
• Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation
• Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current.
• Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise
interference • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines,
and ground wiring.
• Check if the fault occurs simultaneously with overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high
• Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation Deceleration Gain).
• Set b3-01 to 1 to enable Speed Search at Start.
Run command was applied while motor was
coasting • Program the Speed Search command input through one of the multi-function contact input terminals
(H1-oo = 61 or 62).
The rated output current of the drive is too Use a larger drive.
small

Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-A
oFA00
Option compatibility error
5.2 Fault Detection
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-A

oFA01
Option not properly connected
to oFA03 to oFA06
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A
, oFA10, oFA11
to oFA12 to oFA17 Option Card Connection Error (CN5-A)
to oFA30 to oFA43 Communication Option Card Connection Error (CN5-A)
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B

oFb00

oFb01

oFb02
Same type of option card is currently connected
to oFb03 to oFb11
Option card error occurred at Option Port CN5-B
to oFb12 to oFb17
Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C

oFC00
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C

oFC01
Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C

oFC02
Same type of option card is currently connected
to oFC03 to oFC11
Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C
to oFC12 to oFC17
to oFC50 to oFC55 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C
Heatsink Overheat
oH The heatsink temperature exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. The default value for L8-02
is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within drive specifications.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
Troubleshooting
Load is too heavy • Decrease the load.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Replace the cooling fan.
Internal cooling fan is stopped
• After replacing the cooling fan, set parameter o4-03 to 0 to reset the cooling fan maintenance.

5
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat)
oH1 The heatsink temperature exceeded the drive overheat level. Overheat level is determined by drive
capacity (o2-04).
• Check the temperature surrounding the drive.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Measure the output current.

Load is too heavy • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Reduce the load.

Motor Overload
oL1
The electronic motor overload protection tripped
Load is too heavy Reduce the load.
Cycle times are too short during acceleration Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
and deceleration
• Reduce the load.
A general-purpose motor is driven below the • Increase the speed.
rated speed with a high load • If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a motor
specifically designed to operate in the desired speed range.
• Adjust the user-set V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
The output voltage is too high
• Do not set E1-08 and E1-10 too low. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds.
• Check the motor-rated current.
The wrong motor rated current is set to E2-01
• Enter the motor rated current to parameter E2-01 as indicated on the motor nameplate.
• Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
The base frequency is set incorrectly
• Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
The electrical thermal protection • Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics and motor overload • Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01).
characteristics do not match • Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at the • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
wrong level • Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01).
• Overexcitation increases the motor loss and the motor temperature. Excessive duration of
overexcitation may cause motor damage. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation or apply proper
Motor overheated by overexcitation operation cooling to the motor.
• Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
• Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
• Check values set to Speed Search related parameters.
Parameters related to Speed Search are set • Adjust the Speed Search current and Speed Search deceleration times (b3-02 and b3-03 respectively).
incorrectly
• After Auto-Tuning, set b3-24 to 1 to enable Speed Estimation Speed Search.
Output current fluctuation due to power Check the power supply for phase loss.
supply loss

Drive Overload
oL2
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Load is too heavy Reduce the load.
Acceleration or deceleration time is too short Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
The output voltage is too high
• Do not lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds.
Drive capacity is too small Replace the drive with a larger model.
• Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Overload occurred when operating at low • Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
speeds
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Excessive torque compensation Reduce the torque compensation gain in parameter C4-01 until there is no speed loss but less current.
• Check the settings for all Speed Search related parameters.
Parameters related to Speed Search are set • Adjust the current used during Speed Search (b3-03) and the Speed Search deceleration time (b3-02).
incorrectly
• After Auto-Tuning, set b3-24 to 1 to enable Speed Estimation Speed Search.
Output current fluctuation due to input phase Check the power supply for phase loss.
loss
5.2 Fault Detection

Overtorque Detection 1
oL3 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable time
(L6-03).
Overtorque Detection 2
oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the allowable
time (L6-06).
High Slip Braking oL

oL7
The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set to n3-04 during High Slip Braking.
External Digital Operator Connection Fault

The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
oPr Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
• The Run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov • For 200 V class drives: approximately 410 V
• For 400 V class drives: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
• For 600 V class drives: approximately 1040 V
• Increase the deceleration time (C1-02 and C1-04).
Deceleration time is too short and regenerative • Install a dynamic braking resistor or a dynamic braking resistor unit.
energy is flowing from the motor into the drive • Set L3-04 to 1 to enable stall prevention during deceleration. Stall Prevention is enabled as the default
setting.
• Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm.
• Increase the acceleration time.
Fast acceleration time causes the motor to • Use longer S-curve acceleration and deceleration times.
overshoot the speed reference
• Enable the Overvoltage Suppression function (L3-11 = 1).
• Lengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC bus. Reduce the braking
Excessive braking load torque, use a dynamic braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Install a DC link choke.
Surge voltage entering from the drive input
power Note: Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using
the same input power supply.
Ground fault in the output circuit causes the • Check the motor wiring for ground faults.
DC bus capacitor to overcharge • Correct grounding shorts and reapply power.
• Check the settings for Speed Search-related parameters.
Improper parameters related to Speed Search • Enable Speed Search restart function (b3-19 greater than or equal to 1 to 10).
Troubleshooting
(including Speed Search after a momentary • Adjust the current level during Speed Search and the deceleration time (b3-02 and b3-03 respectively).
power loss and after a fault restart) • Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance and then set b3-14 to 1 to enable Speed
Estimation Speed Search.
• Check the voltage.
Drive input power voltage is too high
• Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
The braking transistor or braking resistor are • Check braking transistor and braking resistor wiring for errors.
wired incorrectly • Properly rewire the braking resistor device. 5
• Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise
interference • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines,
and ground wiring.
• Check the load inertia settings when using KEB, overvoltage suppression, or Stall Prevention during
Load inertia is set incorrectly deceleration.
• Adjust the load inertia ratio in L3-25 to better match the load.
• Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
Motor hunting occurs • Set the gain for Hunting Prevention (n1-02).
• Adjust the AFR time constant (n2-02 and n2-03).
5.2 Fault Detection

Input Phase Loss
PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected when
L8-05 is set 1 (enabled).
• Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
There is phase loss in the drive input power
• Ensure the terminals are tightened properly.
There is loose wiring in the drive input power
terminals • Apply the tightening torque as specified in this manual. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening
Torque on page 51 for details.
There is excessive fluctuation in the drive • Check the voltage from the drive input power.
input power voltage • Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
There is poor balance between voltage phases Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
• Replace the capacitor if U4-05 is greater than 90%. For instructions on replacing the capacitor, contact
Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.
The main circuit capacitors are worn
Check for problems with the drive input power. If drive input power appears normal but the alarm
continues to occur, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.
Braking Resistor Fault

rF
The resistance of the braking resistor is too low.
Braking Resistor Overheat

rH Braking resistor protection was triggered.
Fault detection is enabled when L8-01 = 1 (disabled as a default).
• Check the load, deceleration time, and speed.
Deceleration time is too short and excessive • Reduce the load inertia.
regenerative energy is flowing back into the
drive • Increase the deceleration times (C1-01 to C1-04).
• Replace the dynamic braking option with a larger device that can handle the power that is discharged.
The duty cycle is too high Check the duty cycle. Maximum of 3% duty cycle is available when L8-01 = 1.
Recalculate braking load and braking power. Reduce the braking load by adjusting braking resistor
Excessive braking inertia settings.
The braking operation duty cycle is too high Check the braking operation duty cycle. Braking resistor protection for ERF-type braking resistors
(L8-01 = 1) allows a braking duty cycle of maximum 3%.
The proper braking resistor has not been • Check the specifications and conditions for the braking resistor device.
installed • Select the optimal braking resistor.
Note: The magnitude of the braking load trips the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. Using the braking resistor more
frequently than its rating permits will trip the alarm even when the braking resistor surface is not very hot.

Dynamic Braking Transistor
rr
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
The braking transistor is damaged • Cycle power to the drive and check for reoccurrence of the fault.
• Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board,
The control circuit is damaged contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.

SC IGBT Short Circuit or Ground Fault
Too Many Speed Search Restarts

SEr
The number of Speed Search restarts exceeded the value set to b3-19.

TdE TdE Time Data Error
5.2 Fault Detection
An error has occurred in the Real-Clock Time Replace the digital operator. For instructions on replacing the digital operator, contact Yaskawa or your
function of the digital operator nearest sales representative.
TIE TIE Time Interval Error

An error has occurred in the Real-Clock Time Replace the digital operator. For instructions on replacing the digital operator, contact Yaskawa or your
TIM TIM Time Not Set

The Real-Time Clock for the digital operator
is not set in parameter o4-17
Set o4-17 to 1 to set the time for the digital operator.
• The drive is a new drive, first power-up The drive will display the "TIM" alarm (Time Not Set) when the Real time Clock is not set . Additionally,
condition at power up, if the "TIM" condition is present, the drive will automatically switch to the time setting
• o4-17 was set to 2, Reset, by the user, screen (o4-17 = 1) for 30 seconds to prompt the user to set the Real-Time Clock.
manually clearing the Real-Time Clock
data.
The user did not set the Real Time Clock when Cycle power to the drive and set the Real Time Clock within 30 seconds of power-up, or set the clock
prompted following power-up. manually via parameter o4-17.
The digital operator battery is low or the Replace the digital operator battery and set the Real-Time Clock.
battery has been replaced
An error has occurred in the Real-Time Clock Replace the digital operator. For instructions on replacing the digital operator, contact Yaskawa or your
Undertorque Detection 1
UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-03).
Parameter settings are not appropriate for the Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
load
There is a fault on the machine side Check the load for any problems.

Undertorque Detection 2
UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the
allowable time (L6-06).
Motor Underload
UL6 UL6
The weight of the load has fallen below the underload curve defined in L6-14.
The output current has fallen below the motor Adjust the value set to L6-14 so that output current remains above the motor underload curve during
underload curve defined in L6-14 for longer normal operation.
than the time set to L6-03
DC Bus Undervoltage
Troubleshooting
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was running:
• Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05).
Uv1 • For 200 V class drives: approximately 190 V
The fault is output only if L2-01 is set to 0 or 1 and the DC bus voltage has fallen below the level set to
L2-05 for longer than the time set to L2-02. 5
• The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Input power phase loss
• Ensure there are no loose terminals.
One of the drive input power wiring terminals
is loose • Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges
and Tightening Torque on page 51 for details.
5.2 Fault Detection
• Check the voltage.

There is a problem with the voltage from the • Correct the voltage to be within the range listed in drive input power specifications.
drive input power • If there is no problem with the power supply to the main circuit, check for problems with the main
circuit magnetic contactor.
The power has been interrupted Correct the drive input power.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
The main circuit capacitors are worn • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.
• Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs.
• If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
The relay or contactor on the soft-charge replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.
bypass circuit is damaged • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass.
• Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.

Control Power Supply Voltage Fault
Uv2
Voltage is too low for the control drive input power.
In drive models 2A0004 to 2A0056 or 4A0002
to 4A0031, L2-02 was changed from its
default value without installing a Momentary Correct the setting to L2-02 or install an optional Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru unit.
Power Loss Ride-Thru unit
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Control power supply wiring is damaged • If the problem continues, replace the control board, the entire drive, or the control power supply. For
instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.
• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
Internal circuitry is damaged • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative.

Undervoltage 3 (Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault)
Uv3
The soft-charge bypass circuit failed.
Output Voltage Detection Fault

voF
Problem detected with the voltage on the output side of the drive.
vToL VT Overload
The application may not be suited for the drive
The output current of the drive has been • The application may not be suited for the drive
elevated for a set length of time.
• The drive is undersized for the load
5.3 Alarm Detection
5.3 Alarm Detection

u Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Alarms are drive protection functions that do not necessarily cause the drive to stop. After removing the cause of an alarm,
the drive will return to the same status is was before the alarm occurred.
When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display flashes. If
a multi-function output is set for an alarm (H2-oo = 10), that output terminal will be triggered.
Note: If a multi-function output is set to close when an alarm occurs (H2-oo = 10), it will also close when maintenance periods are reached,
triggering alarms LT-1 through LT-4 (triggered only if H2-oo = 2F).
Table 5.3 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name
Communication Option Station Number Setting Error (CC-Link, CANopen, MECHATROLINK-II)
AEr
Option card node address is outside of the acceptable setting range.
Baseblock
bb
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Braking Transistor Overload Fault

boL
The braking transistor in the drive has been overloaded.
Option Communication Error

bUS • The connection was lost after initial communication was established.
• Assign a Run command frequency reference to the option.
Serial Communication Transmission Error

CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error

CE
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
CrST Cannot Reset
dnE Drive Disabled
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error

EF
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for longer than 0.5 s.
Option Card External Fault

EF0
An external fault condition is present.
External Fault (Input Terminal S1)

EF1
Troubleshooting
External fault (input terminal S2)
EF2
EF3
EF4
External fault (input terminal S4) 5
EF5
EF6
EF7
5.3 Alarm Detection

EF8
EoF EoF Emergency Override Forward Run

The multi-function digital input for
EmergOverrideFWD (H1-oo = AF) has Open H1-oo = AF if the emergency condition is no longer present
been closed.
Eor Eor Emergency Override Reverse Run

The multi-function digital input for
EmergOverrideREV (H1-oo = B0) has Open H1-oo = B0 if the emergency condition is no longer present
been closed.
Excessive PID Feedback

FbH The PID feedback input is higher than the level set to b5-36 for longer than the time set to b5-37, and b5-12
is set to 1 or 4.
PID Feedback Loss

FbL
The PID feedback input is lower than the level set to b5-13 for longer than the time set to b5-14.
Current Alarm
HCA
Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).
Cooling Fan Maintenance Time

The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be replaced.
LT-1
Note: An alarm output (H2-oo = 10) will only be triggered if both (H2-oo = 2F and H2-oo =
10) are set.
Capacitor Maintenance Time

LT-2
The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected performance life.
Note: An alarm output (H2-oo = 10) will only be triggered if H2-oo = 2F.
Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time

LT-3 The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life.
IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)

LT-4 IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life.
Heatsink Overheat
oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100 °C). Default
value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04).
Drive Overheat Warning

oH2
“Drive Overheat Warning” was input to a multi-function input terminal, S1 through S8 (H1-oo= B).
Motor Overheat
oH3 The motor overheat signal entered to a multi-function analog input terminal exceeded the alarm level (H3-02,
H3-06 or H3-10 = E).
Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)

oH4 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1, A2, or A3 exceeded the fault detection level.
• Detection requires setting multi-function analog inputs H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 to E.
5.3 Alarm Detection
• Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times.
• Decrease the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
Motor has overheated • Do not set E1-08 and E1-10 too low. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds.
• Check the motor rated current.
• Enter the motor rated current to parameter E2-01 as indicated on the motor nameplate.
• Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally.
• Repair or replace the motor cooling system.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
ov • For 200 V class drives: approximately 410 V
PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
Motor Switch during Run

rUn
A command to switch motors was entered during run.
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error

SE Note: This alarm will not trigger a multi-function output terminal that is set for alarm output
(H2-oo = 10).
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)

TrPC
IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life.
Undervoltage
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a Run command was entered:
Uv • DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05.
• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus voltage
is under L2-05.
WrUn Waiting for Run

Cause Possible Solutions
The Run command has been applied and Adjust b1-11 to the desired delay time. The drive sill start normally after the b1-11 timer expires.
the b1-11 timer is active.
Troubleshooting
5.4 Operator Programming Errors
5.4 Operator Programming Errors

u Operator Programming Error Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to an
inappropriate value.
The drive will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly. An oPE, however, does not
trigger an alarm or fault output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and refer to Table 5.4 for the appropriate action. When
an oPE appears on the operator display, press the ENTER button to view U1-18 and see which parameter is causing the oPE.
Table 5.4 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
oPE01
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Parameter Range Setting Error

oPE02
Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range.
Multi-Function Input Selection Error

oPE03 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-01
to H1-08.
oPE04 Initialization Required, Term <–> Ctrl Chg
oPE05 Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error
Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error

oPE07 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-02,
H3-10, or H3-06 and PID functions conflict.
PID Control Selection Fault

oPE09 PID control function selection is incorrect. Requires that PID control is
enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4).
V/f Data Setting Error

oPE10 One of the following setting errors has occurred:
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
Carrier Frequency Setting Error

oPE11
Correct the setting for the carrier frequency.
Sequence Timer Error

oPE28 oPE28
One or more of the sequence timers is not set in the correct order.
5.5 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

When the Auto-Tuning faults shown below are detected, the fault is displayed on the operator and the motor coasts to a stop.
Auto-Tuning faults do not trigger a multi-function terminal set for fault or alarm output.
An Endo error indicates that although Auto-Tuning has successfully completed, there is some discrepancy in the calculations.
If an Endo error occurs, check for the cause of the error using the table in this section, and perform Auto-Tuning again or
manually set the motor parameters after fixing the problem. Start the application if no problem can be diagnosed despite the
existence of the Endo error.
u Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.5 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed after Auto-Tuning is
End1 complete)
The torque reference exceeded 20% during • Prior to Auto-Tuning, verify the information on the motor nameplate.
Auto-Tuning. • Enter proper values from motor nameplate to parameters T1-02 and T1-04 and repeat Auto-Tuning.
The results from Auto-Tuning the no-load • If possible, disconnect the motor from the load and perform Auto-Tuning. If the load cannot be uncoupled,
current exceeded 80%. use the current Auto-Tuning results.

Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed after
End2 Auto-Tuning is complete)
Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate.
was incorrect. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the
parameter setting range, assigning the iron- • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
core saturation coefficients (E2-07 and • Disconnect the motor from machine and perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
E2-08) to temporary values.

End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete)
The correct current rating printed on the • Check the setting of parameter T1-04.
motor nameplate was not entered into
T1-04. • Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning.

End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error
The calculated slip is outside the allowable • Make sure the data entered for Auto-Tuning is correct.
Troubleshooting
range. • If possible, perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. If not possible, perform Stationary Auto-Tuning 2.

End5 Resistance Tuning Error
The calculated resistance value is outside
the allowable range.
• Double-check the data entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
5
• Check the motor and motor cable connection for faults.

End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm
The calculated leakage inductance value is Double-check the data entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
outside the allowable range.

End7 No-Load Current Alarm
The entered no-load current value was Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
outside the allowable range.
Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of Double-check the data entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
the motor rated current.

Er-01 Motor Data Error
Motor data or data entered during • Check that the motor data entered to T1 parameters matches motor nameplate input before Auto-Tuning.
Auto-Tuning was incorrect
. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information.
Motor output power and motor-rated • Check the drive and motor capacities.
current settings (T1-02 and T1-04) do not
match. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04.
Motor rated current and detected no-load • Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
current are inconsistent. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03.

Er-02 Minor Fault
An alarm was triggered during Auto- Exit the Auto-Tuning menu, check the alarm code, remove the alarm cause, and repeat Auto-Tuning.
Tuning.

Er-03 STOP Button Input
Auto-Tuning canceled by pressing STOP Auto-Tuning did not complete properly. Restart Auto-Tuning.
button.

Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the
parameter setting range or the tuning
process took too long. Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
Faulty motor cable or cable connection.

Er-05 No-Load Current Error
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
process took too long. • Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled make
The load was too high during Rotational sure the load is lower than 30%.
Auto-tuning.
• If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning.

Er-08 Rated Slip Error
Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the • Check and correct faulty motor wiring.
process took too long. • Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
The load was too high during rotational sure the load is lower than 30%.
Auto-tuning.

Er-09 Acceleration Error
The motor did not accelerate for the • Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
specified acceleration time. • Disconnect the machine from the motor if possible.
The load was too high during Rotational sure the load is lower than 30%.
Auto-Tuning.

Er-11 Motor Speed Fault
• Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
Torque reference is too high.
• Disconnect the machine from the motor if possible.

Er-12 Current Detection Error
One of the motor phases is missing: Check motor wiring and correct any problems.
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
The current exceeded the current rating of • Check motor wiring for a short between motor lines.
the drive. • Close any magnetic contactors used between motors.
The current is too low. • Replace the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor Connect the motor and restart Auto-Tuning.
connected to the drive.
Replace the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa
Current detection signal error. or your nearest sales representative.
Troubleshooting
Er-13 Leakage Inductance Error
Drive was unable to complete tuning for • Check all wiring and correct any mistakes.
leakage inductance within 300 seconds. • Check the motor rated current value written on the motor nameplate and enter the correct value to T1-04.

5
Er-17 Reverse Prohibited Error

Drive is prohibited from rotating the motor • Inertia Auto-Tuning cannot be performed if the drive is restricted from rotating in reverse.
in reverse while attempting to perform • Assuming it is acceptable for the application to rotate in reverse, set b1-04 to 0 and then perform Inertia
Inertia Tuning. Tuning.
5.6 Copy Function Related Displays

u Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting
The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function.
When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the operator will indicate the task being performed. When an error
occurs, a code appears on the operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do not trigger a multi-
function output terminal that has been set up to close when a fault or alarm occurs. To clear an error, simply press any key on
the operator and the error display will disappear.
Table 5.6 lists the corrective action that can be taken when an error occurs.
Note: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the drive should be fully stopped.
2. The drive will not accept a Run command while the Copy function is being executed.
3. Parameters can only be saved to a drive when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match.
Table 5.6 Copy Function Task and Error Displays
Digital Operator Display Task
CoPy Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)
CPyE Error Writing Data
CSEr Copy Unit Error
dFPS Drive Model Mismatch
End Task Complete
iFEr Communication Error
ndAT Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
rdEr Error Reading Data
rEAd Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)
vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch
vFyE Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same
vrFy Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing)
u Fault Reset Methods

When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The table below lists the different
ways to restart the drive.
After the Fault Occurs Procedure
- MODE - DRV
oC
Overcurrent
Fix the cause of the fault, restart the drive, and Press on the digital operator when the error code
FWD RESET
reset the fault is displayed.

RESET F1 F2
LO
ESC
RE
RESET ENTER
RUN STOP
Drive
Close then open the fault signal digital input via Fault Reset Switch
S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
Resetting via Fault Reset Digital Input S4 terminal S4. S4 is set for “Fault Reset” as default
SC Digital Input Common
(H1-04 = 14).
After the Fault Occurs Procedure

2 ON
Turn off the main power supply if the above methods do not reset the fault. Reapply power after the
digital operator display has turned off.
1 OFF
Note: If the Run command is present, the drive will disregard any attempts to reset the fault. Remove the Run command before attempting to clear
a fault situation.
Troubleshooting
6
Periodic Inspection & Maintenance
This chapter describes the periodic inspection and maintenance of the drive to ensure that it receives
the proper care to maintain overall performance.
6.1 INSPECTION........................................................................................................150
6.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE.................................................................................153
6.3 DRIVE REPLACEMENT.......................................................................................155
6.1 Inspection
6.1 Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changes in characteristics or performance deterioration after years of use
under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance and periodic
inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans, and relays.
The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
• Excessive vibrations or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres
• Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection one to two years after installation.
u Recommended Daily Inspection

Table 6.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to avoid
premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each
inspection.
Table 6.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Category Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
• Check the load coupling.
Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming from • Measure motor vibration.
Motor the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.
Check for the following:
• Excessive load.
Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive or • Loose connections.
motor and visible discoloration.
• Dirty heatsink or motor.
Cooling
• Ambient temperature.
Inspect drive cooling fan and circulation fan operation. • Clogged or dirty fan.
• Correct Fan operation parameter setting.
Verify the drive environment complies with the Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct poor
Environment specifications listed in Installation Environment on environment.
page 26.
The drive output current should not be higher than the • Excessive load.
Load motor or drive rating for an extended period of time.
• Correct motor parameter settings.
• Correct the voltage or power supply to within
Power Supply Voltage Check main power supply and control voltages. nameplate specifications.
• Verify all main circuit phases.
6.1 Inspection
u Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 6.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations. Although periodic inspections should
generally be performed once a year; the drive may require more frequent inspection in harsh environments or with rigorous
use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the actual inspection
frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure.
Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each inspection.
n Periodic Inspection
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not inspect, connect, or disconnect any wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result
in serious personal injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock,
wait for at least the time specified on the warning label; after all indicators are OFF, measure for unsafe voltages to confirm the drive is safe
prior to servicing.
Table 6.2 Periodic Inspection Checklist
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Inspect equipment for discoloration from overheating • Replace damaged components as required.
or deterioration. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may require
• Inspect for damaged or deformed parts. complete drive replacement.
General • Inspect enclosure door seal if used.
• Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust collection on pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa
components.
(4 - 6 kg•cm2) (57 to 85 psi).
• Replace components if cleaning is not possible.
• Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration,
Conductors and damage, or heat stress. Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear.
Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose Tighten loose screws and replace damaged screws or
Terminals connections. terminals.
• Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise • Check coil voltage for overvoltage or undervoltage
during operation. conditions.
Relays and Contactors
• Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as melted • Replace damaged removable relays, contactors, or
or cracked insulation. circuit board.
Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or around • Minor discoloration may be acceptable.
Braking Resistors resistors. • Check for loose connections if discoloration exists.
• Inspect for leaking, discoloration, or cracks.
The drive has few serviceable parts and may require
Electrolytic Capacitor • Check if the cap has come off, for any swelling, or if complete drive replacement.
the sides have burst open.
Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
Diode, IGBT Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on the pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa
(Power Transistor) surface.
(4 - 6 kg•cm2) (57 to 85 psi).
Motor Periodic Inspection
Stop the motor and contact qualified maintenance
Operation Check Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise. personnel as required.
Periodic Inspection &

Control Circuit Periodic Inspection
• Tighten loose screws and replace damaged screws
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose
Maintenance
or terminals.
General connections.
• If terminals are integral to a circuit board, then
• Make sure all terminals have been properly tightened. board or drive replacement may be required.
• Fix any loose connections.
• If an antistatic cloth or vacuum plunger cannot be
used, replace the board. 6
Check for any odor, discoloration, and rust. Make sure • Do not use any solvents to clean the board.
Circuit Boards connections are properly fastened and that no dust or oil • Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
mist has accumulated on the surface of the board. pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa
(4 - 6 kg•cm2) (57 to 85 psi).
The drive has few serviceable parts and may require
complete drive replacement.
6.1 Inspection
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked

Cooling System Periodic Inspection
Cooling Fan,
Circulation Fan, • Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise.
Replace as required.
Control Board • Check for damaged or missing fan blades.
Cooling Fan
Use dry air to clear away foreign matter. Use a
Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on the pressure of 39.2 × 104 to 58.8 × 104 Pa
Heatsink surface.
(4 - 6 kg•cm2) (57 to 85 psi).
Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They must be • Visually inspect the area.
Air Duct free from obstruction and properly installed. • Clear obstructions and clean air duct as required.
Display Periodic Inspection
• Make sure data appears on the display properly. • Contact the nearest sales office if there is any
Digital Operator • Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may have trouble with the display or keypad.
collected on surrounding components. • Clean the digital operator.
6.2 Periodic Maintenance

The drive has Maintenance Monitors that keep track of component wear. This feature provides advance maintenance warning
and eliminates the need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The drive allows the user to check predicted
maintenance periods for the components listed below.
• Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, Control Board Cooling Fan
• Electrolytic Capacitors
• Inrush Prevention Circuit
• IGBTs
For replacement parts, contact the distributor where the drive was purchased or contact Yaskawa directly.
u Replacement Parts
Table 6.3 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of the drive. Only
use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and revision.
Table 6.3 Estimated Performance Life
Component Estimated Performance Life
Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan 10 years
Electrolytic Capacitors 10 years <1>
<1> The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing parts
to maintain performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use.
Usage conditions for estimated performance life:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 40 °C (IP00/Open Type enclosure)
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operation time: 24 hours a day
n Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors

The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement during the life of the drive. A
percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the digital operator by viewing the appropriate monitor parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may malfunction. Yaskawa recommends
checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 151 for more details.
Table 6.4 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter Component Contents
Cooling Fan Displays the accumulated operation time of the fan from 0 to 99999 hours. This value is automatically reset to
U4-03 Circulation Fan 0 after it reaches 99999.
Control Board Cooling
U4-04 Fan Displays the accumulated fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.
U4-05 DC Bus Capacitors Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.
Inrush (pre-charge) Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performance life of the inrush
U4-06

Relay circuit.
U4-07 IGBT Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.
Maintenance
n Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected performance life.
When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance monitor function (H2-oo = 2F), the
terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the expected performance
life, or when the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life. Additionally the digital operator will display
an alarm like shown in Table 6.5 to indicate the specific components that may need maintenance.
Table 6.5 Maintenance Alarms
Digital Operator Alarm Display Function Corrective Action
<1> The cooling fans have reached 90% of their designated Replace the cooling fan.
LT-1 life time.
Contact a Yaskawa representative or the
<1> The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of their
LT-2 nearest Yaskawa sales office on
designated life time. possible drive replacement.
<1> The DC bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its
LT-3 nearest Yaskawa sales office on
designated life time. possible drive replacement.
<1> The IGBTs have reached 50% of their designated life Check the load, carrier frequency, and
LT-4 time. output frequency.
<2> The IGBTs have reached 90% of their designated life
TrPC nearest Yaskawa sales office on
time. possible drive replacement.
<1> This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2-oo = 2F). The alarm
will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2-oo = 10).
<2> This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of the digital outputs (H2-oo = 2F).
The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2-oo = 10).
n Related Drive Parameters

Use parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 to reset a Maintenance Monitor to zero after replacing a specific component.
Refer to Parameter List on page 177 for details on parameter settings.
NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the Maintenance Monitor function will continue
to count down the performance life from the value that was reached with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will
not have the correct value of the performance life for the new component.
6.3 Drive Replacement

u Replacing the Drive
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious
personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any
components.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive. Failure to comply could result in
serious injury. Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation,
adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
NOTICE: Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result
in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
The following procedure explains how to replace a drive.
This section provides instructions for drive replacement only.
To install option boards or other types of options, refer to the specific manuals for those options.
NOTICE: When transferring a braking transistor, braking resistor, or other type of option from a damaged drive to a new replacement drive,
make sure it is working properly before reconnecting it to the new drive. Replace broken options to prevent immediate breakdown of the
replacement drive.
1. Remove the terminal cover.
Figure 6.1 Remove the Terminal Cover
2. Loosen the screws holding the terminal board in place. Remove the screw securing the bottom cover and remove the
bottom cover from the drive.
Note: IP00/Open Type enclosure drives do not have a bottom cover or conduit.

Maintenance
Figure 6.2 Unscrew the Terminal Board and Remove the Bottom Cover
6
3. Slide the terminal board as illustrated by the arrows to remove it from the drive along with the bottom cover.
Figure 6.3 Remove the Terminal Board
Figure 6.4 Disconnected Removable Terminal Board
4. Disconnect all option cards and options, making sure they are intact before reusing.
5. Replace the drive and wire the main circuit.
n Installing the Drive

1. After wiring the main circuit, connect the terminal block to the drive as shown in Figure 6.5. Use the installation screw
to fasten the terminal block into place.
Figure 6.5 Install the Terminal Board
2. Reconnect options for the new drive the same way the options were connected in the old drive. Connect option boards
to the same option ports in the new drive that were used in the old drive.
3. Replace the terminal cover.
4. After powering on the drive, all parameter settings are transferred from the terminal board to the drive memory. If an
oPE04 error occurs, load the parameter settings saved on the terminal board to the new drive by setting parameter
A1-03 to 5550. Reset the Maintenance Monitor function timers by setting parameters o4-01 through o4-12 to 0, and
parameter o4-13 to 1.
7
Peripheral Devices & Options
This chapter explains option installation procedures for the drive.
7.1 OPTION CARD INSTALLATION..........................................................................158
7.1 Option Card Installation

This section provides instructions on installing option cards.
u Prior to Installing the Option

Prior to installing the option, wire the drive, make necessary connections to the drive terminals, and verify that the drive
functions normally without the option installed.
Table 7.1 below lists the number of options that can be connected to the drive and the drive ports for connecting those options.
Table 7.1 Option Installation
Option Port/Connector Number of Options Possible
SI-B3, SI-EN3, SI-EM3, SI-N3, SI-P3, SI-T3, SI-C3, CN5-A 1
SI-S3
AO-A3 CN5-A, B, C 1
Figure 7.1 shows an exploded view of the drive with the option and related components for reference.
K M A
C
NS MS
G TX RX
F
E
A – Drive front cover H – Drive grounding terminal (FE)

B – Digital operator I – Connector CN5-C
C – LED label (for communication J – Connector CN5-B
options) K – Connector CN5-A
D – Drive terminal cover L – Insertion point for CN5 connector
E – Removable tabs for wire routing M – Option
F – Included screws
G – Ground wire
Figure 7.1 Drive Components with Option
u Communication Option Installation Example

Remove the front covers of the drive before installing the option. Communication options can inserted only into the CN5-A
connector located on the drive control board.
Preparing the Drive
1. Shut off power to the drive, wait the appropriate amount of time for voltage to dissipate, then remove the digital operator
(B) and front covers (A, D). Front cover removal varies by model.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death
or serious injury. Before installing the option, disconnect all power to the drive. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent
electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the option, drive, and
circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to circuitry.
Figure 7.2 Remove the Front Covers and Digital Operator
2. With the front covers and digital operator removed, apply the LED label (C) in the appropriate position on the drive
top front cover (A).
C
NS MS
TX RX
Figure 7.3 Apply the LED Label
Connecting Option and Ground Wire Peripheral Devices &
1. Insert the option (M) into the CN5-A connector (K) located on the drive and fasten it using one of the included screws
(F).
Options
K M
L
F
MS
NS
RX
TX
Figure 7.4 Insert the Option
2. Connect the ground wire (G) to the ground terminal (H) using one of the remaining provided screws (F). Connect the
other end of the ground wire (G) to the remaining ground terminal and installation hole on the option (M) using the
last remaining provided screw (F) and tighten both screws to 0.5 ~ 0.6 N m or (4.4 ~ 5.3 in lbs).
H
MS
NS
RX
TX
G
F
Figure 7.5 Connect the Ground Wire
Note: There are two screw holes on the drive for use as ground terminals. When connecting three options, two ground wires will need
to share the same drive ground terminal.
Wiring the Option
1. Route the option wiring.
Depending on the drive model, some drives may require routing the wiring through the side of the front cover to the
outside to provide adequate space for the wiring. In these cases, using diagonal cutting pliers, cut out the perforated
openings on the left side of the drive front cover. Sharp edges along the cut out should be smoothed down with a file
or sand paper to prevent any damage to the wires.
When installing option cards to models 2A0004 to 2A0040, 4A0002 to 4A0023, and 5A0003 to 5A0011, it may be
necessary to route the cables connected to the option through the top cover to the outside. Models 2A0056 to 2A0415,
4A0031 to 4A1200, and 5A0017 to 5A0242 have enough space to keep all wiring inside the unit.
2. Connect the communication cables to the option terminal block (TB1).
Note: Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables. Use properly grounded
shielded cables for the communication cables to prevent problems caused by electrical interference.
Replacing the Drive Covers and Digital Operator
1. Replace and secure the front covers of the drive (A, D) and replace the digital operator (B).
MS
NS
RX
TX
Figure 7.6 Replace the Front Covers and Digital Operator
Note: Take proper precautions when wiring the option so that the front covers will easily fit back onto the drive. Make sure no cables
are pinched between the front covers and the drive when replacing the covers.
Peripheral Devices &

Options
Appendix: A
Specifications
A.1 POWER RATINGS...............................................................................................164

A.2 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................173
A.3 DRIVE WATT LOSS DATA..................................................................................175
A.1 Power Ratings
A.1 Power Ratings
u Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive Models 2A0004 to 2A0030

Table A.1 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Item Specification
Drive Model 2A0004 2A0006 2A0008 2A0010 2A0012 2A0018 2A0021 2A0030
Maximum Applicable Motor
ND Rating 0.75 1 2 3 3 5 7.5 10
Capacity (HP) <1>
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 3.9 7.3 8.8 10.8 13.9 18.5 24 37
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz/270 to 340 Vdc <3>
Input
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 2.2 3.1 4.1 5.8 7.8 9.5 14 18
Rated Output Capacity
ND Rating <5> 1.3 2.3 3 3.7 4.6 6.7 8 11.4
(kVA) <4>
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <5> 3.5 6 8 9.6 12 17.5 21 30
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
Output Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 to 15 kHz
Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
Maximum Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-set)
<1> The motor capacity (HP) refers to a NEC rated 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than
the motor current. Select the appropriate capacity drive if operating the motor continuously above motor nameplate current.
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring
connections, and power supply impedance.
<3> DC is not available for UL/CE standards.
<4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz. Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
A.1 Power Ratings

Table A.2 Power Ratings Continued (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Item Specification
Drive Model 2A0040 2A0056 2A0069 2A0081 2A0110 2A0138 2A0169 2A0211
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity
ND Rating 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
(HP) <1>
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 52 68 80 96 111 136 164 200
Rated Voltage
Input
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 27 36 44 52 51 62 75 91
ND Rating <5> 15.2 21 26 31 42 53 64 80
(kVA) <4>
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <5> 40 56 69 81 110 138 169 211
Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
Output
User adjustable
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 to 15 kHz between 2 and
10 kHz
Specifications
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 2A0250 2A0312 2A0360 2A0415
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (HP) <1> ND Rating 100 125 150 175
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 271 324 394 471
Rated Voltage
Input
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 124 148 180 215
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) <4> ND Rating <5> 95 119 137 158
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <5> 250 312 360 415
Overload Tolerance
Output (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 4A0002 4A0004 4A0005 4A0007 4A0009 4A0011 4A0018 4A0023 4A0031
ND Rating 0.75 2 3 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Capacity (HP) <1>
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 2.1 4.3 5.9 8.1 9.4 14 20 24 38
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency Three-phase: 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz/510 to 680 Vdc <3>
Input
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 2.3 4.3 6.1 8.1 10.0 14.5 19.4 28.4 37.5
Rated Output Capacity ND Rating 1.6 3.1 4.1 5.3 6.7 8.5 13.3 17.5 24
(kVA) <4> <5>
Rated Output Current ND Rating 2.1 4.1 5.4 6.9 8.8 11.1 17.5 23 31
(A) <5>
Output ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s

Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Maximum Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (user-adjustable)
<2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions,
and power supply impedance.
Specifications
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 4A0038 4A0044 4A0058 4A0072 4A0088 4A0103 4A0139 4A0165
ND Rating 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
Capacity (HP) <1>
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 44 52 58 71 86 105 142 170
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency Three-phase: 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz/510 to 680 Vdc <3>
Input
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 46.6 54.9 53.0 64.9 78.6 96.0 130 156
ND Rating <5> 29 34 44 55 67 78 106 126
(kVA) <4>
Rated Output Current
(A) ND Rating <5> 38 44 58 72 88 103 139 165

Overload Tolerance
User adjustable
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 to 15 kHz between 2 to
10 kHz
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 4A0208 4A0250 4A0296 4A0362 4A0414 4A0515 4A0675
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity
ND Rating 150 200 250 300 350 400-450 500-550
(HP) <1>
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 207 248 300 346 410 465 657
Rated Voltage
Input Rated Frequency Three-phase: 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz/510 to 680 Vdc <3>
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 189 227 274 316 375 425 601
ND Rating <5> 159 191 226 276 316 392 514
(kVA) <4>
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <5> 208 250 296 362 414 515 675
Output Overload Tolerance (Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)
Carrier Frequency User-adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz User-adjustable between 2 and 5 kHz
Specifications
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 5A0003 5A0004 5A0006 5A0009 5A0011 5A0017 5A0022 5A0027 5A0032
ND Rating 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Capacity (HP) <1>
Input Current
ND Rating 3.6 5.1 8.3 12 16 23 31 38 45
(A) <2>
Rated Voltage Three-phase 500 to 600 Vac 50/60 Hz
Rated Frequency
Input Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -10 (-15) to +10%
Allowable Frequency ±5%
Fluctuation
Input Power ND Rating 4.1 5.8 9.5 14 18 26 35 43 51
(kVA)
Rated Output
ND Rating
Capacity (kVA) <4> 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32
<3>
Rated Output ND Rating 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32

Current (A) <4>
Output ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s

Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz User adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz
Maximum Output Frequency 400 Hz (user-set)
(Hz)
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 5A0041 5A0052 5A0062 5A0077 5A0099
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (HP) <1> ND Rating 40 50 60 75 100
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 44 54 66 80 108
Rated Frequency
Input
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -10 (-15) to +10%
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 50 62 75 91 123
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) <3> ND Rating <4> 41 52 62 77 99
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <4> 41 52 62 77 99
Output User
adjustable
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz between 2 and
8 kHz
<4> Carrier frequency can be increased to 2 kHz while keeping this current derating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating.
Specifications
A.1 Power Ratings

Item Specification
Drive Models 5A0125 5A0145 5A0192 5A0242
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (HP) <1> ND Rating 125 150 200 250
Input Current (A) <2> ND Rating 129 158 228 263
Rated Frequency
Input
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -10 (-15) to +10%
Input Power (kVA) ND Rating 147 181 261 301
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) <3> ND Rating <4> 124 144 191 241
Rated Output Current (A) ND Rating <4> 125 145 192 242
Overload Tolerance
Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 3 kHz
<4> Carrier frequency can be increased to 2 kHz while keeping this current derating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating.
A.2 Drive Specifications

Note: 1. Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain the performance specifications given below.
2. For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the required specifications.
Item Specification
Control Method V/f Control (V/f)
Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 400 Hz
Frequency Accuracy Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output frequency (-10 to +40 °C)
(Temperature Fluctuation) Analog input: within ±0.1% of the max output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C)
Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Frequency Setting Resolution Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output frequency setting (11 bit plus sign)
Resolution of analog inputs A1 and A3 is 10 bit + sign in current mode
Output Frequency Resolution 0.001 Hz
Main speed frequency reference: DC -10 to +10 V (20 kΩ), DC 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ),
Frequency Setting Signal 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Main speed reference: Pulse train input (max. 32 kHz)
Starting Torque <1> V/f: 150% at 3 Hz
Speed Control Range <1> V/f: 1:40
Accel/Decel Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s (2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Control
Character- Approx. 20% (approx. 125% when using braking resistor) <2>
istics • Short-time decel torque <3> : over 100% for 0.4/ 0.75 kW motors, over 50% for 1.5 kW motors, and
Braking Torque over 20% for 2.2 kW and above motors <4> (overexcitation braking/High Slip Braking: approx. 40%)
• Continuous regenerative torque: approx. 20% <4> (approx. 125% with dynamic braking resistor
option <2> : 10% ED, 10s)
Models 2A0004 to 2A0138, 4A0002 to 4A0072, and 5A0003 to 5A0052 have a built-in braking
Braking Transistor transistor.
V/f Characteristics User-selected programs and V/f preset patterns possible
Droop Control, Feed Forward Control, Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru, Speed Search, Overtorque/
Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, 17 Step Speed (max), Accel/decel Switch, S-curve Accel/decel,
3-wire Sequence, Auto-tuning (rotational, stationary tuning), Dwell, Cooling Fan on/off Switch, Slip
Compensation, Torque Compensation, Frequency Jump, Upper/lower Limits for Frequency Reference,
Main Control Functions DC Injection Braking at Start and Stop, Overexcitation Braking, High Slip Braking, PI Control (with
sleep function), Energy Saving Control, MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. (RS-422/RS-485 max, 115.2
kbps), Fault Restart, Application Presets, Removable Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function,
Online Tuning, KEB, Overexcitation Deceleration, Overvoltage Suppression, High Frequency
Injection, Dynamic Noise Control
Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload relay
Momentary Overcurrent Drive stops when output current exceeds 170% of rated output current
Protection
Overload Protection Drive stops when rated output current is 120% for 60 s <5>
Protection
Functions 200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V
Overvoltage Protection 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V
600 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 1040 V
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190 V
Undervoltage Protection 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380 V
600 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 475 V
Specifications
Item Specification
Momentary Power Loss Immediately stop after 15 ms or longer power loss <6> .
Ride-Thru Continuous operation during power loss than 2 s (standard) <7>
Heatsink Overheat Protection Thermistor
Protection Braking Resistor Overheat Overheat input signal for braking resistor (Optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Functions Protection
Stall Prevention Stall Prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run.
Ground Protection Electronic circuit protection <8>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
Area of Use Indoors
Ambient Temperature -10 to +40 °C (IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure), -10 to +50 °C (IP00/Open Type enclosure)
Humidity 95 RH% or less (no condensation)
Environment Storage Temperature -20 to +60 °C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Altitude Up to 1000 meters without derating, up to 3000 m with output current and voltage derating.
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Vibration/Shock 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2 (2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165, and 5A0003 to 5A0099)
2.0 m/s2 (2A0250 to 2A0415, 4A0208 to 4A0675, and 5A0125 to 5A0242)
UL 508C (Power Conversion), UL/cUL listed, CSA 22.2 No. 14-05 (Industrial Control Equipment),
Safety Standard CE marked, RoHS compliant, EN 61800-5-1 (LVD), EN 61800-3 (EMC), IEC60529
Protection Design IP00/Open Type enclosure, IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure <9>
<1> The accuracy of these values depends on motor characteristics, ambient conditions, and drive settings. Specifications may vary with different motors
and with changing motor temperature. Contact Yaskawa for consultation.
<2> Disable Stall Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 0) when using a regenerative converter, a regenerative unit, a braking resistor or the Braking
Resistor Unit. The default setting for the Stall Prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
<3> Instantaneous average deceleration torque refers to the torque required to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from the load) from the rated motor speed
down to zero in the shortest time.
<4> Actual specifications may vary depending on motor characteristics.
<5> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output frequency is less than 6 Hz.
<6> May be shorter due to load conditions and motor speed.
<7> A separate Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Unit is required for models 2A0004 to 2A0056 and 4A0002 to 4A0031 if the application needs to
continue running for up to 2 seconds during a momentary power loss.
<8> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the drive is powered up while a ground
fault is present at the output.
<9> Removing the top protective cover or bottom conduit bracket from an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure drive voids NEMA Type 1 protection while
maintaining IP20 conformity. This is applicable to models 2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165, and 5A0003 to 5A0242.
A.3 Drive Watt Loss Data

Table A.10 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models
Normal Duty
Drive Model
Rated Amps (A) <1> Heatsink Loss (W) Interior Unit Loss (W) Total Loss (W)
2A0004 3.5 18.4 47 66
2A0006 6.0 31 51 82
2A0008 8.0 43 52 95
2A0010 9.6 57 58 115
2A0012 12.0 77 64 141
2A0018 17.5 101 67 168
2A0021 21 138 83 222
2A0030 30 262 117 379
2A0040 40 293 145 437
2A0056 56 371 175 546
2A0069 69 491 205 696
2A0081 81 527 257 785
2A0110 110 719 286 1005
2A0138 138 842 312 1154
2A0169 169 1014 380 1394
2A0211 211 1218 473 1691
2A0250 250 1764 594 2358
2A0312 312 2020 665 2686
2A0360 360 2698 894 3591
2A0415 415 2672 954 3626
<1> Value assumes the carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz.

Table A.11 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models
Normal Duty
Drive Model
4A0002 2.1 20 48 68
4A0004 4.1 32 49 81
4A0005 5.4 45 53 97
4A0007 6.9 62 59 121
4A0009 8.8 66 60 126
4A0011 11.1 89 73 162
4A0018 17.5 177 108 285
4A0023 23 216 138 354
4A0031 31 295 161 455
4A0038 38 340 182 521
4A0044 44 390 209 599
4A0058 58 471 215 686
4A0072 72 605 265 870
4A0088 88 684 308 993
Specifications
4A0103 103 848 357 1205

4A0139 139 1215 534 1749
4A0165 165 1557 668 2224
4A0208 208 1800 607 2408
4A0250 250 2379 803 3182
A
4A0296 296 2448 905 3353
4A0362 362 3168 1130 4298
Normal Duty
Drive Model
4A0414 414 3443 1295 4738
4A0515 515 4850 1668 6518
4A0675 675 4861 2037 6898

Table A.12 Watt Loss Three-Phase 600 V Class Three-Phase Models
Normal Duty
Drive Model
5A0003 2.7 21.5 23.3 44.8
5A0004 3.9 27.5 33.6 61.1
5A0006 6.1 28.1 43.7 71.8
5A0009 9.0 43.4 68.9 112.3
5A0011 11 56.1 88.0 144.0
5A0017 17 96.6 146.7 243.2
5A0022 22 99.4 178.3 277.7
5A0027 27 132.1 227.2 359.3
5A0032 32 141.6 279.9 421.5
5A0041 41 330.8 136.2 467.0
5A0052 52 427.8 166.2 594.0
5A0062 62 791.2 279.0 1070.2
5A0077 77 959.1 329.4 1288.6
5A0099 99 1253.2 411.7 1664.9
5A0125 125 1641 537 2178
5A0145 145 1860 603 2463
5A0192 192 2420 769 3189
5A0242 242 3100 1131 4231
Appendix: B
Parameter List
This appendix contains a full listing of all parameters and settings available in the drive.
B.1 A: INITIALIZATION PARAMETERS....................................................................178

B.2 B: APPLICATION.................................................................................................179
B.3 C: TUNING............................................................................................................185
B.4 D: REFERENCES.................................................................................................187
B.5 E: MOTOR PARAMETERS..................................................................................190
B.6 H PARAMETERS: MULTI-FUNCTION TERMINALS..........................................196
B.7 L: PROTECTION FUNCTION...............................................................................205
B.8 N: SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT................................................................................212
B.9 O: OPERATOR-RELATED SETTINGS................................................................213
B.10 S: SPECIAL APPLICATION.................................................................................216
B.11 T: MOTOR TUNING..............................................................................................221
B.12 U: MONITORS......................................................................................................222
B.1 A: Initialization Parameters
B.1 A: Initialization Parameters

Table B.1 Icons Used in Parameter Descriptions
Icon Description
Parameter can be changed during run.
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level, Motor
Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.
u A1: Initialization
No.
(Addr. Name Description Values Page
Hex)
0: English
1: Japanese
A1-00 2: German
(100) 3: French Default: 0
Language Selection –
4: Italian Range: 0 to 7
<1> 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
7: Chinese
A1-01 0: View and set A1-01 and A1-04. Uo-oo parameters can also be viewed.
(101) 1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 Default: 2
Access Level Selection to A2-32) –
Range: 0 to 2
<2> 2: Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters)
0: No initialization
1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03)
2220: 2-Wire initialization
A1-03 3330: 3-Wire initialization Default: 0
Initialize Parameters 5550: oPE04 error reset Range: 0 to 5550; 85
(103)
8008 Pump 8008 to 8011
8009: Pump w/ PI
8010: Fan
8011: Fan w/ PI
When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into A1-05, Default: 0000
A1-04 Password parameters A1-01 through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-33 cannot be Min.: 0000 –
(104) changed. Max.: 9999
When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into A1-05, Default: 0000
A1-05 Password Setting parameters A1-01 through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-33 cannot be Min.: 0000 –
(105) changed. Max.: 9999
0: General-purpose
8: Pump
A1-06 9: Pump w/PI Default: 0
(127) Application Preset 10: Fan Range: 0; 8 to 11 –
11: Fan w/PI
Note: This parameter is not settable. It is used as a monitor only.
<1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized.
<2> Default setting value is dependent on the Initialization parameter A1-03.
u A2: User Parameters

No.
Hex)
A2-01 to Recently edited parameters are listed here. The user can also select parameters
A2-32 to appear here for quicker access. Default: <1>
(106 to User Parameters 1 to 32 Range: b1-01 to –
125) S6-07
0: Parameters A2-01 to A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User
A2-33 User Parameter Automatic Parameters. Default: 0
(126) Selection 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will Range: 0, 1 –
be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quicker access.
<1> Default setting value is dependent on the Initialization parameter A1-03.
B.2 b: Application
B.2 b: Application
Application parameters configure the source of the Run command, DC Injection Braking, Speed Search, timer functions, PID
control, the Dwell function, Energy Savings, and a variety of other application-related settings.
u b1: Operation Mode Selection

No.
Hex)
0: Digital operator
1: Analog input terminals
b1-01 Frequency Reference Default: 1
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 86
(180) Selection 1 Range: 0 to 4
3: Option PCB
4: Pulse input (terminal RP)
0: Digital operator
b1-02 Run Command 1: Digital input terminals Default: 1 87
(181) Selection 1 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications Range: 0 to 3
3: Option PCB
0: Ramp to stop
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 1: Coast to stop Default: 0 88
(182) 2: DC Injection Braking to stop Range: 0 to 3
3: Coast with timer
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 1: Reverse
0: enabled. Default: 0 –
(183) Reverse disabled. Range: 0, 1
0: An external Run command must be cycled at the new source in order to be
b1-07 LOCAL/REMOTE Run Default: 0
activated. –
(186) Selection Range: 0, 1
1: An external Run command at the new source is accepted immediately.
Run Command Selection in 1: Run

0: command is not accepted while in Programming Mode.
b1-08 Default: 0
Run command is accepted while in Programming Mode. –
(187) Programming Mode Range: 0 to 2
2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during run.
After a Run command is entered, the drive output waits until this delay time Default:
Run Delay Time Setting 0s
b1-11 Min.: 0 –
(1DF) Run Delay Time has passed before starting. Max.: 600
b1-14 0: Standard Default: 0
Phase Order Selection –
(1C3) 1: Switch phase order (reverses the direction of the motor) Range: 0, 1
Enabled when an input terminal set for “External reference” (H1-oo = 2)
closes.
b1-15 Frequency Reference 0: Digital operator Default: 0
1: Terminals (analog input terminals) –
(1C4) Selection 2 Range: 0 to 4
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
Enabled when a terminal set for “External reference” (H1-oo = 2) closes.
b1-16 Run Command 0: Digital operator Default: 0
1: Digital input terminals –
(1C5) Selection 2 Range: 0 to 3
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Option card
0: Disregarded. A new Run command must be issued after power up.
b1-17 Default: 0
Run Command at Power Up 1: Allowed. Motor will start immediately after power up if a Run command –
(1C6) Range: 0, 1
is already enabled.
u b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking

No.
Hex)
Sets the frequency at which DC Injection Braking starts when “Ramp to stop” Default: 0.5 Hz
b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start(b1-03 = 0) is selected. Min.: 0.0 90
Parameter List
(189) Frequency Max.: 10.0

Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. Default: 50%
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Min.: 0 –
(18A) Current Max.: 100
DC Injection Braking Time Sets DC Injection Braking time at start. Disabled when set to 0.00 seconds. Default: 0.00 s
b2-03 Min.: 0.00 –
(18B) at Start Max.: 10.00 B
B.2 b: Application
No.
Hex)
DC Injection Braking Time Sets DC Injection Braking time at stop. Default: 0.50 s
b2-04 Min.: 0.00 –
(18C) at Stop Max.: 10.00
u b3: Speed Search

No.
(Addr Name Description Values Page
Hex.)
b3-01 Speed Search Selection at 0: Disabled Default: 0 90
(191) Start 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
Sets the current level at which the speed is assumed to be detected and Speed Default: 120%
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Search is ended. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. Min.: 0 –
(192) Current Max.: 200
Sets output frequency reduction time during Speed Search. Default: 2.0 s
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Min.: 0.1 –
(193) Time Max.: 10.0
Determines how much to lower the V/f ratio during Speed Search. Default: <1>
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed Output voltage during Speed Search equals the V/f setting multiplied by b3-04. Min.: 10% –
(194) Search
Max.: 100%
When using an external contactor on the output side, b3-05 delays executing Default: 0.2 s
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time Speed Search after a momentary power loss to allow time for the contactor to Min.: 0.0 –
(195)
close. Max.: 100.0
Sets the current injected to the motor at the beginning of Speed Estimation Default: <1>
b3-06 Output Current 1 during Speed Search. Set as a coefficient for the motor rated current. –
(196) Speed Search Min.: 0.0
Max.: 2.0
Output Current 2 during Sets the amount of output current during Speed Estimation Speed Search as a Default: <1>
b3-07 coefficient for the no-load current.
Speed Search (Speed Min.: 0.0 –
(197) Estimation Type) Max.: 5.0
Current Control Gain during Sets the proportional gain for the current controller during Speed Search. Default: 0.8
b3-08 Speed Search (Speed Min.: 0.00 –
(198) Estimation Type) Max.: 6.00
Sets the gain which is applied to the speed detected by Speed Estimation Speed Default: 1.05
b3-10 Speed Search Detection Search before the motor is reaccelerated. Increase this setting if ov occurs Min.: 1.00 –
(19A) Compensation Gain when performing Speed Search after a relatively long period of baseblock. Max.: 1.20
Sets the minimum current detection level during Speed Search. Default: 6.0
b3-12 Minimum Current Detection Min.: 2.0 –
(19C) Level during Speed Search Max.: 10.0
b3-14 Bi-Directional Speed Search 0: Disabled (uses the direction of the frequency reference) Default: 1 –
(19E) Selection 1: Enabled (drive detects which way the motor is rotating) Range: 0, 1
Sets the Speed Search restart current level as a percentage of the drive rated Default: 150%
b3-17 Speed Search Restart current. Min.: 0 –
(1F0) Current Level Max.: 200
Sets the time to detect Speed Search restart. Default: 0.10 s
b3-18 Speed Search Restart Min.: 0.00 –
(1F1) Detection Time Max.: 1.00
Sets the number of times the drive can attempt to restart when performing Default: 3
b3-19 Number of Speed Search Speed Search. Min.: 0 –
(1F2) Restarts Max.: 10
b3-24 Speed Search Method 0: Current Detection Default: 0 –
(1C0) Selection 1: Speed Estimation Range: 0, 1
Sets the time the drive must wait between each Speed Search restart attempt. Default: 0.5 s
b3-25 Speed Search Wait Time Min.: 0.0 –
(1C8) Max.: 30.0
Sets the level that determines the direction of motor rotation. Default: <1>
b3-26 Direction Determining –
(1C7) Level Min.: 40
Max.: 60000
Selects a condition to activate Speed Search Selection at Start (b3-01) or
b3-27 External Speed Search Command 1 or 2 from the multi-function input. Default: 0
Start Speed Search Select –
(1C9) 0: Triggered when a Run command is issued (normal). Range: 0, 1
1: Triggered when an external baseblock is released.
<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.
B.2 b: Application
u b4: Timer Function

No.
Hex)
Sets the on-delay and off-delay times for a digital timer output Default: 0.0 s
b4-01 Timer Function On-Delay Min.: 0.0 –
(1A3) Time (H2-oo=12).
The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to Max.: 3000.0
H1-oo=18). Default: 0.0 s
b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Min.: 0.0 –
(1A4) Time Max.: 3000.0
u b5: PID Control

No.
Hex)
0: Disabled
b5-01 Default: 0
PID Function Setting 1: Enabled (PID output becomes output frequency reference, deviation D –
(1A5) Range: 0, 1
controlled)
b5-02 Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller. Default: 1.00
(1A6) Proportional Gain Setting Min.: 0.00 –
(P) Max.: 25.00
b5-03 Sets the integral time for the PID controller. Default: 1.0 s
(1A7) Integral Time Setting (I) Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 360.0
b5-04 Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator as a percentage of the Default: 100.0%
(1A8) Integral Limit Setting maximum output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 100.0
b5-05 Sets D control derivative time. Default: 0.00 s
(1A9) Derivative Time (D) Min.: 0.00 –
Max.: 10.00
b5-06 Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller as a Default: 100.0%
(1AA) PID Output Limit percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 100.0
b5-07 Applies an offset to the PID controller output. Set as a percentage of the Default: 0.0%
(1AB) PID Offset Adjustment maximum output frequency. Min.: -100.0 –
Max.: 100.0
b5-08 Default: 0.00 s
(1AC) PID Primary Delay Time Sets a low pass filter time constant on the output of the PID controller. Min.: 0.00 –
Constant Max.: 10.00
b5-09 PID Output Level Selection 0: Normal output (direct acting) Default: 0 –
(1AD) 1: Reverse output (reverse acting) Range: 0, 1
b5-10 Sets the gain applied to the PID output. Default: 1.00
(1AE) PID Output Gain Setting Min.: 0.00 –
Max.: 25.00
0: Negative PID output triggers zero limit.
b5-11 PID Output Reverse 1: Rotation direction reverses with negative PID output. Default: 0 –
(1AF) Selection Note: When using setting 1, make sure reverse operation is permitted Range: 0, 1
by b1-04.
0: No fault. Digital output only.
1: Fault detection. Alarm output, drive continues operation.
2: Fault detection. Fault output, drive output is shut off.
3: No fault. Digital output only. No fault detection when PID control is
b5-12 PID Feedback Loss Default: 0
disabled. –
Parameter List
(1B0) Detection Selection Range: 0 to 5

4: Fault detection. Alarm is triggered and drive continues to run. Fault
detection even when PID is disabled.
5: Fault detection. Drive output shuts off. No fault detection when PID control
is disabled.
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage of the maximum Default: 0%
b5-13 PID Feedback Loss output frequency. Min.: 0 –
(1B1) Detection Level Max.: 100 B
B.2 b: Application
No.
Hex)
Sets a delay time for PID feedback loss. Default: 1.0 s
b5-14 PID Feedback Loss Min.: 0.0 –
(1B2) Detection Time Max.: 25.5
Sets the frequency level that triggers the sleep function. Default: 0.0 Hz
b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start Min.: 0.0 –
(1B3) Level Max.: 400.0
Sets a delay time before the sleep function is triggered. Default: 0.0 s
b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time Min.: 0.0 –
(1B4) Max.: 25.5
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time to PID setpoint. Default: 0.0 s
b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time Min.: 0.0 –
(1B5) Max.: 6000.0
b5-18 0: Disabled Default: 0
PID Setpoint Selection –
(1DC) 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
b5-19 Sets the PID target value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency Default: 0.00%
(1DD) PID Setpoint Value when b5-18 is set to 1. Min.: 0.00 –
<1> Note: Values set above b5-38 will be internally limited to b5-38 Max.: 600.00
0: 0.01 Hz units
b5-20 PID Setpoint Scaling 1: 0.01% units (100% = max output frequency) Default: 1
PID Disp Scaling –
(1E2) 2: RPM (number of motor poles must entered) Range: 0 to 3
3: User-set (set scaling to b5-38 and b5-39, units based on b5-46 setting)
b5-34 Sets the minimum output possible from the PID controller as a percentage of Default: 0.00%
(19F) PID Output Lower Limit the maximum output frequency. Min.: -100.00 –
Max.: 100.00
b5-35 Limits the PID control input (deviation signal) as a percentage of the maximum Default: 1000.0%
(1A0) PID Input Limit output frequency. Acts as a bipolar limit. Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 1000.0
Sets the PID feedback high detection level as a percentage of the maximum Default: 100%
b5-36 PID Feedback High output frequency. Min.: 0 –
(1A1) Detection Level Max.: 100
Sets the PID feedback high level detection delay time. Default: 1.0 s
b5-37 PID Feedback High Min.: 0.0 –
(1A2) Detection Time Max.: 25.5
PID Setpoint User Display Scales the PID units to the maximum output frequency. Default: 10000
b5-38 Min.: 1 –
(1FE) PID UsrDspMaxVal
Max.: 60000
0: No decimal places
b5-39 PID Setpoint Display Digits 1: One decimal place Default: 2
PID UsrDspDigits –
(1FF) 2: Two decimal places Range: 0 to 3
3: Three decimal places
0: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) after PID compensation has been
b5-40 Frequency Reference added. Default: 0
(17F) Monitor Content during PID 1: Display the frequency reference (U1-01) before PID compensation has been –
Range: 0, 1
added.
0: WC 0: WC (Inch of water)
1: PSI 1: PSI (Pounds per square inch)
2: GPM 2: GPM (Gallons per minute)
3: F 3: °F (Degrees Fahrenheit)
4: CFM 4: CFM (Cubic feet per minute)
5: CMH 5: CMH (Cubic meters per hour)
6: LPH 6: LPH (Liters per hour)
7: LPS (Liters per second)
b5-41 PI Output 2 Unit Selection 8: Bar 7: LPS(Bar) Default: 0
PI Out2 Unit Sel 8: Bar –
(160) Range: 0 to 15; 25
9: Pa 9: Pa (Pascal)
10: C 10: °C (Degrees Celsius)
11: Mtr 11: Mtr (Meters)
12: Ft 12: Ft (Feet)
13: LPM 13: LPM (Liters per minute)
14: CMM 14: CMM (Cubic meters per minute)
15: “Hg 15: Hg(Inches of Mercury)
25: None25: None
B.2 b: Application
No.
Hex)
0: Linear - the monitor displays PID output 0: Linear
b5-42 PI Output 2 Calculation 1: Square root - the monitor displays square root PID output 1: Square root
(161) Mode 2: Quadratic - the monitor displays 1/(PID output) 2: 1/f2 Default: 0 –
PI Out2 Calc Mode 3: Cubic - the monitor displays 1/(PID output) 3: 1/f3 Range: 0 to 3
Note: Used for U5-14 and U5-15 only.

Sets the upper 4 digits of the maximum monitor value.
b5-43 PI Output 2 Monitor Max Used with b5-44 to set maximum monitor value of U5-14 and U5-15 at Default: 0
(162) Upper 4 Digits maximum frequency. Min.: 0 –
PI Out2 MonMax U Max.: 9999
Sets the lower 4 digits of the maximum monitor value.
b5-44 PI Output 2 Monitor Max Used with b5-43 to set maximum monitor value of U5-14 and U5-15 at Default: 0
(163) Lower 4 Digits maximum frequency. Min.: 0 –
PI Out2 MonMax L Max.: 99.99
b5-45 PI Output 2 Monitor Sets the minimum display value at zero speed. Default: 0
(164) Minimum This function is effective when b5-42 is set to 0 (Linear output mode). Min.: 0 –
PI Out2 MonMin Max.: 999.9
Sets the display units for parameter b5-19, and monitors U5-01, U5-04 and
U5-99
b5-46 PID Units Selection 7: LPS 7: LPS (Liters per second) Default: 0
PID Unit Sel –
(165) 8: Bar 8: Bar (Bar) Range: 0 to 15; 25
15: “Hg 15: Hg(Inches of Mercury)
25: None25: None
Reverse Operation Selection 0: Zero limit when PID output is a negative value.
b5-47 2 by PID Output 1: Reverse operation when PID output is a negative value Default: 1 –
(17D) Output Rev Sel2 (Zero limit if the reverse operation is prohibited by b1-04). Range: 0, 1
b5-89 Determines how the drive sleeps and wakes-up when using PID.
(B89) Sleep Method Selection 0: Standard Default: 0
Sleep Method Sel –
1: EZ Sleep/Wake-up Range: 0, 1
b5-90 Sets the unit, range, and resolution of parameters b5-91 and b5-92.
(B90) EZ Sleep Unit Default: 0
EZ Sleep Unit 0: Hz –
<1> Range: 0, 1
1: RPM (number of motor poles must be entered)
Sets the PID minimum speed and integral lower limit. Default: 0.0 Hz
b5-91 The internal value is lower limited to the higher setting between b5-34 and Range: 0.0 to
(B91) EZ Minimum Speed d2-02. 400.0 Hz
EZ Min Speed –
<1> or 0 to 24000 RPM
<2>
The drive will go to sleep when the drive output frequency (or speed) is at or Default: 0.0 Hz
b5-92 below this level for the time set in b5-93. Range: 0.0 to
(B92) EZ Sleep Level This parameter is internally lower limited to b5-91 (EZ Min Speed) + 1Hz. 400.0 Hz
EZ Sleep Level –
<1> or 0 to 24000 RPM
<2>
Parameter List
b5-93 The drive will go to sleep when the drive output frequency is at or below the Default: 5.0 s
(B93) EZ Sleep Time level set to b5-92 for the time set in this parameter.
EZ Sleep Time Min.: 0.0 –
<1> Max.: 1000.0
B.2 b: Application
No.
Hex)
When b5-95 is set to 0 (Absolute), the drive wakes-up when the PID Feedback
(H3-oo = 20) drops below this level for the time set in b5-96.
b5-94 For reverse-acting, the PID Feedback must be above this level for the time set
(B94) EZ Wake-up Level in b5-96. Default: 0.00%
EZ Wake-up Lvl When b5-95 is set to 1 (Setpoint Delta), the drive wakes-up when the PID Min.: 0.00 –
<1>
Feedback (H3-oo = 20) drops below the PID Setpoint minus this level (for Max.: 600.00
normal acting PID) for the time set in b5-96.
For reverse-acting, Wake-up level is PID Setpoint plus this level. The PID
Feedback must be above the wake-up level for the time set in b5-96.
b5-95 Sets how the wake-up level is determined.
(B95) EZ Wake-up Mode Default: 0
EZ Wake-up Mode 0: Absolute –
<1> Range: 0, 1
1: Setpoint Delta
b5-96 The drive will wake up when the PID Feedback drops below the b5-94, EZ
(B96) EZ Wake-up Time Wake-up Level for the time set in this parameter. Default: 1.0 s
EZ Wake-up Time Min.: 0.0 –
<1>
Max.: 1000.0
<1> Unit and resolution are determined by b5-20, b5-39 and b5-46. Internally limited to b5-38. Changing b5-20, b5-38 and b5-39 will not automatically
update the value of this parameter.
<2> Parameter is only effective when EZ Sleep is enabled by setting b5-89 to 1.
<3> Unit, range and resolution is determined by b5-90. Changing b5-90 will not automatically update the value of this parameter.
u b6: Dwell Function

No.
Hex)
Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the frequency to hold and the time to maintain Default: 0.0 Hz
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start that frequency at start. Min.: 0.0 –
(1B6) Max.: 400.0
Default: 0.0 s
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start Min.: 0.0 –
(1B7) Max.: 10.0
Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the frequency to hold and the time to maintain Default: 0.0 Hz
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop that frequency at stop. Min.: 0.0 –
(1B8) Max.: 400.0
Default: 0.0 s
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop Min.: 0.0 –
(1B9) Max.: 10.0
u b8: Energy Saving

No.
Hex)
b8-01 Energy Saving Control 0: Disabled Default: 0 –
(1CC) Selection 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
Determines the level of maximum motor efficiency. Setting range is 0.0 to Default: <1> <2>
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient 2000.0 for drives 3.7 kW and smaller. The display resolution depends on the –
(1CF) Value Min.: 0.00
rated output power of the drive. Max.: 655.00
Sets a time constant filter for output power detection. Default: 20 ms
b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time Min.: 0 –
(1D0) Max.: 2000
Sets the limit for the voltage search operation as a percentage of the motor Default: 0%
b8-06 Search Operation Voltage rated voltage. Min.: 0 –
(1D1) Limit Max.: 100
<2> Parameter value changes automatically if E2-11 is manually changed or changed by Auto-Tuning.
B.3 C: Tuning
B.3 C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration times, S-curves, torque compensation, and carrier frequency
selections.
u C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times

No.
Hex)
C1-01 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.
(200) Acceleration Time 1 93
Default: 10.0 s
Min.: 0.0
C1-02 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0. Max.: 6000.0 <1>
(201) Deceleration Time 1 93
C1-03 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.

(202) Acceleration Time 2 93
Default: 10.0 s
Min.: 0.0
C1-04 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0. Max.: 6000.0 <1>
(203) Deceleration Time 2 93
C1-09 Sets the time for the Fast Stop function. Default: 10.0 s
(208) Fast Stop Time Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 6000.0 <1>
C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting 0: 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s) Default: 1 –
(209) Units 1: 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s) Range: 0, 1
Sets the frequency to switch between accel/decel time settings Default: 0.0 Hz
C1-11 Accel/Decel Time Min.: 0.0 –
(20A) Switching Frequency Max.: 400.0
<1> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Time Setting Units. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting range
becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
u C2: S-Curve Characteristics

No.
Hex)
The S-curve can be controlled at the four points shown below. Default: 0.20 s
C2-01 S-Curve Characteristic at
(20B) Accel Start Min.: 0.00 –
Run Command
ON OFF Max.: 10.00
Output Frequency Default: 0.20 s
C2-02 S-Curve Characteristic at C2-02 C2-03 Min.: 0.00 –
(20C) Accel End
C2-01 C2-04
Max.: 10.00
Default: 0.20 s
C2-03 S-Curve Characteristic at Time Min.: 0.00 –
(20D) Decel Start Max.: 10.00
Default: 0.00 s
C2-04 S-Curve Characteristic at Min.: 0.00 –
(20E) Decel End Max.: 10.00
Parameter List
B.3 C: Tuning
u C3: Slip Compensation

No.
Hex)
C3-01 Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function used for motor 1. Default: 0.0
(20F) Slip Compensation Gain Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 2.5
C3-02 Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time used for motor 1. Default: 2000 ms
(210) Slip Compensation Primary Min.: 0 –
Delay Time Max.: 10000
Sets an upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of motor Default: 200%
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit rated slip for motor 1 (E2-02). Min.: 0 –
(211) Max.: 250
Slip Compensation 0: Disabled.
C3-04 Default: 0
Selection during 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. –
(212) Range: 0 to 2
Regeneration 2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible.
u C4: Torque Compensation

No.
Hex)
C4-01 Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function and helps to Default: 1.00
(215) Torque Compensation Gain produce better starting torque. Used for motor 1. Min.: 0.00 –
Max.: 2.50
C4-02 Sets the torque compensation filter time. Default: 200 ms
(216) Torque Compensation Min.: 0 ms –
Primary Delay Time 1 Max.: 60000 ms
u C6: Carrier Frequency

No.
Hex)
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz (4.0 kHz)
3: 8.0 kHz (6.0 kHz)
4: 10.0 kHz (8.0 kHz)
5: 12.5 kHz (10.0 kHz) Default: 7
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 6: 15.0 kHz (12.0 kHz) Range: 1 to 9; 94
(224) 7: Swing PWM1 (Audible sound 1) A, F
8: Swing PWM2 (Audible sound 2)
9: Swing PWM3 (Audible sound 3)
A: Swing PWM4 (Audible sound 4)
B to E: No setting possible
F: User-defined (determined by C6-03 through C6-05)
Determines the upper and lower limits for the carrier frequency. Default: <1>
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper –
(225) Limit Min.: 1.0 kHz
Carrier Frequency
Max.: 15.0 kHz
C6-03 Default:
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower <1>
–
(226) Limit C6-04 Output Frequency Min.: 1.0 kHz
× (C6-05) × K Max.: 15.0 kHz
Output
E1-04 Frequency Default:
C6-05 Carrier Frequency Max Output <1>
–
(227) Proportional Gain Frequency Min.: 0
Max.: 99
<1> Default setting value is dependent on parameter C6-02, Carrier Frequency Selection.
B.4 d: References
B.4 d: References
Reference parameters set the various frequency reference values during operation.
u d1: Frequency Reference

No.
Hex)
d1-01 Sets the frequency reference for the drive. Setting units are determined by Default: 0.00 Hz
(280) Frequency Reference 1 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
(28B) Frequency Reference 10 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
(28C) Frequency Reference 11 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
(28D) Frequency Reference 12 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
(28E) Frequency Reference 13 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
(28F) Frequency Reference 14 parameter o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
Parameter List

Max.: 400.00 <1>
Max.: 400.00 <1>
B
B.4 d: References
No.
Hex)
d1-17 Sets the Jog frequency reference. Setting units are determined by parameter Default: 6.00 Hz
(292) Jog Frequency Reference o1-03. Min.: 0.00 94
Max.: 400.00 <1>
<1> Range upper limit is determined by parameters d2-01, Frequency Reference Upper Limit, and E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency.
u d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits

No.
(Addr. Name Description Setting Page
Hex.)
Frequency Reference Upper Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the maximum Default: 100.0%
d2-01 output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
(289) Limit Max.: 110.0
Frequency Reference Lower Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum Default: 0.0%
d2-02 output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
(28A) Limit Max.: 110.0
Sets the lower limit for frequency references from analog inputs as a Default: 0.0%
d2-03 Master Speed Reference percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
(293) Lower Limit Max.: 110.0
u d3: Jump Frequency

No.
Hex)
Eliminates problems with resonant vibration of the motor/machine by
avoiding continuous operation in predefined frequency ranges. The drive Default: 0.0 Hz
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 accelerates and decelerates the motor through the prohibited frequency ranges. Min.: 0.0 –
(294) Setting 0.0 disables this function. Max.: 400.0
Parameters must be set so that d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03.
Sets the dead-band width around each selected prohibited frequency reference Default: 1.0 Hz
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width point. Min.: 0.0 –
(297) Max.: 20.0
u d4: Frequency Reference Hold and Up/Down 2 Function

No.
Hex)
0: Disabled. Drive starts from zero when the power is switched on.
d4-01 Frequency Reference Hold 1: Enabled. At power up, the drive starts the motor at the Hold frequency that Default: 0 –
(298) Function Selection Range: 0, 1
was saved.
d4-03 Sets the bias added to the frequency reference when the Up 2 and Down 2 Default: 0.00 Hz
(2AA) Frequency Reference Bias digital inputs are enabled (H1-oo = 75, 76). Min.: 0.00 –
Step (Up/Down 2) Max.: 99.99
0: Use selected accel/decel time.
d4-04 1: Use accel/decel time 4 (C1-07 and C1-08).
(2AB) Frequency Reference Bias Default: 0 –
Accel/Decel (Up/Down 2) Note: The functionality of setting 1 is only accessible via Range: 0, 1
MEMOBUS/Modbus communication.
B.4 d: References
No.
Hex)
d4-05 0: Bias value is held if no input Up 2 or Down 2 is active.
Frequency Reference Bias
(2AC) 1: When the Up 2 reference and Down 2 reference are both on or both off, the Default: 0
Operation Mode Selection applied bias becomes 0. The specified accel/decel times are used for Range: 0, 1 –
(Up/Down 2) acceleration or deceleration.
The Up/Down 2 bias value is saved in d4-06 when the frequency reference is Default: 0.0%
d4-06 Frequency Reference Bias not input by the digital operator. Set as a percentage of the maximum output Min.: -99.9 –
(2AD) (Up/Down 2) frequency. Max.: 100.0
Limits how much the frequency reference is allowed to change while an input
d4-07 Analog Frequency terminal set for Up 2 or Down 2 is enabled. If the frequency reference changes Default: 0.01%
(2AE) Reference Fluctuation Limit for more than the set value, then the bias value is held and the drive accelerates Min.: 0.01 –
(Up/Down 2) or decelerates to the frequency reference. Set as a percentage of the maximum Max.: 100.0
output frequency.
d4-08 Sets the upper limit for the bias and the value that can be saved in d4-06. Set Default: 1.0%
(2AF) Frequency Reference Bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min.: 0.0 –
Upper Limit (Up/Down 2) Max.: 100.0
d4-09 Sets the lower limit for the bias and the value that can be saved in d4-06. Set Default: 0.0%
(2B0) Frequency Reference Bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min.: -99.9 –
Lower Limit (Up/Down 2) Max.: 0.0
d4-10 Up/Down Frequency 0: The lower limit is determined by d2-02 or an analog input. Default: 0 –
(2B6) Reference Limit Selection 1: The lower limit is determined by d2-02. Range: 0, 1
u d6: Field Weakening and Field Forcing

No.
(Addr Name Description Values Page
Hex.)
Sets the drive output voltage for the Field Weakening function as a percentage
of the maximum output voltage. Default: 80%
d6-01 Field Weakening Level Min.: 0 –
(2A0) Enabled when a multi-function input is set for Field Weakening (H1-oo = Max.: 100
63).
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range where Field Weakening control is
d6-02 Field Weakening Frequency valid. Default: 0.0 Hz
The Field Weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting Min.: 0.0 –
(2A1) Limit
and only when the output frequency matches the frequency reference (speed Max.: 400.0
agree).
Parameter List
B.5 E: Motor Parameters

u E1: V/f Pattern
No.
Hex)
This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Drive input voltage (not motor Default: 230 V <1>
E1-01
(300) Input Voltage Setting voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the drive to Min.: 155 96
function properly. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage Max.: 255 <1>
and/or death or personal injury.
0: 50 Hz, Constant torque 1

1: 60 Hz, Constant torque 2
2: 60 Hz, Constant torque 3 (50 Hz base)
3: 72 Hz, Constant torque 4 (60 Hz base)
4: 50 Hz, Variable torque 1
E1-03 7: 60 Hz, Variable torque 4 Default: F <2>
V/f Pattern Selection Range: 0 to 9; 97
(302) 8: 50 Hz, High starting torque 1
9: 50 Hz, High starting torque 2 A to FF
A: 60 Hz, High starting torque 3
B: 60 Hz, High starting torque 4
C: 90 Hz (60 Hz base)
D: 120 Hz (60 Hz base)
E: 180 Hz (60 Hz base)
F: Custom V/f, E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the V/f pattern
These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. Default: 60.0 Hz
E1-04 Maximum Output To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. Min.: 40.0 100
(303) Frequency In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the four Max.: 400.0
frequencies are set according to these rules:
E1-05 E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04 Default: 575 V <1>
Maximum Voltage Min.: 0.0 100
(304) Output Voltage (V)
Max.: 255.0
E1-05
E1-12 Default: 60.0 Hz
E1-06 Base Frequency Min.: 0.0 100
(305)
E1-13 Max.: E1-04
Default: 3.0 Hz
E1-07 Middle Output Frequency Min.: 0.0 100
(306) Max.: E1-04
E1-08
E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Default: 15.0 V <1>
Min.: 0.0 V 100
(307) Voltage
Max.: 255.0 V
E1-10
Default: 1.5 Hz
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04 Min.: 0.0 100
(308)
Frequency (Hz) Max.: E1-04
E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Default: 9.0 V <1>

Min.: 0.0 V 100
(309) Voltage
Max.: 255.0 V
E1-11 Default: 0.0 Hz
(30A) Middle Output Frequency 2 Min.: 0.0 100
<4> Max.: E1-04
E1-12 Default: 0.0 V
(30B) Middle Output Frequency Min.: 0.0 100
<4> Voltage 2
Max.: 255.0 V <1>
Default: 0.0 V <3>
E1-13 Base Voltage Min.: 0.0 100
(30C)
Max.: 255.0 V <1>
<3> When Auto-Tuning is performed, E1-13 and E1-05 will be set to the same value.
<4> Parameter ignored when E1-11 (Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency 2) and E1-12 (Motor 1 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 2) are set to 0.0.
u E2: Motor 1 Parameters

No.
Hex)
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amps. Automatically set during Default: <1>
Auto-Tuning. Min.: 10% of drive
E2-01 rated current
Motor Rated Current Max.: 200% of 100
(30E)
drive rated current
<2>
Sets the motor rated slip. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Default: <1>
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Min.: 0.00 Hz –
(30F)
Max.: 20.00 Hz
Sets the no-load current for the motor. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Default: <1>
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current Min.: 0 A –
(310)
Max.: E2-01 <2>
Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Default: 4
E2-04 Number of Motor Poles Min.: 2 –
(311) Max.: 48
Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance. Automatically set during Default: <1>
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Auto-Tuning. –
(312) Resistance Min.: 0.000 Ω
Max.: 65.000 Ω
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor Default: <1>
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min.: 0.0% –
(313)
Max.: 40.0%
Sets the motor iron loss. Default: <1>
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque –
(317) Compensation Min.: 0 W
Max.: 65535 W
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (1 HP = 0.746 kW). Automatically set Default: <1>
E2-11 during Auto-Tuning.
Motor Rated Power Min.: 0.00 kW –
(318)
Max.: 650.00 kW
<2> The number of decimal places in the parameter value depends on the drive model 1. This value has two decimal places (0.01 A) if the drive is set
for a maximum applicable motor capacity up to and including 11 kW, and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the maximum applicable motor capacity is
higher than 11 kW.
u F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3)

No.
Hex)
Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the
F4-01 Terminal V1 Monitor Default: 102 –
(391) Selection last three digits of the desired Uo-oo monitor. Some U parameters are Range: 000 to 999
available only in certain control modes.
F4-02 Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1. Default: 100.0%
(392) Terminal V1 Monitor Gain Min.: -999.9 –
Max.: 999.9
Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V2. Set this parameter to the
F4-03 Terminal V2 Monitor Default: 103 –
(393) Selection last three digits of the desired Uo-oo monitor. Some U parameters are Range: 000 to 999
available only in certain control modes.
F4-04 Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2. Default: 50.0%
(394) Terminal V2 Monitor Gain Min.: -999.9 –
Max.: 999.9
F4-05 Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1. Default: 0.0%
(395) Terminal V1 Monitor Bias Min.: -999.9 –
Parameter List
Max.: 999.9
F4-06 Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2. Default: 0.0%
(396) Terminal V2 Monitor Bias Min.: -999.9 –
Max.: 999.9
F4-07 0: 0 to 10 V Default: 0
(397) Terminal V1 Signal Level 1: -10 to 10 V Range: 0, 1 – B
No.
Hex)
F4-08 0: 0 to 10 V Default: 0
Terminal V2 Signal Level –
(398) 1: -10 to 10 V Range: 0, 1
u F6, F7: Communication Option Card

Parameters F6-01 through F6-03 and F6-06 through F6-08 are used for CC-Link, CANopen, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS-DP, and
MECHATROLINK-II options. Other parameters in the F6 group are used for communication-protocol-specific settings. F7
parameters are used for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP, and PROFINET options.
No.
Hex)
0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02.
F6-01 Communications Error 1: Coast to stop. Default: 1 –
(3A2) Operation Selection 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09. Range: 0 to 3
3: Alarm only.
F6-02 External Fault from Comm. 0: Always detected. Default: 0 –
(3A3) Option Detection Selection 1: Detection during run only. Range: 0, 1
0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02.
F6-03 External Fault from Comm. 1: Coast to stop. Default: 1 –
(3A4) Option Operation Selection 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09. Range: 0 to 3
3: Alarm only.
Sets the delay time for error detection if a bus error occurs. Default: 2.0 s
F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time Min.: 0.0 –
(3A5) Max.: 5.0
Multi-Step Speed Enable/ 0: Multi-step reference disabled (same as F7)
F6-07 Default: 0
Disable Selection when 1: Multi-step reference enabled (same as V7) –
(3A8) Range: 0, 1
NefRef/ComRef is Selected
F6-08 0: Communication-related parameters (F6-oo) are not reset when the drive
(36A) Reset Communication is initialized using A1-03. Default: 0 –
<1> Parameters 1: Reset all communication-related parameters (F6-oo) when the drive is Range: 0, 1
initialized using A1-03.
Sets the node address if a CC-Link option is installed. Default: 0
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address Min.: 0 –
(3B6) Max.: 64
0: 156 Kbps
1: 625 Kbps
F6-11 CC-Link Communication Default: 0
2: 2.5 Mbps –
(3B7) Speed Range: 0 to 4
3: 5 Mbps
4: 10 Mbps
F6-14 CC-Link bUS Error Auto 0: Disabled Default: 0 –
(3BB) Reset 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
Default: 21
F6-20 MECHATROLINK Station Sets the station address when the MECHATROLINK-II option has been Min.: 20 —
(36B) Address installed. Max.: 3F
F6-21 MECHATROLINK Frame 0: 32 byte Default: 0 —
(36C) Size 1: 17 byte Range: 0, 1
F6-22 MECHATROLINK Link 0: 10 Mbps Default: 0 —
(36D) Speed 1: 4 Mbps Range: 0, 1
Sets the MECHATROLINK-II monitor (E). Default: 0
F6-23 MECHATROLINK Min.: 0 —
(36E) Monitor Selection (E) Max.: FFFF
Sets the MECHATROLINK-II monitor (F). Default: 0
F6-24 MECHATROLINK Min.: 0 —
(36F) Monitor Selection (F) Max.: FFFF
0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate using the deceleration time in C1-02.
F6-25 Operation Selection at 1: Coast to stop Default: 1 —
(3C9) Watchdog Timer Error (E5) 2: Fast stop. Decelerate using the deceleration time in C1-09. Range: 0 to 3
3: Alarm only
Sets the number of option communication errors (bUS). Default: 2
F6-26 MECHATROLINK bUS Min.: 2 —
(3CA) Errors Detected Max.: 10
No.
Hex)
Sets the node address. Default: 0
F6-30 PROFIBUS-DP Node Min.: 0 –
(3CB) Address Max.: 125
F6-31 PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode 0: Resets drive operation with a Clear mode command. Default: 0
(3CC) Selection 1: Maintains the previous operation state when Clear mode command is given. –
Range: 0, 1
F6-32 PROFIBUS-DP Data 0: PPO Type Default: 0 –
(3CD) Format Selection 1: Conventional Range: 0, 1
Sets the node address. Default: 0
F6-35 CANopen Node ID Min.: 0 –
(3D0) Selection Max.: 126
0: Auto-detection
1: 10 kbps
2: 20 kbps
3: 50 kbps
F6-36 CANopen Communication Default: 6
4: 125 kbps –
(3D1) Speed Range: 0 to 8
5: 250 kbps
6: 500 kbps
7: 800 kbps
8: 1 Mbps
Selects the drive MAC address. Default: 64
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address Min.: 0 –
(3C1) Max.: 64
0: 125 kbps
DeviceNet Communication 1: 250 kbps
F6-51 Default: 4
2: 500 kbps –
(3C2) Speed Range: 0 to 4
3: Adjustable from network
4: Detect automatically
Sets the format of the data set from the DeviceNet master to the drive. Default: 21
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting Min.: 0 –
(3C3) Max.: 255
Sets the format of the data set from the drive to the DeviceNet master. Default: 71
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting Min.: 0 –
(3C4) Max.: 255
F6-54 DeviceNet Idle Mode Fault 0: Enabled Default: 0 –
(3C5) Detection 1: Disabled, no fault detection Range: 0, 1
Verifies the baud rate running on the network.
F6-55 DeviceNet Baud Rate 0: 125 kbps Default: 0 –
(3C6) Monitor 1: 250 kbps Range: 0 to 2
2: 500 kbps
Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3D7) Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3D8) Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3D9) Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3DA) Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3DB) Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in DeviceNet. Default: 0
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling Min.: -15 –
(3DC) Max.: 15
Parameter List
Sets the heartbeat interval for DeviceNet communications. Default: 0

F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat Min.: 0 –
(3DD) Interval Max.: 10
Saves and monitors settings 0 to 63 of F6-50 (DeviceNet MAC Address). Default: 63
F6-63 DeviceNet Network MAC Min.: 0 –
(3DE) ID Max.: 63
B
No.
Hex)
F6-64 to Reserved for Dynamic I/O Assembly Parameters.
F6-71 Reserved – –
(3DF to
3C8)
F7-01 Sets the most significant octet of network static IP address.
(3E5) Default: 192
IP Address 1 –
<2> Range: 0 to 255
F7-02 Sets the second most significant octet of network static IP address.
(3E6) Default: 168
IP Address 2 –
<2> Range: 0 to 255
F7-03 Sets the third most significant octet of network static IP address.
(3E7) Default: 1
IP Address 3 –
<2> Range: 0 to 255
F7-04 Sets the fourth most significant octet of network static IP address.
(3E8) Default: 20
IP Address 4 –
<2> Range: 0 to 255
F7-05 Sets the most significant octet of network static Subnet Mask. Default: 255
Subnet Mask 1 –
(3E9) Range: 0 to 255
F7-06 Sets the second most significant octet of network static Subnet Mask. Default: 255
Subnet Mask 2 –
(3EA) Range: 0 to 255
F7-07 Sets the third most significant octet of network static Subnet Mask. Default: 255
Subnet Mask 3 –
(3EB) Range: 0 to 255
F7-08 Sets the fourth most significant octet of network static Subnet Mask. Default: 0
Subnet Mask 4 –
(3EC) Range: 0 to 255
F7-09 Sets the most significant octet of network Gateway address. Default: 192
Gateway Address 1 –
(3ED) Range: 0 to 255
F7-10 Sets the second most significant octet of network Gateway address. Default: 168
(3EE) Range: 0 to 255
F7-11 Sets the third most significant octet of network Gateway address. Default: 1
(3EF) Range: 0 to 255
F7-12 Sets the fourth most significant octet of network Gateway address. Default: 1
(3E0) Range: 0 to 255
Select the option address setting method
F7-13 Address Mode at Startup 0: Static <3> Default: 2 –
(3F1) 1: BOOTP Range: 0 to 2
2: DHCP
Selects duplex mode setting.
F7-14 0: Half duplex forced Default: 1
Duplex Mode Selection –
(3F2) 1: Auto-negotiate duplex mode and communication speed Range: 0 to 2
2: Full duplex forced
Sets the communication speed
F7-15 Communication Speed Default: 10
10: 10 Mbps –
(3F3) Selection Range: 10, 100
100: 100 Mbps
Sets the timeout value for communication loss detection in tenths of a second.Default: 0
F7-16 Communication Loss A value of 0 disables the connection timeout. Min.: 0 –
(3F4) Timeout Example: An entered value of 100 represents 10.0 seconds. Max.: 300
Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Default: 0
F7-17 EtherNet/IP Speed Scaling Object. Min.: -15 –
(3F5) Factor Max.: 15
Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID Default: 0
F7-18 EtherNet/IP Current Scaling 2AH Object. Min.: -15 –
Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Default: 0
F7-19 EtherNet/IP Torque Scaling Object. Min.: -15 –
Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Default: 0
F7-20 EtherNet/IP Power Scaling Object. Min.: -15 –
EtherNet/IP Voltage Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Default: 0
F7-21 Object. Min.: -15 –
No.
Hex)
Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Default: 0
F7-22 EtherNet/IP Time Scaling Object. Min.: -15 –
(3FA) Max.: 15
Parameters used in Output Assembly 116. Each parameter contains a
F7-23 to
Dynamic Output Assembly MEMOBUS/Modbus address. The value received for Output Assembly 116
F7-32 will be written to this corresponding MEMOBUS/Modbus address. A Default: 0 –
(3FB to Parameters MEMOBUS/Modbus address value of 0 means that the value received for
374) Output Assembly 116 will not be written to any MEMOBUS/Modbus register.
Parameters used in Input Assembly 166. Each parameter contains a
F7-33 to MEMOBUS/Modbus address. The value sent for Input Assembly 166 will be
F7-42 Dynamic Input Assembly read from this corresponding MEMOBUS/Modbus address. A MEMOBUS/ Default: 0 –
(375 to Parameters Modbus address value of 0 means that the value sent for Input Assembly 166
37E) is not defined by the user, therefore the option default register value will be
returned.
<2> Cycle power for setting changes to take effect.
<3> If F7-13 is set to 0, all IP addresses (F7-01 to F7-04) must be unique.
Parameter List
B.6 H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals

H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
u H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs

No.
Hex)
Multi-Function Digital Input Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Default: 40 (F) <1>
H1-01 Refer to pages 196 to 199 for descriptions of setting values.
Terminal S1 Function Min.: 1 101
(438) Selection Note: Set unused terminals to F. Max.: 9F
Multi-Function Digital Input Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Default: 41 (F) <1>
Multi-Function Digital Input Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Default: 24
Multi-Function Digital Input Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Default: 14
Multi-Function Digital Input Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Default: 3 (0) <1>
<1> Value in parenthesis is the default setting when a 3-Wire initialization is performed (A1-03 = 3330).
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections

H1-oo
Function Description Page
Setting
Closed: Reverse rotation (only if the drive is set up for 3-Wire sequence)
0 3-Wire sequence 102
Terminals S1 and S2 are automatically set up for the Run command and Stop command.
Open: REMOTE (parameter settings determine the source of the frequency Reference 1 or 2
1 LOCAL/REMOTE selection (b1-01, b1-02 or b1-15, b1-16) –
Closed: LOCAL, Frequency reference and Run command are input from the digital operator.
Open: Run command and frequency reference source 1 (determined by b1-01 and b1-02)
2 External reference 1/2 selection –
Closed: Run command and frequency reference source 2 (determined by b1-15 and b1-16)
When input terminals are set to Multi-Step Speed References 1 through 3, switching
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 combinations of those terminals will create a multi-step speed sequence using the frequency –
references set in d1-01 through d1-08.
Closed: Jog frequency reference (d1-17) selected. Jog has priority over all other reference
6 Jog reference selection –
sources.
Used to switch between accel/decel time 1 (set in C1-01, C1-02) and accel/decel time 2 (set
7 Accel/decel time selection 1 –
in C1-03, C1-04).
8 Baseblock command (N.O.) Closed: No drive output –

H1-oo
Setting
9 Baseblock command (N.C.) Open: No drive output –
Open: Accel/decel is not held
A Accel/decel ramp hold Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration and maintains the output –
frequency.
B Drive overheat alarm (oH2) Closed: Closes when an oH2 alarm occurs –
Open: Function assigned by H3-14 is disabled.
C Analog terminal input selection –
Closed: Function assigned by H3-14 is enabled.
Select this setting when using the terminal in a pass-through mode. The terminal does not
F Through mode trigger a drive function but can be used as digital input for the controller the drive is connected –
to.
The drive accelerates when the Up command terminal closes, and decelerates when the Down
command closes. When both terminals are closed or both are open, the drive holds the
10 Up command –
frequency reference. The Up and Down commands must always be used in conjunction with
one another.
The drive accelerates when the Up command terminal closes, and decelerates when the Down
command closes. When both terminals are closed or both are open, the drive holds the
11 Down command –
frequency reference. The Up and Down commands must always be used in conjunction with
one another.
12 Forward Jog Closed: Runs forward at the Jog frequency d1-17. –
13 Reverse Jog Closed: Runs reverse at the Jog frequency d1-17. –
14 Fault reset Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run command is removed. –
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) Closed: Decelerates at the Fast Stop time set to C1-09. –
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) Open: Decelerates to stop at the Fast Stop time set to C1-09. –
Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the
18 Timer function input –
timer function output (H2-oo = 12).
Open: PID control enabled
19 PID disable –
Closed: PID control disabled
Used in conjunction with an input terminal set for “Accel/decel time selection 1”
1A Accel/decel time selection 2 –
(H1-oo = 7), and allows the drive to switch between accel/decel times 3 and 4.
Open: Parameters cannot be edited (except for U1-01 if the reference source is assigned to
1B Program lockout the digital operator). –
Closed: Parameters can be edited and saved.
1E Reference sample hold Closed: Samples the analog frequency reference and operates the drive at that speed. –
20: N.O., Always detected, ramp to stop
21: N.C., Always detected, ramp to stop
22: N.O., During run, ramp to stop
23: N.C., During run, ramp to stop
24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop
25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop
26: N.O., During run, coast to stop
27: N.C., During run, coast to stop
20 to 2F External fault –
28: N.O., Always detected, Fast Stop
29: N.C., Always detected, Fast Stop
2A: N.O., During run, Fast Stop
2B: N.C., During run, Fast Stop
2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running)
30 PID integral reset Closed: Resets the PID control integral value. –
Open: Performs integral operation.
31 PID integral hold –
Closed: Maintains the current PID control integral value.
Multi-Step Speed Used in combination with input terminals set to Multi-Step Speed Reference 1, 2, and 3. Use
32 –
Reference 4 parameters d1-09 to d1-16 to set reference values.
Parameter List
Open: PID soft starter is enabled.

34 PID soft starter cancel –
Closed: Disables the PID soft starter b5-17.
35 PID input level selection Closed: Inverts the PID input signal. –
Open: Stop
Forward run command Closed: Forward run
40 –
(2-Wire sequence)
Note: Cannot be set together with settings 42 or 43. B

H1-oo
Setting
Open: Stop
Reverse run command Closed: Reverse run
41 –
(2-Wire sequence)
Note: Cannot be set together with settings 42 or 43.
Open: Stop
Run command Closed: Run
42 –
(2-Wire sequence 2)
Note: Cannot be set together with settings 40 or 41.
Open: Forward
FWD/REV command Closed: Reverse
43 –
(2-Wire sequence 2) Note: Determines motor direction, but does not issue a Run command. Cannot be set
together with settings 40 or 41.
47 Node setup Closed: Node setup for SI-S3 enabled. –
Sequence Timer Disable
51 SeqTimer Disable Closed: Drive ignores sequence timers and runs normally (based on b1-02/b1-16 source). –
Closed: When the input changes from open to closed, the currently active sequence timer is
Sequence Timer Cancel disabled. Operation will resume with the next scheduled sequence timer. Cycling the Run
52 SeqTimer Cancel command after the current sequence timer has been canceled will re-enable the sequence –
timer.
60 DC Injection Braking command Closed: Triggers DC Injection Braking. –
External Speed Search Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the maximum output frequency
61 –
command 1 (E1-04).
External Speed Search
62 Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the frequency reference. –
command 2
63 Field weakening Closed: The drive performs Field Weakening control as set for d6-01 and d6-02. –
65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.) Open: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled. –
66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.) Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 1 enabled. –
Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-422/RS-485 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test
67 Communications test mode –
completes successfully.
68 High Slip Braking (HSB) Closed: Activates High Slip Braking to stop the drive during a Run command. –
Open: Drive disabled. If this input is opened during run, the drive will stop as specified by
6A Drive enable b1-03. –
Closed: Ready for operation.
Used to control the bias added to the frequency reference by the Up/Down 2 function. The
75 Up 2 command –
Up 2 and Down 2 commands must always be used in conjunction with one another.
Used to control the bias added to the frequency reference by the Up/Down 2 function. The
76 Down 2 command –
Up 2 and Down 2 commands must always be used in conjunction with one another.
Open: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled. Drive disregards L2-29 and performs Single Drive KEB
7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.) –
Ride-Thru 2.
Closed: KEB Ride-Thru 2 enabled. Drive disregards L2-29 and performs Single Drive KEB
7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.) –
Ride-Thru 2.
Secondary PI Disable (N.O.) Closed: Disables the secondary PI controller. Output behavior depends on the setting of
A8 PI2 Disable N.O. S3-12. –
Secondary PI Disable (N.C.) Closed: Enables the secondary PI controller. Output behavior depends on the setting of S3-12
A9 PI2 Disable N.C. when open. –
Secondary PI Inverse Operation Closed: Changes the sign of the secondary PI controller input (reverse acting PI control).
AA PI2 Invert –
Secondary PI Integral Reset Closed: Resets the secondary PI controller integral value.
AB PI2 Intgrl Reset –
Secondary PI Integral Hold Closed: Locks the value of the secondary PI controller integral value.
AC PI2 Intgrl Hold –
Closed: Uses the secondary PI controller Proportional and Integral adjustments (S3-06 and
S3-07) instead of the primary PI controller Proportional and Integral adjustments (b5-02 and
Select Secondary PI Parameters b5-03). Only valid when S3-01 = 0 (secondary PI controller disabled).
AD Select PI2 Parms –
Note: This multi-function input has no effect on the secondary PI controller. It is only
used for the primary PI controller (b5-oo).
Emergency Override Forward Run Closed: Run the drive forward using the speed set in S6-02.
AF EmergOverrideFWD –

H1-oo
Setting
Emergency Override Reverse Run Closed: Run the drive in reverse using the speed set in S6-02.
B0 EmergOverrideREV –
u H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs

No.
Hex)
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on pages 199 to 200 for Default: 0 102
(40B) selection (relay) descriptions of setting values. Range: 0 to 192
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function Default: 1 102
(40C) selection (relay) Range: 0 to 192
H2-03 Terminal MD-ME-MF Default: 2 102
(40D) Function Selection Range: 0 to 192
Outputs a 200 ms pulse signal when the watt-hour counter increases by the
units selected.
0: 0.1 kWh units
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit Default: 0
1: 1 kWh units –
(437) Selection Range: 0 to 4
2: 10 kWh units
3: 100 kWh units
4: 1000 kWh units
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2-oo
Setting
0 During run Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output. –
Open: Output frequency is above the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
1 Zero speed –
Closed: Output frequency is below the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
2 Speed agree 1 Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02). 103
Closed: Output frequency and speed reference equal L4-01 (plus or minus the hysteresis set to
3 User-set speed agree 1 104
L4-02).
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined
4 Frequency detection 1 –
by L4-02.
Closed: Output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined
5 Frequency detection 2 –
by L4-02.
6 Drive ready Closed: Power up is complete and the drive is ready to accept a Run command. –
7 DC bus undervoltage Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05. –
8 During baseblock (N.O.) Closed: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). –
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the frequency reference (set in b1-01 or b1-15).
9 Frequency reference source –
Closed: Digital operator supplies the frequency reference.
Open: External Reference 1 or 2 supplies the Run command (set in b1-02 or b1-16).
A Run command source –
Closed: Digital operator supplies the Run command.
B Torque detection 1 (N.O.) Closed: An overtorque or undertorque situation has been detected. –
Closed: Analog frequency reference has been lost.
C Frequency reference loss Frequency reference loss is detected when the frequency reference drops below 10% of the –
reference within 400 ms.
D Braking resistor fault Closed: Braking resistor or transistor is overheated or faulted out. –
E Fault Closed: Fault occurred. –
F Through mode Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. –
10 Minor fault Closed: An alarm has been triggered, or the IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected life span. –
Closed: A command has been entered to clear a fault via the input terminals or from the serial
11 Fault reset command active –
Parameter List
network.
12 Timer output Closed: Timer output. –
13 Speed agree 2 Closed: When drive output frequency equals the frequency reference ±L4-04. –
14 User-set speed agree 2 Closed: When the drive output frequency is equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. –
15 Frequency detection 3 Closed: When the drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. –
B
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2-oo
Setting
16 Frequency detection 4 Closed: When the output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. –
17 Torque detection 1 (N.C.) Open: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.
–
18 Torque detection 2 (N.O.) Closed: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected.
19 Torque detection 2 (N.C.) Open: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected. –
1A During reverse Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction. –
1B During baseblock (N.C.) Open: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). –
1E Restart enabled Closed: An automatic restart is performed –
1F Motor overload alarm (oL1) Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. An oH3 situation also triggers this alarm. –
20 Drive overheat pre-alarm (oH) Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value. –
Mechanical weakening Closed: Mechanical weakening detected.
22 –
detection
Closed: Cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge bypass relay may require
2F Maintenance period –
maintenance.
Open: Either the drive has stopped or baseblock, DC Injection Braking, or Initial Excitation is
being performed.
37 During frequency output –
Closed: Drive is running the motor (not in a baseblock state and DC Injection is not being
performed).
38 Drive enabled Closed: Multi-function input set for “Drive enable” is closed (H1-oo = 6A) –
39 Watt hour pulse output Output units are determined by H2-06. Outputs a pulse every 200 ms to indicate the kWh count. –
Open: REMOTE
3C LOCAL/REMOTE status –
Closed: LOCAL
3D During speed search Closed: Speed Search is being executed. –
3E PID feedback low Closed: PID feedback level is too low. –
3F PID feedback high Closed: The PID feedback level is too high. –
4A During KEB Ride-Thru Closed: KEB Ride-Thru is being performed. –
4C During fast stop Closed: A Fast Stop command has been entered from the operator or input terminals. –
4D oH Pre-alarm time limit Closed: oH pre-alarm time limit has passed. –
4E Braking transistor fault (rr) Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed. –
4F Braking resistor overheat (oH) Closed: The dynamic braking resistor has overheated. –
50 Waiting to Run Closed: b1-11 Timer is active. –
Sequence timer 1 Closed: Sequence timer 1 is active.
51 SeqTimer Disable –

52 SeqTimer Cancel –

53 Sequence timer 3 –

54 Sequence Timer 4 –
Underload detection Closed: Underload is detected.

58 UL6 –
60 Internal cooling fan alarm Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm –

Secondary PI Feedback Low Closed: PI2 feedback level is too low.
71 PI2 Feedback Low –
Secondary PI Feedback High Closed: The PI2 feedback level is too high.
72 PI2 FeedbackHigh –
0 to 92 with inverse Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions.
100 to 192 Function –
output Set the last two digits of 1oo to reverse the output signal of that specific function.
u H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs

No.
Hex)
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level 2: 4 to 20 mA Default: 0
3: 0 to 20 mA 104
Note: Use Jumper S1 to set input terminal A1 for a current or voltage
input signal.
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Sets the function of terminal A1. Default: 0 104
H3-03 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at Default: 100.0%
(411) Terminal A1 Gain Setting terminal A1. Min.: -999.9 104
Max.: 999.9
H3-04 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 V is input at terminal Default: 0.0%
(412) Terminal A1 Bias Setting A1. Min.: -999.9 104
Max.: 999.9
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
3: 0 to 20 mA 105
input signal.
H3-07 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-06 when 10 V is input at Default: 100.0%
(415) Terminal A3 Gain Setting terminal A3. Min.: -999.9 105
Max.: 999.9
H3-08 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-06 when 0 V is input at terminal Default: 0.0%
(416) Terminal A3 Bias Setting A3. Min.: -999.9 105
Max.: 999.9
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
(417) Selection 3: 0 to 20 mA 106
Range: 0 to 3
input signal.
H3-11 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V (20 mA) is input Default: 100.0%
(419) Terminal A2 Gain Setting at terminal A2. Min.: -999.9 106
Max.: 999.9
H3-12 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V (0 or 4 mA) is Default: 0.0%
(41A) Terminal A2 Bias Setting input at terminal A2. Min.: -999.9 106
Max.: 999.9
Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1, A2, and A3. Used Default: 0.03 s
H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time for noise filtering. Min.: 0.00 –
(41B) Constant Max.: 2.00
Determines which analog input terminals will be enabled when a digital input
programmed for “Analog input enable” (H1-oo = C) is activated.
1: Terminal A1 only
H3-14 Analog Input Terminal 2: Terminal A2 only Default: 7
3: Terminals A1 and A2 only –
(41C) Enable Selection Range: 1 to 7
4: Terminal A3 only
Parameter List
5: Terminals A1 and A3
6: Terminals A2 and A3
7: All terminals enabled
Adds an offset when the analog signal to terminal A1 is at 0 V. Default: 0
H3-16 Terminal A1 Offset Min.: -500 –
(2F0) Max.: 500
B
No.
Hex)
(2F1) Max.: 500
(2F2) Max.: 500
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings

H3-oo
Setting
0 Frequency bias 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency) –
0 to 10 V signal allows a setting of 0 to 100%. -10 to 0 V signal allows a setting of -100
1 Frequency gain –
to 0%.
2 Auxiliary frequency reference 1 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency) –
3 Auxiliary frequency reference 2 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency) –
4 Output voltage bias 10 V = E1-05 (motor rated voltage) –
5 Accel/decel time gain 10 V = 100% –
6 DC Injection Braking current 10 V = Drive rated current –
Overtorque/undertorque 10 V = Drive rated current (V/f)
7 –
detection level
8 Stall Prevention level during run 10 V = Drive rated current –
9 Output frequency lower limit level 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency) –
B PID feedback 10 V = 100% –
C PID setpoint 10 V = 100% –
D Frequency bias 10 V = E1-04 (maximum output frequency) –
10 V = 100%
E Motor Temperature (PTC Input) Note: A 12 kΩ resistor must be connected between terminals A1, A2, or A3 and –
V+ for PTC functionality.
16 Differential PID feedback 10 V = 100% –
10 V = -9 °C
17 Motor Thermistor (NTC) –
0 V = 234 °C
1F Through mode Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. –
Secondary PI Setpoint 10 V = S3-02 (maximum output frequency)
25 PI2 Setpoint –
Secondary PI Feedback 10 V = S3-02 (maximum output frequency)

26 PI2 Feedback –
u H4: Analog Outputs

No.
Hex)
Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal
Multi-Function Analog FM.
H4-01 Default: 102
Output Terminal FM 106
(41D) Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in Uo-oo. Range: 000 to 999
Monitor Selection
For example, enter “103” for U1-03.
H4-02 Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 100% of the selected Default: 100.0%
(41E) Multi-Function Analog monitor value. Min.: -999.9 107
Output Terminal FM Gain Max.: 999.9
H4-03 Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor Default: 0.0%
(41F) Multi-Function Analog value. Min.: -999.9 107
Output Terminal FM Bias Max.: 999.9
Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal
Multi-Function Analog AM.
H4-04 Default: 103
Output Terminal AM 106
(420) Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in Uo-oo. Range: 000 to 999
Monitor Selection
For example, enter “103” for U1-03.
No.
Hex)
H4-05 Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 100% of the selected Default: 50.0%
(421) Multi-Function Analog monitor value. Min.: -999.9 107
Output Terminal AM Gain Max.: 999.9
H4-06 Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor Default: 0.0%
(422) Multi-Function Analog value. Min.: -999.9 107
Output Terminal AM Bias Max.: 999.9
Multi-Function Analog 0: 0 to 10 V
H4-07 Default: 0
Output Terminal FM Signal 1: -10 to 10 V 108
(423) Range: 0 to 2
Level Selection 2: 4 to 20mA
Multi-Function Analog 0: 0 to 10 V
H4-08 Default: 0
Output Terminal AM Signal 1: -10 to 10 V 108
(424) Range: 0 to 2
Level Selection 2: 4 to 20 mA
u H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication

No.
Hex)
H5-01 Selects drive station node number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus Default: 1F (Hex)
(425) Drive Node Address terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. Cycle power for the setting to take effect. Min.: 0 –
<1> Max.: FF
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
H5-02 Communication Speed 4: 19200 bps Default: 3 –
(426) Selection 5: 38400 bps Range: 0 to 8
6: 57600 bps
7: 76800 bps
8: 115200 bps
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: No parity
H5-03 Communication Parity 1: Even parity Default: 0 –
(427) Selection 2: Odd parity Range: 0 to 2
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: Ramp to stop
H5-04 Stopping Method after 1: Coast to stop Default: 3 –
(428) Communication Error (CE) 2: Fast Stop Range: 0 to 3
3: Alarm only
0: Disabled
H5-05 Communication Fault Default: 1
1: Enabled. If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE fault –
(429) Detection Selection Range: 0, 1
will occur.
Set the wait time between receiving and sending data. Default: 5 ms
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Min.: 5 –
(42A) Max.: 65
H5-07 0: Disabled. RTS is always on. Default: 1
RTS Control Selection –
(42B) 1: Enabled. RTS turns on only when sending. Range: 0, 1
Sets the time required to detect a communications error. Default: 2.0 s
H5-09 CE Detection Time Adjustment may be needed when networking several drives. Min.: 0.0 –
(435) Max.: 10.0
Unit Selection for 0: 0.1 V units
H5-10 Default: 0
MEMOBUS/Modbus 1: 1 V units –
(436) Range: 0, 1
Register 0025H
0: Drive requires an Enter command before accepting any changes to
H5-11 Communications ENTER Default: 1
parameter settings. –
(43C) Function Selection Range: 0, 1
1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without the Enter command.
Parameter List
H5-12 Run Command Method 0: FWD/Stop, REV/Stop Default: 0 –

(43D) Selection 1: Run/Stop, FWD/REV Range: 0, 1
<1> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
u H6: Pulse Train Input

No.
Hex)
Pulse Train Input Terminal 0: Frequency reference
H6-01 Default: 0
1: PID feedback value –
(42C) RP Function Selection Range: 0 to 2
2: PID setpoint value
H6-02 Sets the terminal RP input signal frequency that is equal to 100% of the value Default: 1440 Hz
(42D) Pulse Train Input Scaling selected in H6-01. Min.: 100 –
Max.: 32000
H6-03 Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when a frequency with the value Default: 100.0%
(42E) Pulse Train Input Gain set in H6-02 is input. Min.: 0.0 –
Max.: 1000.0
H6-04 Sets the level of the value selected in H6-01 when 0 Hz is input. Default: 0.0%
(42F) Pulse Train Input Bias Min.: -100.0 –
Max.: 100.0
H6-05 Sets the pulse train input filter time constant. Default: 0.10 s
(430) Pulse Train Input Filter Time Min.: 0.00 –
Max.: 2.00
Pulse Train Input Minimum Sets the minimum frequency for the pulse train input to be detected. Enabled Default: 0.5 Hz
H6-08 when H6-01 = 0, 1, or 2. Min.: 0.1 –
(43F) Frequency Max.: 1000.0
B.7 L: Protection Function

L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, including control during momentary power loss, Stall Prevention,
frequency detection, fault restarts, overtorque detection, and other types of hardware protection.
u L1: Motor Protection
No.
Hex)
0: Disabled
1: General purpose motor (standard fan cooled)
2: Drive dedicated motor with a speed range of 1:10
L1-01 Motor Overload Protection 3: Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 Default: 1 –
(480) Selection 6: General purpose motor (50 Hz) Range: 0 to 6
The drive may not be able to provide protection when using multiple motors,
even if overload is enabled in L1-01. Set L1-01 to 0 and install separate thermal
relays to each motor.
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time. Default: 1.0 min
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Min.: 0.1 –
(481) Time Max.: 5.0
Sets operation when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02, H3-10, or
Motor Overheat Alarm H3-06 = E) exceeds the oH3 alarm level.
L1-03 Operation Selection 0: Ramp to stop Default: 3 –
(482) (PTC input) 1: Coast to stop Range: 0 to 3
2: Fast Stop (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09)
3: Alarm only (“oH3” will flash)
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02,
Motor Overheat Fault H3-10, or H3-06 = E) exceeds the oH4 fault level.
L1-04 Operation Selection Default: 1
0: Ramp to stop –
(483) (PTC input) Range: 0 to 2
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast Stop (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09)
Adjusts the filter for the motor temperature analog input (H3-02, H3-10, or Default: 0.20 s
L1-05 Motor Temperature Input H3-06 = E). Min.: 0.00 –
(484) Filter Time (PTC input) Max.: 10.00
0: Disabled
L1-13 Continuous Electrothermal Default: 1
1: Enabled –
(46D) Operation Selection Range: 0 to 2
2: Enabled (RTC)
u L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

No.
Hex)
0: Disabled. Drive trips on Uv1 fault when power is lost.
1: Recover within the time set in L2-02. Uv1 will be detected if power loss is
longer than L2-02.
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss 2: Recover as long as CPU has power. Uv1 is not detected. Default: 2 –
(485) Operation Selection 3: KEB deceleration for the time set to L2-02. Range: 0 to 5
4: KEB deceleration as long as CPU has power.
5: KEB deceleration to stop.
Sets the Power Loss Ride-Thru time. Enabled only when L2-01 = 1 or 3. Default: <1>
L2-02 Momentary Power Loss –
(486) Ride-Thru Time Min.: 0.0 s
Max.: 25.5 s
Sets the minimum wait time for residual motor voltage decay before the drive
L2-03 Momentary Power Loss output reenergizes after performing Power Loss Ride-Thru. Default: <1>
(487) Minimum Baseblock Time Increasing the time set to L2-03 may help if overcurrent or overvoltage occur Min.: 0.1 s –
during Speed Search or during DC Injection Braking. Max.: 5.0 s
Parameter List
Momentary Power Loss Sets the time for the output voltage to return to the preset V/f pattern during Default: <1>
L2-04 Speed Search.
Voltage Recovery Ramp Min.: 0.0 s –
(488) Time Max.: 5.0 s
No.
Hex)
Sets the DC bus undervoltage trip level. Default: 190 Vdc
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection <2> <3>
–
(489) Level (Uv1) Min.: 150 Vdc
Max.: 210 Vdc <3>
Sets the time required to decelerate from the speed when KEB was activated Default: 0.00 s
L2-06 to zero speed. Min.: 0.00
KEB Deceleration Time –
(48A)
Max.: 6000.0 <4>
Sets the time to accelerate to the frequency reference when momentary power Default: 0.00 s
L2-07 loss is over. If set to 0.0, the active acceleration time is used. Min.: 0.00
KEB Acceleration Time –
(48B)
Max.: 6000.0 <4>
Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of Default: 100%
L2-08 Frequency Gain at KEB deceleration when the KEB Ride-Thru function is started. Min.: 0 –
(48C) Start Reduction = (slip frequency before KEB) × L2-08 × 2 Max.: 300
Sets the time to perform KEB Ride-Thru. Default: 50 ms
L2-10 KEB Detection Time Min.: 0 –
(48E) (Minimum KEB Time) Max.: 2000
Sets the desired value of the DC bus voltage during KEB Ride-Thru. Default: <2>
L2-11 DC Bus Voltage Setpoint [E1-01] × 1.22 –
(461) during KEB Min.: 150 Vdc
Max.: 400 Vdc <5>
0: Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1
L2-29 1: Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2 Default: 0
KEB Method Selection –
(475) 2: System KEB Ride-Thru 1 Range: 0 to 3
3: System KEB Ride-Thru 2
<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter E1-01, Input voltage Setting.
<4> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Time Setting Units. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting range
becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
<5> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives. Multiply the value by 2.875 for 600 V class drives, but
set the value below 1040 Vdc (overvoltage protection level).
u L3: Stall Prevention

No.
Hex)
0: Disabled.
1: General purpose. Acceleration is paused as long as the current is above the Default: 1
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection L3-02 setting. 108
(48F) during Acceleration 2: Intelligent. Accelerate in the shortest possible time without exceeding the Range: 0 to 2
L3-02 level.
Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Default: <1>
L3-02 Stall Prevention Level Min.: 0% 109
(490) during Acceleration
Max.: 150% <1>
Sets Stall Prevention lower limit during acceleration when operating in the Default: 50%
L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit constant power range. Set as a percentage of drive rated current. Min.: 0 109
(491) during Acceleration Max.: 100
0: Disabled. Deceleration at the active deceleration rate. An ov fault may
occur.
1: General purpose. Deceleration is paused when the DC bus voltage exceeds
the Stall Prevention level.
L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection 2: Intelligent. Decelerate as fast as possible while avoiding ov faults. Default: 1
(492) during Deceleration 110
3: Stall Prevention with braking resistor. Stall Prevention during deceleration Range: 0 to 5
is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking.
4: Overexcitation Deceleration. Decelerates while increasing the motor flux.
5: Overexcitation Deceleration 2. Adjust the deceleration rate according to the
DC bus voltage.
No.
Hex)
0: Disabled. Drive runs at a set frequency. A heavy load may cause speed loss.
1: Decel time 1. Uses the deceleration time set to C1-02 while Stall Prevention Default: 1
L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection is performed. 111
(493) during Run 2: Decel time 2. Uses the deceleration time set to C1-04 while Stall Prevention Range: 0 to 2
is performed.
Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Default: <1>
L3-06 Stall Prevention Level Min.: 30% 111
(494) during Run
Max.: 150% <1>
Enables or disables the ov suppression function, which allows the drive to
L3-11 Overvoltage Suppression change the output frequency as the load changes to prevent an ov fault. Default: 0 –
(4C7) Function Selection 0: Disabled Range: 0, 1
1: Enabled
Sets the desired value for the DC bus voltage during overvoltage suppression Default: 375 Vdc
Target DC Bus Voltage for and Stall Prevention during deceleration. <2> <3>
L3-17 Overvoltage Suppression –
(462) Min.: 150
and Stall Prevention
Max.: 400 <3>
DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Sets the proportional gain for KEB Ride-Thru, Stall Prevention, and Default: 1.00
L3-20 overvoltage suppression. Min.: 0.00 –
(465) Gain Max.: 5.00
Sets the proportional gain used to calculate the deceleration rate during KEB Default: 1.00
L3-21 Accel/Decel Rate Ride-Thru, ov suppression function, and Stall Prevention during deceleration Min.: 0.10 –
(466) Calculation Gain
(L3-04 = 2). Max.: 10.00
0: Sets the Stall Prevention level set in L3-04 that is used throughout the entire
Automatic Reduction
L3-23 frequency range. Default: 0
Selection for Stall –
(4FD) 1: Automatic Stall Prevention level reduction in the constant output range. The Range: 0, 1
Prevention during Run lower limit value is 40% of L3-06.
Sets the time needed to accelerate the uncoupled motor at rated torque from Default: <4> <5>
L3-24 Motor Acceleration Time for stop to the maximum frequency. –
(46E) Inertia Calculations Min: 0.001 s
Max: 10.000 s
Sets the ratio between the motor and machine inertia. Default: 1.0
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio Min.: 1.0 –
(46F) Max.: 1000.0
When DC bus capacitors have been added externally, be sure to add those Default: 0 μF
L3-26 Additional DC Bus values to the internal capacitor table for proper DC bus calculations. Min: 0 –
(455) Capacitors Max: 65000
Sets the time the current must exceed the Stall Prevention level to activate Default: 50 ms
L3-27 Stall Prevention Detection Stall Prevention. Min.: 0 –
(456) Time Max.: 5000
<1> Upper limit is dependent on parameter L8-38, Frequency Reduction Selection.
<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter E1-01, Input voltage Setting.
<3> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives. Multiply the value by 2.875 for 600 V class drives, but
set the value below 1040 Vdc (overvoltage protection level).
<4> Parameter value changes automatically if E2-11 is manually changed or changed by Auto-Tuning.
u L4: Speed Detection

No.
Hex)
Speed Agreement Detection L4-01 sets the frequency detection level for digital output functions Default: 0.0 Hz
L4-01
H2-oo = 2, 3, 4, 5. Min.: 0.0 –
(499) Level Max.: 400.0
Speed Agreement Detection L4-02 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: 2.0
L4-02
Parameter List
Min.: 0.0 –
(49A) Width Max.: 20.0
Speed Agreement Detection L4-03 sets the frequency detection level for digital output functions Default: 0.0 Hz
L4-03
H2-oo = 13, 14, 15, 16. Min.: -400.0 –
(49B) Level (+/-) Max.: 400.0
No.
Hex)
Speed Agreement Detection L4-04 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: 2.0
L4-04 Min.: 0.0 –
(49C) Width (+/-) Max.: 20.0
L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss 0: Stop. Drive stops when the frequency reference is lost. Default: 0 –
(49D) Detection Selection 1: Run. Drive runs at a reduced speed when the frequency reference is lost. Range: 0, 1
Sets the percentage of the frequency reference that the drive should run with Default: 80.0%
L4-06 Frequency Reference at when the frequency reference is lost. Min.: 0.0 –
(4C2) Reference Loss Max.: 100.0
L4-07 Speed Agreement Detection 0: No detection during baseblock. Default: 0 –
(470) Selection 1: Detection always enabled. Range: 0, 1
u L5: Fault Restart

No.
Hex)
Sets the number of times the drive may attempt to restart after the following Default: 0
L5-01 Number of Auto Restart faults occur: GF, LF, oC, ov, PF, rH, rr, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, STo, Uv1. Min.: 0 –
(49E) Attempts Max.: 10
L5-02 Auto Restart Fault Output 0: Fault output not active. Default: 0 –
(49F) Operation Selection 1: Fault output active during restart attempt. Range: 0, 1
Sets the amount of time to wait between performing fault restarts. Default: 10.0 s
L5-04 Fault Reset Interval Time Min.: 0.5 –
(46C) Max.: 600.0
0: Continuously attempt to restart while incrementing restart counter only at
L5-05 Fault Reset Operation a successful restart (same as F7 and G7). Default: 0 –
(467) Selection 1: Attempt to restart with the interval time set in L5-04 and increment the Range: 0, 1
restart counter with each attempt (same as V7).
u L6: Torque Detection

No.
Hex)
0: Disabled
1: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after
detection
2: oL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3
fault
4: oL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault
Torque Detection 5: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after
L6-01 Default: 0
Selection 1 detection –
(4A1) 6: UL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection Range: 0 to 12
7: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3
fault
8: UL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault
9: UL6 Alarm at Speed Agree
10: UL6 Alarm during Run
11: UL6 Fault at Speed Agree
12: UL6 Fault during Run
Torque Detection Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Default: 15%
L6-02 Level 1 Min.: 0 –
(4A2) Max.: 300
Torque Detection Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger Default: 10.0 s
L6-03 Time 1 torque detection 1. Min.: 0.0 –
(4A3) Max.: 10.0
No.
Hex)
0: Disabled
1: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after
detection
2: oL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
3: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4
Torque Detection fault
L6-04 4: oL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Default: 0
Selection 2 –
(4A4) 5: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after Range: 0 to 8
detection
6: UL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection
7: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4
fault
8: UL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault
Torque Detection Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Default: 150%
L6-05 Level 2 Min.: 0 –
(4A5) Max.: 300
Torque Detection Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger Default: 0.1 s
L6-06 Time 2 torque detection 2. Min.: 0.0 –
(4A6) Max.: 10.0
Motor Underload Protection Sets the motor underload protection (UL6) based on motor load.
L6-13 Selection 0: Base frequency enable 0: Base Freq Enable Default: 0
Underload Select –
(62E) 1: Max frequency enable 1: Max Freq Enable Range: 0, 1
Motor Underload Protection Sets the UL6 detection level at minimum frequency by percentage of drive
Level at Minimum rated current. Default: 15%
L6-14 Frequency Min.: 0 –
(62F) Underload Level Max.: 300
Parameter List
u L8: Drive Protection

No.
Hex)
Internal Dynamic Braking 0: Resistor overheat protection disabled
L8-01 Default: 0
Resistor Protection 1: Resistor overheat protection enabled –
(4AD) Range: 0, 1
Selection (ERF type)
An overheat alarm occurs when heatsink temperature exceeds the L8-02 level. Default: <1>
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level Min.: 50 °C –
(4AE)
Max.: 150 °C
0: Ramp to stop. A fault is triggered.
1: Coast to stop. A fault is triggered.
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm 2: Fast Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09. A fault Default: 3 –
(4AF) Operation Selection is triggered. Range: 0 to 4
3: Continue operation. An alarm is triggered.
4: Continue operation at reduced speed as set in L8-19.
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration. Default: 1 –
(4B1) Selection 0: Disabled Range: 0, 1
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
L8-07 Output Phase Loss Default: 1
1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss) –
(4B3) Protection Selection Range: 0 to 2
2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost)
L8-09 Output Ground Fault 0: Disabled Default: 1 –
(4B5) Detection Selection 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan 0: During run only. Fan operates only during run for L8-11 seconds after stop.
Default: 0 –
(4B6) Operation Selection 1: Fan always on. Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up. Range: 0, 1
Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Run command is removed
Default: 60 s
L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off when L8-10 = 0. Min.: 0 –
(4B7) Delay Time Max.: 300
Enter the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the oL2 detection level. Default: 40 °C
L8-12 Ambient Temperature Min.: -10 –
(4B8) Setting Max.: 50
L8-15 oL2 Characteristics 0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz. Default: 1 –
(4BB) Selection at Low Speeds 1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0 Hz. Range: 0, 1
L8-18 Software Current Limit 0: Disabled Default: 0 –
(4BE) Selection 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
Specifies the frequency reference reduction gain at overheat pre-alarm when Default: 0.8
L8-19 Frequency Reduction Rate L8-03 = 4. Min.: 0.1 –
(4BF) during Overheat Pre-Alarm Max.: 0.9
Determines drive response when a fault occurs with the internal cooling fan.
Main Contactor and Cooling 0: Ramp to stop
L8-32 Fan Power Supply Failure 2: Coast
1: to stop Default: 1 –
(4E2) Fast stop (Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time set to C1-09) Range: 0 to 4
Selection 3: Alarm only (“FAn” will flash)
4: Continue operation at reduced speed as set to L8-19.
0: IP00/Open-Chassis enclosure
L8-35 Installation Method 1: Side-by-Side mounting Default: <2> <3> –
(4EC) Selection 2: IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure Range: 0 to 3
3: Finless model drive or external heatsink installation
0: Disabled
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Default: 2
1: Enabled below 6 Hz –
(4EF) Reduction Range: 0 to 2
2: Enabled for the entire speed range
Sets the time that the drive continues running with reduced carrier frequency Default: 0.5 s
L8-40 Carrier Frequency after the carrier reduction condition is gone. Setting 0.00 s disables the carrier Min.: 0.00 –
(4F1) Reduction Off Delay Time
frequency reduction time. Max.: 2.00
0: Disabled
L8-41 High Current Alarm Default: 0
1: Enabled. An alarm is triggered at output currents above 150% of drive rated –
(4F2) Selection Range: 0, 1
current.
L8-55 Internal Braking Transistor 0: Disabled. Disable when using a regen converter or optional braking unit. Default: 1 –
(45F) Protection 1: Protection enabled. Range: 0, 1
LSo Detection Time at Low Sets the amount of time until baseblock is executed after detecting pull-out at Default: 1.0 s
L8-93 Min.: 0.0 –
(73C) Speed low speed. Max.: 10.0
No.
Hex)
LSo Detection Level at Low Determines the detection level of pull-out at low speed. Default: 3%
L8-94 Min.: 0 –
(73D) Speed Max.: 10
Sets the average number of times pull-out can occur at low speed. Default: 10 times
L8-95 Average LSo Frequency at Min.: 1 –
(73D) Low Speed Max.: 50
<3> Default setting is determined by the drive model:
Setting 2: Model code CIMR-Po2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165, and 5A0003 to 5A0242
Setting 0: Model code CIMR-Po2A0250 to 2A0415 and 4A0208 to 4A0675
Parameter List
B.8 n: Special Adjustment
B.8 n: Special Adjustment

The n parameters adjust more advanced performance characteristics such as Hunting Prevention, High Slip Braking, and
Overexcitation Braking.
u n1: Hunting Prevention

No.
Hex)
n1-01 Hunting Prevention 0: Disabled Default: 1 –
(580) Selection 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, increase the gain by 0.1 until Default: 1.00
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain vibration ceases. If the motor stalls, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling Min.: 0.00 –
(581) Setting
ceases. Max.: 2.50
Sets the time constant used for Hunting Prevention. Default: <1>
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time –
(582) Constant Min.: 0 ms
Max.: 500 ms
Sets the gain used for Hunting Prevention. If set to 0, the gain set to n1-02 is Default: 0.00
n1-05 Hunting Prevention Gain used for operation in reverse. Min.: 0.00 –
(530) while in Reverse Max.: 2.50
u n3: High Slip Braking (HSB) and Overexcitation Braking

No.
Hex)
High-Slip Braking Sets the output frequency reduction step width for when the drive stops the Default: 5%
n3-01 Deceleration Frequency motor using HSB. Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Min.: 1 –
(588) Width Increase this setting if overvoltage occurs during HSB. Max.: 20
Sets the current limit during HSB as a percentage of the motor rated current. Default: <1>
n3-02 High-Slip Braking Current –
(589) Limit Min.: 100%
Max.: 200%
Sets the time the drive will run with minimum frequency (E1-09) at the end Default: 1.0 s
n3-03 High-Slip Braking Dwell of deceleration. Min.: 0.0 –
(58A) Time at Stop If this time is set too low, the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate Max.: 10.0
slightly after HSB.
High-Slip Braking Overload Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault (oL7) to occur when the drive Default: 40 s
n3-04 output frequency does not change during an HSB stop. This parameter does Min.: 30 –
(58B) Time not typically require adjustment. Max.: 1200
Overexcitation Deceleration Sets the gain applied to the V/f pattern during Overexcitation Deceleration Default: 1.10
n3-13 (L3-04 = 4). Min.: 1.00 –
(531) Gain Max.: 1.40
High Frequency Injection 0: Disabled
n3-14 Default: 0
during Overexcitation 1: Enabled –
(532) Range: 0, 1
Deceleration
Sets output current level at which the drive will start reducing the Default: 100%
n3-21 High-Slip Suppression overexcitation gain in order to prevent a too high motor slip during Min.: 0 –
(579) Current Level Overexcitation Deceleration. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. Max.: 150
0: Enabled in both directions
n3-23 Overexcitation Operation Default: 0
1: Enabled only when rotating forward –
(57B) Selection Range: 0 to 2
2: Enabled only when in reverse
<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter L8-38, Frequency Reduction Selection.
B.9 o: Operator-Related Settings

The o parameters set up the digital operator displays.
u o1: Digital Operator Display Selection

No.
Hex)
o1-01 Selects the content of the last monitor that is shown when scrolling through Default: 106
(500) Drive Mode Unit Monitor Drive Mode display. Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter (Monitor U1-06) –
Selection number to be displayed: Uo-oo. Range: 104 to 809
1: Frequency reference (U1-01)
o1-02
User Monitor Selection after 2: Direction
(501) Default: 1
3: Output frequency (U1-02) –
Power Up Range: 1 to 5
4: Output current (U1-03)
5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units the drive should use to display the frequency reference and motor
speed monitors.
o1-03 Digital Operator Display 0: 0.01 Hz Default: 0 –
(502) Selection 1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04) Range: 0 to 3
2: r/min (calculated using the number of motor poles setting in E2-04)
3: User-selected units (set by o1-09, o1-10 and o1-11)
Selects the monitors displayed on the second and third lines of the digital
User Monitor Selection operator display.
o1-06 Mode 0: 3 Monitor Sequential (displays the next two sequential monitors) 0: 3 Mon Default: 0 –
(517) Monitor Mode Sel Range: 0, 1
Sequential
1: 3 Monitor Selectable 1: 3 Mon Selectable (set by o1-07 and o1-08)
Selects the monitor that is shown in the second line.
Second Line Monitor Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter number to be displayed:
o1-07 Selection Default: 102 –
(518) 2nd Monitor Sel
Uo-oo. For example, set "403" to display monitor parameter U4-03. Range: 101 to 799
Note: Parameter is effective only when o1-06 is set to 1.
Selects the monitor that is shown in the third line.
Third Line Monitor Enter the last three digits of the monitor parameter number to be displayed:
o1-08 Selection Default: 103 –
(519) 3rd Monitor Sel
Uo-oo. For example, set "403" to display monitor parameter U4-03. Range: 101 to 799
Note: Parameter is effective only when o1-06 is set to 1.
Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters and frequency related
monitors when o1-03 = 3.
Frequency Reference 7: LPS 7: LPS (Liters per second) Default: 25
o1-09 Display Units Range: 0 to 15; 24, –
(51C) Fref Disp Unit 8: Bar 8: Bar (Bar)
25
15: “Hg 15: Hg(inches of mercury)
24: Custom units (determined by o1-13 to o1-15)
25: None25: No Unit
o1-10 User-Set Display Units These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set to 3. Default: <1>
o1-10 sets the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency. Range: 1 to 60000 –
(520) Maximum Value
Parameter List
o1-11 sets the position of the decimal position.

o1-11 User-Set Display Units Default: <1> –
(521) Decimal Display Range: 0 to 3
Frequency Reference and Sets the first character of the customer-specified unit display when o1-03 is
o1-13 Frequency Related Monitor set to 3 and o1-09 is set to 24. Default: 41
Custom Units 1 –
(3105) Range: 30 to 7A
Fref Cust Unit 1
B
No.
Hex)
Frequency Reference and Sets the second character of the customer-specified unit display when o1-03
o1-14 Frequency Related Monitor is set to 3 and o1-09 is set to 24. Default: 41
Custom Units 2 –
(3106) Range: 30 to 7A
Fref Cust Unit 2
Frequency Reference and Sets the third character of the customer-specified unit display when o1-03 is
o1-15 Frequency Related Monitor set to 3 and o1-09 is set to 24. Default: 41
Custom Units 3 –
(3107) Range: 30 to 7A
Fref Cust Unit 3
<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter o1-03, Digital Operator Display Selection.
u o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions

No.
Hex)
o2-01 LO/RE Key Function 0: Disabled Default: 1 –
(505) Selection 1: Enabled. LO/RE key switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation. Range: 0, 1
o2-02 STOP Key Function 0: Disabled. STOP key is disabled in REMOTE operation. Default: 1 –
(506) Selection 1: Enabled. STOP key is always enabled. Range: 0, 1
0: No change.
1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a User
o2-03 User Parameter Default Default: 0
Initialization. –
(507) Value Range: 0 to 2
2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User
Initialization.
Enter the drive model. Setting required only if installing a new control board. Default:
o2-04 Drive Model Selection Determined by –
(508) drive capacity
0: ENTER key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
o2-05 Frequency Reference Default: 0
1: ENTER key is not required. The frequency reference can be adjusted using –
(509) Setting Method Selection Range: 0, 1
the up and down arrow keys only.
Operation Selection when 0: The drive continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected.
o2-06 Default: 1
Digital Operator is 1: An oPr fault is triggered and the motor coasts to stop. –
(50A) Range: 0, 1
Disconnected
This parameter requires assigning drive operation to the digital operator.
o2-07 Motor Direction at Power Default: 0
0: Forward –
(527) Up when Using Operator Range: 0, 1
1: Reverse
When running during a power loss, the Run command is issued via the digital
o2-20 operator and the Run state is saved to the EEPROM.
(81E) Operator RUN Save at When power is restored, the Run command is automatically applied if the Default: 0 –
Power Loss LOCAL/REMOTE or FREF conditions have not changed in the drive. Range: 0, 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
u o3: Copy Function

No.
Hex)
0: No action
1: Read parameters from the drive, saving them onto the digital operator.
o3-01 Default: 0
Copy Function Selection 2: Copy parameters from the digital operator, writing them to the drive. –
(515) Range: 0 to 3
3: Verify parameter settings on the drive to check if they match the data saved
on the operator.
o3-02 0: Read operation prohibited Default: 0
Copy Allowed Selection –
(516) 1: Read operation allowed Range: 0, 1
u o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

No.
Hex)
Cumulative Operation Time Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the drive in units of 10 h. Default: 0
o4-01 Min.: 0 –
(50B) Setting Max.: 9999
o4-02 Cumulative Operation Time 0: Logs power-on time Default: 0
(50C) Selection 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation time). Range: 0, 1 –
Cooling Fan Operation Time Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h. Default: 0
o4-03 Min.: 0 –
(50E) Setting Max.: 9999
Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-05 to Default: 0%
o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance check when the capacitors may need to be replaced. Min.: 0 –
(51D) Setting Max.: 150
Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay. Default: 0%
o4-07 DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay See U4-06 to check when the bypass relay may need to be replaced. Min.: 0 –
(523) Maintenance Setting Max.: 150
Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the IGBTs. See U4-07 for IGBT Default: 0%
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting replacement times. Min.: 0 –
(525) Max.: 150
0: U2-oo and U3-oo monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized
o4-11 (A1-03). Default: 0
U2, U3 Initialization –
(510) 1: U2-oo and U3-oo monitor data is reset when the drive is initialized Range: 0, 1
(A1-03).
0: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized
o4-12 Default: 0
kWh Monitor Initialization (A1-03). –
(512) Range: 0, 1
1: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03).
0: Number of Run commands counter is not reset when the drive is initialized
o4-13 Number of Run Commands (A1-03). Default: 0 –
(528) Counter Initialization 1: Number of Run commands counter is reset when the drive is initialized Range: 0, 1
(A1-03).
Sets the current date and time for the Real-Time Clock.
o4-17 Set/Reset Real-Time Clock 0: -- Default: 0 78
(3100) 1: Set Range: 0 to 2
2: Reset
Sets the time display format.
o4-20 Default: 0
Time Display Format 0: 12-hour –
(81F) Range: 0, 1
1: 24-hour
Parameter List
B.10 S: Special Application

u S1: Dynamic Noise Control Function
No.
Hex)
Dynamic Audible Noise 0: Disabled 0: Disabled
S1-01 Control Function Selection Default: 1 –
(3200) 1: Enabled 1: Enabled Range: 0, 1
Dyn Noise Ctrl
Voltage Reduction Rate Sets the rate at which the output voltage will be reduced as a percentage of the Default: 50.0%
S1-02 V/f pattern when operating with no load. Min.: 50.0 –
(3201) Volt Reduce Amt
Max.: 100.0
Voltage Restoration Level Sets the level when the drive should start restoring the voltage as a percentage Default: 20.0%
S1-03 of the drive rated torque. Min.: 0.0 –
(3202) V Reduce On Lvl
Max.: 90.0
Voltage Restoration Sets the level at which voltage restoration for the V/f pattern is complete as a
S1-04 Complete Level percentage of the drive rated torque. If the output torque rises above the value Default: 50.0%
of S1-04, then the voltage will be controlled in a manner specified by the V/f Min.:
(3203) S1-03 + 10.0 –
V Reduce Off Lvl Max.: 100.0
pattern setting.
Voltage Restoration Sets the level of sensitivity of the output torque and LPF time constants for Default: 1.000 s
S1-05 Sensitivity Time Constant the voltage reduction rate. The level of sensitivity can be adjusted in Min.: 0.000 –
(3204) Sensitivity Time accordance with the load response. Max.: 3.000
Voltage Restoration Time Sets the voltage restoration time constant if an impact load is added. Default: 0.050 s
S1-06 Constant at Impact Min.: 0.000 –
(3205) Impact Load Time Max.: 1.000
Output Phase Loss Level for Reduces the output phase loss level when Dynamic Noise Control is active. Default: 100.0%
S1-07 Dynamic Noise Control Min.: 10.0 –
(323C) DNC Outp Ph Loss Max.: 100.0
u S2: Programmable Run Timers

No.
Hex)
Sequence Timer 1 Start Sets the start time for timer 1. The value must be set less than or equal to S2-02. Default: 00:00
S2-01 Time Min.: 00:00 –
(3206) Tmr 1 Start Time
Max.: 24:00 <1>
Sets the stop time for timer 1. The value must be set greater than or equal to Default: 00:00
S2-02 Sequence Timer 1 Stop Time S2-01. Min.: 00:00
Tmr 1 Stop Time –
(3207)
Max.: 24:00 <1>
Sets the days for which sequence timer 1 is active.
0: Timer disabled 0: Timer disabled
1: Daily 1: Daily
2: Mon - Fri 2: Mon - Fri
3: Sat - Sun 3: Sat - Sun
Sequence Timer 1 Day 4: Monday 4: Monday
S2-03 Selection Default: 0
(3208) 5: Tuesday 5: Tuesday –
Tmr 1 Day Sel Range: 0 to 10
6: Wednesday 6: Wednesday
7: Thursday 7: Thursday
8: Friday 8: Friday
9: Saturday 9: Saturday
10: Sunday 10: Sunday
Sets the action that occurs when sequence timers 1 is active.
S2-04 Sequence Timer 1 Selection 0: Digital output only 0: Digital out only Default: 0
Tmr 1 Seq Sel 1: Run 1: Run –
(3209) Range: 0 to 2
2: Run - PI disable 2: Run - PI Disable
No.
Hex)
Selects the frequency reference source used for running the drive when
sequence timer 1 is active (only applicable when S2-04 is set to 1 or 2).
0: Operator (d1-01) 0: Operator (d1-01)
Sequence Timer 1 Reference 2: Operator (d1-03)
S2-05 Source 2: Operator (d1-03) Default: 0 –
(320A) Tmr 1 Ref Source 3: Operator (d1-04) 3: Operator (d1-04) Range: 0 to 7
4: Terminals 4: Terminals
5: Serial communication 5: Serial com
6: Option card 6: Option PCB
7: Pulse input
S2-06 Time Min.: 00:00 –
(320B) Tmr 2 Start Time
Max.: 24:00 <1>
Tmr 2 Stop Time –
(320C)
Max.: 24:00 <1>
1: Daily 1: Daily
S2-08 Selection Default: 0 –
(320D) Tmr 2 Day Sel 5: Tuesday 5: Tuesday Range: 0 to 10
8: Friday 8: Friday
Sets the action that occurs when sequence timer 2 is active.
(320E) Range: 0 to 2
(320F) Tmr 2 Ref Source 3: Operator (d1-04) 3: Operator (d1-04) Range: 0 to 7
7: Pulse input
S2-11 Time Min.: 00:00 –
Max.: 24:00 <1>
Tmr 3 Stop Time –
(3211)
Max.: 24:00 <1>
1: Daily 1: Daily
S2-13 Selection Default: 0
(3212) 5: Tuesday 5: Tuesday –
Tmr 3 Day Sel Range: 0 to 10
Parameter List
8: Friday 8: Friday
No.
Hex)
(3213) Range: 0 to 2
(3214) Tmr 3 Ref Source 3: Operator (d1-04) 3: Operator (d1-04) Range: 0 to 7
7: Pulse input
S2-16 Time Min.: 00:00 –
Max.: 24:00 <1>
Tmr 4 Stop Time –
(3216)
Max.: 24:00 <1>
1: Daily 1: Daily
S2-18 Selection Default: 0 –
(3217) Tmr 4 Day Sel 5: Tuesday 5: Tuesday Range: 0 to 10
8: Friday 8: Friday
(3218) Range: 0 to 2
S2-20 Source 2: Operator (d1-03) Default: 0
3: Operator (d1-04) 3: Operator (d1-04) –
(3219) Tmr 4 Ref Source Range: 0 to 7
7: Pulse input
<1> Setting the sequence timer start time to a higher value than the sequence timer stop time disables that sequence timer.
u S3: Secondary PI (PI2) Control

No.
Hex)
Determines when the secondary PI controller is enabled.
0: Disabled 0: Disabled
S3-01 Secondary PI Enable 1: Always 1: Always
(321A) Selection 2: Drive running 2: Drive running Default: 0 –
PI2 Enable Sel 3: Motor running 3: Motor running Range: 0 to 3
Note: Setting 3 does not run the motor at zero speed, baseblock, or in
DC injection.
S3-02 Sets the scale value of 100% PI input. Default: 10000
(321B) Secondary PI User Display
PI2 UsrDspMaxVal Min.: 0 –
Max.: 60000
Sets the decimal place display for secondary PI units.
S3-03 0: No decimal places 0: No Dec (XXXXX)
(321C) Secondary PI Display Digits 1: One decimal place Default: 2
PI2 UsrDspDigits 1: 1 Dec (XXXX.X) –
Range: 0 to 3
2: Two decimal places 2. 2 Dec (XXX.XX)
3: Three decimal places 3: 3 Dec (XX.XXX)
Sets the units for the secondary PI control function.
0: Inch of water (WC) 0: WC
1: Pounds per square inch (PSI) 1: PSI
2: Gallons per minute (GPM) 2: GPM
3: Degrees Fahrenheit (F) 3: °F
4: Cubic feet per minute (CFM) 4: CFM
5: Cubic meters per hour (CMH) 5: CMH
S3-04 Secondary PI Unit 6: Liters per hour (LPH) 6: LPH
(321D) Selection 7: Liters per second (LPS) 7: LPS Default: 15 –
PI2 Unit Sel Range: 0 to 15
8: Bar (Bar) 8: Bar
9: Pascals (Pa) 9: Pa
10: Degrees Celsius (C) 10: °C
11: Meters (Mtr) (Ft: Feet) 11: Mtr
12: Liters per minute (LPM) 12: LPM
13: Cubic meters per minute (CMM) 13: CMM
14: No unit 14: No unit
15: Percentage (%) 15: %
S3-05 Sets the secondary PI controller target value. Default: 0.00 <1>
(321E) Secondary PI Setpoint Value
PI2 Setpoint Min.: 0.00 –
Max.: 600.00 <2>
S3-06 Secondary PI Proportional Sets the proportional gain of the secondary PI controller. A setting of 0.00 Default: 1.00
(321F) Gain Setting disables P control. Min.: 0.00 –
PI2 Gain Max.: 25.00
S3-07 Secondary PI Integral Time Sets the integral time for the secondary PI controller. A setting of 0.0 s disables Default: 1.0 s
(3220) Setting integral control. Min.: 0.0 –
PI2 I Time Max.: 360.0
S3-08 Secondary PI Integral Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. Default: 100.0%
(3221) Setting Min.: 0.0 –
PI2 I Limit Max.: 100.0
S3-09 Secondary PI Output Upper Sets the maximum output possible from the secondary PI controller. Default: 100.0%
(3222) Limit Min.: 0.0 –
PI2 Upper Limit Max.: 100.0
S3-10 Secondary PI Output Lower Sets the minimum output possible from the secondary PI controller. Default: 0.00%
(3223) Limit Min.: -100.00 –
PI2 Lower Lim Max.: 100.00
Parameter List
S3-11 Secondary PI Output Level Sets the secondary PI controller output direction.
(3224) Selection 0: Normal Output 0: Normal Character (direct acting) Default: 0 –
PI2 Out Lvl Sel 1: Reverse Output 1: Rev Character (reverse acting) Range: 0, 1
No.
Hex)
S3-12 Selects the secondary PI controller output when disabled.
(3225) Secondary PI Disable Mode 0: No output (0%) 0: No output Default: 0
PI2 Disable Mode 1: Lower Limit (S3-10) 1: Lower Limit (S3-10) –
Range: 0 to 2
2: Setpoint 2: Setpoint
S3-13 Secondary PI Low Feedback Sets the secondary PI low feedback detection level. Default: 0.00 <1>
(3226) Detection Level Min.: 0.00 –
PI2 Low FB Lvl
Max.: 600.00 <2>
S3-14 Secondary PI Low Feedback Sets the secondary PI low feedback detection delay time in seconds. Default: 1.0 s
(3227) Detection Time Min.: 0.0 –
PI2 Low FB Time Max.: 25.5
S3-15 Secondary PI High Sets the secondary PI high feedback detection level. Default: 100.00 <1>
(3228) Feedback Level Min.: 0.00 –
PI2 High FB Lvl
Max.: 600.00 <2>
S3-16 Secondary PI High Sets the secondary PI high feedback detection delay time in seconds. Default: 1.0 s
(3229) Feedback Detection Time Min.: 0.0 –
PI2 High FB Tim Max.: 25.5
S3-17 Selects when secondary PI controller low and high feedback detection are
Secondary PI Feedback active.
(322A) Detection Selection Default: 0
0: Secondary PI enabled 0: PI2 Enabled –
PI2 FB Det Sel Range: 0, 1
1: Always 1: Always
<1> Unit is determined by S3-04.
<2> Upper limit is S3-02, decimal placeholder is determined by S3-03.
u S6: P1000 Protection

No.
Hex)
Emergency Override Speed Default: 0.00 Hz
S6-01 Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when S6-02 = 0. Min.: 0.00 –
(3236) E Override Speed
Max.: 240.00
Emergency Override Selects the emergency override speed source.
S6-02 Reference Selection 0: Use S6-01 Reference 0: Use S6-01 Ref Default: 0 –
(3237) E OverrideRefSel 1: Use Frequency Reference 1: Use Freq Ref Range: 0, 1
Output Phase Loss Level for Default: 100.0%

S6-07 Dynamic Noise Control Reduces the output phase loss level when Dynamic Noise Control is active. Min.: 10.0 –
(323C) DNC Outp Ph Loss Max.: 100.0
B.11 T: Motor Tuning
B.11 T: Motor Tuning

Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance.
u T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

No.
Hex)
2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode 3: Rotational Auto-Tuning for V/f Control (necessary for Energy Savings and Default: 2 –
(701) Selection Range: 2, 3
Speed Estimation Speed Search)
Sets the motor rated power as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: <1>
T1-02 Motor Rated Power Note: Use the following formula to convert horsepower into kilowatts: Min.: 0.00 kW –
(702)
1HP = 0.746 kW. Max.: 650.00 kW
Sets the motor rated voltage as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: 200.0 V
T1-03 <2>
Motor Rated Voltage –
(703) Min: 0.0
Max: 255.0 <2>
Sets the motor rated current as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: <1>
T1-04 Min.: 10% of drive
Motor Rated Current rated current –
(704)
Max.: 200% of
drive rated current
Default: 60.0 Hz
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency Sets the rated frequency of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Min.: 0.0 –
(705) Max.: 400.0
Sets the number of motor poles as specified on the motor nameplate. Default: 4
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles Min.: 2 –
(706) Max.: 48
Default: 1750 r/min
T1-07 Motor Base Speed Sets the rated speed of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Min.: 0 –
(707) Max.: 24000
Sets the iron loss for determining the Energy Saving coefficient. <3>
T1-11 The value is set to E2-10 (motor iron loss) set when the power is cycled. If Default: 14 W
Motor Iron Loss Min.: 0 –
(70B) T1-02 is changed, a default value appropriate for the motor capacity that was
entered will appear. Max.: 65535

<3> Default setting value differs depending on the motor code value and motor parameter settings.
Parameter List
B.12 U: Monitors
B.12 U: Monitors
Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other data concerning drive operation.
u U1: Operation Status Monitors

No. Analog Output
(Addr. Name Description Unit
Level
Hex)
U1-01 Monitors the frequency reference. Display units are determined by o1-03. 10 V: Max frequency
Frequency Reference 0.01 Hz
(40)
U1-02 Displays the output frequency. Display units are determined by o1-03.
Output Frequency 10 V: Max frequency 0.01 Hz
(41)
U1-03 Displays the output current. 10 V: Drive rated <1> <2>
Output Current
(42) current
U1-04 0: V/f Control No signal output
Control Method –
(43) available
U1-06 Output Voltage Reference Displays the output voltage. <3>
10 V: 200 Vrms 0.1 Vac
(45)
U1-07 <3>
DC Bus Voltage Displays the DC bus voltage. 10 V: 400 V 1 Vdc
(46)
U1-08 Displays the output power (this value is calculated internally). 10 V: Drive capacity <4>
Output Power
(47) (motor capacity) kW
Displays the input terminal status.
U1 - 10= 00000000
1 Digital input 1
(terminal S1 enabled)
1 Digital input 2
1 Digital input 3
U1-10 1 Digital input 4 No signal output
Input Terminal Status –
(49) (terminal S4 enabled) available
1 Digital input 5
1 Digital input 6
1 Digital input 7
1 Digital input 8
Displays the output terminal status.

U1 - 11= 00000000
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
(terminal M1-M2)
U1-11 1 Multi-Function
Digital Output No signal output
Output Terminal Status –
(4A) (terminal M3-M4) available
1 Multi-Function
Digital Output
(terminal MD-ME-MF)
0 Not Used
1 Fault Relay
(terminal MA-MC closed
MA-MC open)
B.12 U: Monitors
No. Analog Output

Level
Hex)
Verifies the drive operation status.
U1 - 12= 00000000
1 During run
1 During zero-speed
1 During REV
U1-12 1 During fault reset No signal output
Drive Status –
(4B) signal input available
1 During speed agree
1 Drive ready
1 During alarm
detection
1 During fault detection
U1-13 Displays the signal level to analog input terminal A1.
Terminal A1 Input Level 10 V: 100% 0.1%
(4E)
(4F)
(50)
U1-16 Output Frequency after Displays output frequency with ramp time and S-curves. Units determined 10 V: Max frequency 0.01 Hz
(53) Soft Starter by o1-03.
U1-18 Displays the parameter number that caused the oPE02 operation error. No signal output
oPE Fault Parameter –
(61) available
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error.
U1 - 19= 00000000
1 CRC Error
1 Data Length Error
U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus 0 Not Used No signal output –
(66) Error Code 1 Parity Error available
1 Overrun Error
1 Framing Error
1 Timed Out
0 Not Used
U1-24 Displays the frequency to pulse train input terminal RP.
Input Pulse Monitor Determined by H6-02 1 Hz
(7D)
U1-25 Software Number (Flash) FLASH ID No signal output –
(4D) available
U1-26 ROM ID No signal output
Software No. (ROM) –
(5B) available
U1-29 No signal output
Software No. (PWM) PWM ID –
(7AA) available
Time-Hour/Minute Displays the current time (Hours and Minutes). –
(851) available
Date – Year Displays the current year. –
(852) available
Date – Month/Day Displays the current date (Month and Date). –
(853) available
Displays the current date of the week.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
U1-78 2: Tuesday No signal output
Date – Week Day –
(854) 3: Wednesday available
Parameter List
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
<1> The number of decimal places in the parameter value depends on the drive model and the ND selection. This value has two decimal places (0.01
A) if the drive is set for a maximum applicable motor capacity up to and including 11 kW, and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the maximum applicable
motor capacity is higher than 11 kW.
<2> When reading the value of this monitor via MEMOBUS/Modbus, a value of 8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current. B
B.12 U: Monitors
<4> The display resolution depends on the ND selection. This value has two decimal places (0.01 kW) if the drive is set for a maximum applicable
motor capacity up to and including 11 kW, and one decimal place (0.1 kW) if the maximum applicable motor capacity is higher than 11 kW.
u U2: Fault Trace

No. Analog Output
Level
Hex)
U2-01 Displays the current fault. No signal output
Current Fault –
(80) available
U2-02 Displays the previous fault. No signal output
Previous Fault –
(81) available
U2-03 Frequency Reference at Displays the frequency reference at the previous fault. No signal output 0.01 Hz
(82) Previous Fault available
U2-04 Output Frequency at Displays the output frequency at the previous fault. No signal output 0.01 Hz
U2-05 Output Current at Previous Displays the output current at the previous fault. No signal output <1> <2>
(84) Fault available
U2-07 Output Voltage at Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. No signal output 0.1 Vac
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage at Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. No signal output 1 Vdc
U2-09 Output Power at Previous Displays the output power at the previous fault. No signal output 0.1 kW
(88) Fault available
U2-11 Input Terminal Status at Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in No signal output –
(8A) Previous Fault U1-10. available
U2-12 Output Terminal Status at Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displays the same status No signal output –
(8B) Previous Fault displayed in U1-11. available
U2-13 Drive Operation Status at Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous fault. Displays the No signal output –
(8C) Previous Fault same status displayed in U1-12. available
U2-14 Cumulative Operation Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. No signal output 1h
(8D) Time at Previous Fault available
Soft Starter Speed Displays the speed reference for the soft starter at the previous fault.
Reference at Previous 0.01 Hz
(7E0) available
Fault
U2-20 Heatsink Temperature at Displays the temperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault No signal output 1 °C
(8E) Previous Fault occurred. available
U2-27 Motor Temperature at Displays the temperature of the motor when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output 1 °C
(7FA) Previous Fault (NTC) available
Date Year at Previous
U2-30 Fault Displays the year when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3008) Date Year YYYY available
Date Month and Day at

U2-31 Previous Fault Displays the date and day when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3009) Date Mo Day MMDD available
Time Hours and Minutes at

U2-32 Previous Fault Displays the time when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(300A) Time Hr Min HHMM available
<1> The number of decimal places in the parameter value depends on the drive model and the ND selection. This value has two decimal places (0.01
A) if the drive is set for a maximum applicable motor capacity up to and including 11 kW, and one decimal place (0.1 A) if the maximum applicable
motor capacity is higher than 11 kW.
<2> When reading the value of this monitor via MEMOBUS/Modbus, a value of 8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current.
B.12 U: Monitors
u U3: Fault History

No. Analog Output
Level
Hex)
U3-01 to Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults.
U3-04 First to 4th Most Recent No signal output
(90 to 93 –
Fault available
(800 to
803))
U3-05 to Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults.
U3-10 5th to 10th Most Recent After ten faults, data for the oldest fault is deleted. The most recent fault No signal output –
(804 to Fault appears in U3-01, with the next most recent fault appearing in U3-02. The available
809) data is moved to the next monitor parameter each time a fault occurs.
U3-11 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most
U3-14 Cumulative Operation recent faults occurred. No signal output
(94 to 97 Time at 1st to 4th Most 1h
available
(80A to Recent Fault
80D))
U3-15 to Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most
Cumulative Operation
U3-20 recent faults occurred. No signal output
Time at 5th to 10th Most 1h
(80E to available
Recent Fault
813)
Date Year at Most Recent
U3-21 Fault Displays the year when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(300B) Fault 1 YYYY available

U3-22 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the most recent faults occurred. No signal output –
(300C) Fault 1 MMDD available
Time Hours and Minutes

U3-23 at Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(300D) Fault 1 HHMM available
Date Year at 2nd Most

U3-24 Recent Fault Displays the year when the second most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(300E) Fault 2 YYYY available

U3-25 2nd Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the second most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(300F) Fault 2 MMDD available

U3-26 at 2nd Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the second most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3010) Fault 2 HHMM available
Date Year at 3rd Most

U3-27 Recent Fault Displays the year when the most third recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3011) Fault 3 YYYY available
Date Month and Day at 3rd

U3-28 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the third most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3012) Fault 3 MMDD available

U3-29 at 3rd Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the third most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
Date Year at 4th Most

U3-30 Recent Fault Displays the year when the fourth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
Date Month and Day at 4th

U3-31 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the fourth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-32 at 4th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the fourth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3016 Fault 4 HHMM available
Parameter List

U3-33 Recent Fault Displays the year when the fifth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-34 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the fifth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(3018) available
Fault 5 MMDD
B
B.12 U: Monitors
No. Analog Output

Level
Hex)
U3-35 at 5th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the fifth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-36 Recent Fault Displays the year when the sixth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301A) Fault 6 YYYY available
Date Month and Day a 6th

U3-37 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the sixth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301B) Fault 6 MMDD available

U3-38 at 6th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the most sixth recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301C) Fault 6 HHMM available

U3-39 Recent Fault Displays the year when the most seventh recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301D) Fault 7 YYYY available

U3-40 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the seventh most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301E) Fault 7 MMDD available

U3-41 at 7th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the seventh most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
(301F) Fault 7 HHMM available

U3-42 Recent Fault Displays the year when the eighth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
Date Month and Day 8th at

U3-43 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the eighth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-44 at 8th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the eighth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-45 Recent Fault Displays the year when the ninth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-46 Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the ninth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-47 at 9th Most Recent Fault Displays the time when the ninth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-48 Recent Fault Displays the year when the tenth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-49 10th Most Recent Fault Displays the date and day when the tenth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –

U3-50 at 10th Most Recent Displays the time when the tenth most recent fault occurred. No signal output –
u U4: Maintenance Monitors

No. Analog Output
Level
Hex)
Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The value for the
cumulative operation time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use
U4-01 Cumulative Operation No signal output
parameter o4-02 to determine if the operation time should start as soon as 1h
(4C) Time available
the power is switched on or only while the Run command is present. The
maximum number displayed is 99999, after which the value is reset to 0.
Displays the number of times the Run command is entered. Reset the
U4-02 Number of Run No signal output
number of Run commands using parameter o4-13. This value will reset to 1 Time
(75) Commands available
0 and start counting again after reaching 65535.
B.12 U: Monitors
No. Analog Output

Level
Hex)
Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling fan. The default value
U4-03 Cooling Fan Operation No signal output
for the fan operation time is reset in parameter o4-03. This value will reset 1h
(67) Time available
to 0 and start counting again after reaching 99999.
Displays main cooling fan usage time as a percentage of its expected
Cooling Fan Maintenance performance life. Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this monitor. 1%
(7E) available
Replace the fan when this monitor reaches 90%.
Displays main circuit capacitor usage time as a percentage of their expected
Capacitor Maintenance performance life. Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this monitor. 1%
(7C) available
Replace the capacitor when this monitor reaches 90%.
Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of
U4-06 Soft Charge Bypass Relay its estimated performance life. Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this No signal output 1%
(7D6) Maintenance monitor. available
Replace the soft charge bypass relay when this monitor reaches 90%.
Displays IGBT usage time as a percentage of the expected performance
IGBT Maintenance life. Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset this monitor. 1%
(7D7) available
Replace the IGBT when this monitor reaches 90%.
U4-08 Displays the heatsink temperature.
Heatsink Temperature 10 V: 100 °C 1 °C
(68)
U4-09 Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is working No signal output
LED Check –
(5E) properly. available
U4-10 Monitors the drive output power. The value is shown as a 9-digit number No signal output
kWh, Lower 4 Digits 1 kWh
(5C) displayed across two monitor parameters, U4-10 and U4-11. available
Example:
U4-11 12345678.9 kWh is displayed as: No signal output
kWh, Upper 5 Digits U4-10: 678.9 kWh 1 MWh
(5D) available
U4-11: 12345 MWh
U4-13 Displays the highest current value that occurred during run. No signal output 0.01 A
Peak Hold Current
(7CF) available <1>
U4-14 Peak Hold Output Displays the output frequency when the current value shown in U4-13 No signal output 0.01 Hz
(7D0) Frequency occurred. available
U4-16 Motor Overload Estimate Shows the value of the motor overload detection accumulator. 100% is 10 V: 100% 0.1%
(7D8) (oL1) equal to the oL1 detection level.
Displays the source for the frequency reference as XY-nn.
X: indicates which reference is used:
1 = Reference 1 (b1-01)
Y-nn: indicates the reference source
0-01 = Digital operator
U4-18 Frequency Reference No signal output
1-01 = Analog (terminal A1) –
(7DA) Source Selection available
1-02 = Analog (terminal A2)
1-03 = Analog (terminal A3)
2-02 to 17 = Multi-step speed (d1-02 to 17)
3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4-01 = Communication option card
5-01 = Pulse input
Frequency Reference from Displays the frequency reference provided by MEMOBUS/Modbus
MEMOBUS/Modbus (decimal). 0.01%
(7DB) available
Comm.
U4-20 Option Frequency Displays the frequency reference input by an option card (decimal). No signal output –
(7DC) Reference available
Parameter List
B.12 U: Monitors
No. Analog Output

Level
Hex)
Displays the source for the Run command as XY-nn.
X: Indicates which Run source is used:
Y: Input power supply data
0 = Digital operator
1 = External terminals
3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
4 = Communication option card
nn: Run command limit status data
U4-21 Run Command Source 00: No limit status. No signal output –
(7DD) Selection 01: Run command was left on when stopped in the PRG mode available
02: Run command was left on when switching from LOCAL to REMOTE
operation
03: Waiting for soft charge bypass contactor after power up (Uv or Uv1
flashes after 10 s)
04: Waiting for “Run command prohibited” time period to end
05: Fast Stop (digital input, digital operator)
06: b1-17 (Run command given at power-up)
07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer
08: Frequency reference is below minimal reference during baseblock
09: Waiting for Enter command
MEMOBUS/Modbus Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications communications register no. 0001H as a four-digit hexadecimal number. –
(7DE) available
Reference
U4-23 Communication Option Displays drive control data set by an option card as a four-digit hexadecimal No signal output –
(7DF) Card Reference number. available
Displays the motor temperature (NTC).
U4-32 Motor Temperature (NTC) U4-32 will display “20 °C” when a multi-function analog input is not set 200 °C 1 °C
(7FB)
for motor thermistor input (H1-oo = 17H).
U4-37 oH Alarm Location No signal output
Displays the module where the oH alarm occurred as a binary number. –
(1044) Monitor available
U4-38 FAn Alarm Location No signal output
Displays the module where the FAn alarm occurred as a binary number. –
U4-39 voF Alarm Location No signal output
Displays the module where the voF alarm occurred as a binary number. –
<1> When reading the value of this monitor via MEMOBUS/Modbus, a value of 8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current.
u U5: PID Monitors

No. Analog Output
Level
Hex)
U5-01 Displays the PID feedback value. 0.01%
PID Feedback 1 10 V: 100%
(57) <1>
U5-02 Displays the amount of PID input (deviation between PID setpoint and
PID Input 10 V: 100% 0.01%
(63) feedback).
U5-03 Displays PID control output.
PID Output 10 V: 100% 0.01%
(64)
U5-04 Displays the PID setpoint. 0.01%
PID Setpoint 10 V: 100%
(65) <1>
U5-05 Displays the 2nd PID feedback value if differential feedback is used (H3-
PID Differential Feedback 10 V: 100% 0.01%
(7D2) oo = 16).
Displays the difference of both feedback values if differential feedback is
U5-06 PID Adjusted Feedback used (U5-01 - U5-05). If differential feedback is not used, then U5-01 and 10 V: 100% 0.01%
(7D3)
U5-06 will be the same.
U5-14 PI Output 2 Upper 4 Digits Displays the custom PI output. No signal output 1
PI Output2 U4 U5-14 shows the upper 4 digits while U5-15 shows the lower 4 digits. <2>
(86B) Monitors are scaled by b5-43 and b5-44 available
U5-15 PI Output 2 Lower 4 Digits Displays the custom PI output. No signal output 0.01
PI Output2 L4 U5-14 shows the upper 4 digits while U5-15 shows the lower 4 digits. <2>
(86C) Monitors are scaled by b5-43 and b5-44. available
B.12 U: Monitors
No. Analog Output

Level
Hex)
U5-17 PI2 Setpoint <3>
PI2 Setpoint Displays the secondary PI setpoint. Dependent upon S3-02
(86E)
U5-18 PI2 Feedback <3>
PI2 Feedback Displays the secondary PI feedback value. Dependent upon S3-02
(86F)
U5-19 PI2 Input <3>
PI2 Input Displays the secondary PI input (deviation between PI target and feedback). Dependent upon S3-02
(870)
U5-20 PI2 Output <3>
PI2 Output Displays the secondary PI control output. Dependent upon S3-02
(871)
U5-30 Time Hr Min HHMM No signal output
Time Hr Min HHMM Displays the current time (Hours and Minutes). 1
(3000) available
U5-31 Date Year No signal output
Date Year Displays the current year. 1
(3001) available
U5-32 Date Mo Day MMDD No signal output
Date Mo Day MMDD Displays the current date (Month and Day). 1
(3002) available
Displays the current date of the week.
0: Sunday 0: Sunday
1: Monday 1: Monday
U5-33 Date Week 000W 2: Tuesday 2: Tuesday No signal output
Date Week 3: Wednesday 3: Wednesday 1
(3003) available
5: Friday 5: Friday
U5-99 PID Setpoint Command No signal output 0.01%
PID Setpoint Cmd Displays the PID Setpoint commanded by the source. <1>
(1599) available
<1> Unit, range and resolution is determined by b5-20, b5-38, b5-39, and b5-46
<2> Unit is determined by b5-41
<3> Unit is determined by S3-04.
u U6: Operation Status Monitors

No. Analog Output
Level
Hex)
U6-01 Motor Secondary Current Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). Motor rated 10 V: Motor secondary 0.1%
(51) (Iq) secondary current is 100%. rated current
Note: Fault histories are not kept when CPF00, CPF01, CPF06, CPF24, oFA00, oFb00, oFC00, Uv1, Uv2, or Uv3 occur.
Parameter List
B.12 U: Monitors
Appendix: C
This appendix explains the guidelines and criteria for maintaining CE and UL standards.
C.1 EUROPEAN STANDARDS..................................................................................232

C.2 UL AND CSA STANDARDS................................................................................239
C.1 European Standards
Figure C.1 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations. It is required for engaging in business
and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics
manufacturers, and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC
• EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC
Devices used in combination with this drive must also be CE certified and display the CE mark. When using drives displaying
the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with CE
standards. After setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European standards.
Note: 600 V class drives (models 5oooooo) are not compliant with European Standards.
u CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

This drive has been tested according to European standard IEC61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive with other
devices:
n Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC664.
n Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to maintain compliance with UL508C.
Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred. Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table C.1.
NOTICE: If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices
to identify the cause. Contact Yaskawa before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
Table C.1 Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection
Fuse Type
Drive Model Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model Fuse Ampere Rating (A)
Three-Phase 200 V Class
2A0004 FWH-70B 70
2A0006 FWH-70B 70
2A0008 FWH-70B 70
2A0010 FWH-70B 70
2A0012 FWH-70B 70
2A0018 FWH-90B 90
2A0021 FWH-90B 90
2A0030 FWH-100B 100
2A0040 FWH-200B 200
2A0056 FWH-200B 200
2A0069 FWH-200B 200
2A0081 FWH-300A 300
2A0110 FWH-300A 300
2A0138 FWH-350A 350
Fuse Type
2A0169 FWH-400A 400
2A0211 FWH-400A 400
2A0250 FWH-600A 600
2A0312 FWH-700A 700
2A0360 FWH-800A 800
2A0415 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0002 FWH-40B 40
4A0004 FWH-50B 50
4A0005 FWH-70B 70
4A0007 FWH-70B 70
4A0009 FWH-90B 90
4A0011 FWH-90B 90
4A0018 FWH-80B 80
4A0023 FWH-100B 100
4A0031 FWH-125B 125
4A0038 FWH-200B 200
4A0044 FWH-250A 250
4A0058 FWH-250A 250
4A0072 FWH-250A 250
4A0088 FWH-250A 250
4A0103 FWH-250A 250
4A0139 FWH-350A 350
4A0165 FWH-400A 400
4A0208 FWH-500A 500
4A0250 FWH-600A 600
4A0296 FWH-700A 700
4A0362 FWH-800A 800
4A0414 FWH-800A 800
4A0515 FWH-1000A 1000
4A0675 FWH-1200A 1200
5A0003 <1> FWP-50B 50
5A0004 <1> FWP-50B 50
5A0006 <1> FWP-60B 60
5A0009 <1> FWP-60B 60
5A0011 <1> FWP-70B 70
5A0017 <1> FWP-100B 100
5A0022 <1> FWP-100B 100
5A0027 <1> FWP-125A 125
5A0032 <1> FWP-125A 125
5A0041 <1> FWP-175A 175

5A0052 <1> FWP-175A 175
5A0062 <1> FWP-250A 250
5A0077 <1> FWP-250A 250
5A0099 <1> FWP-250A 250
C
Fuse Type
5A0125 <1> FWP-350A 350
5A0145 <1> FWP-350A 350
5A0192 <1> FWP-600A 600
5A0242 <1> FWP-600A 600
<1> 600 V class drives are not compliant with European Standards.
n Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP00/Open Type enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering the drive
from above or below.
n Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the drive in other types of grounded
systems, contact your Yaskawa representative for instructions.
u EMC Guidelines Compliance

This drive is tested according to European standards EN61800-3: 2004.
n EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer to EMC Filters on page 237
for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this drive
also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side.
B
A D C
U/T1 U
V/T2 V
M
W/T3 W
E
A – Drive D – Metal conduit
B – 10 m max cable length between E – Ground wire should be as short as
drive and motor possible.
C – Motor
Figure C.2 Installation Method
5. Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Because the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA in models 4A0414 to 4A1200, IEC 61800-5-1
states that either the power supply must be automatically disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor,
or a protective earthing conductor with a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
C B
A – Braided shield cable C – Cable clamp (conductive)
B – Metal panel
Figure C.3 Ground Area
6. Connect a DC link choke to minimize harmonic distortion. Refer to DC Link Chokes for EN 61000-3-2
Compliance on page 238.
C
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class
D
B C
K
E
I F
H
G
A – Make sure the ground wire is G – Motor

grounded H – Cable shield ground
B – Grounding surface (remove any I – Cable clamp
paint or sealant) J – Ground plate (scrape off any
C – Metal plate visible paint)
D – Enclosure panel K – EMC noise filter
E – Drive
F – Motor cable (braided shield cable,
max. 10 m)
Figure C.4 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
n EMC Filters
Install the drive with the EMC filters listed in Table C.2 to comply with the EN61800-3 requirements.
Table C.2 EN61800-3 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive Model Dimensions
Type Rated Current (A) Weight (lb) Y x X (in) Figure
[W x D x H] (in)
2A0004
2A0006 FS5972-10-07 10 2.6 5.6 × 1.8 × 13.0 4.5 × 12.3
2A0008
2A0010
FS5972-18-07 18 2.9 5.6 × 1.8 × 13.0 4.5 × 12.3
2A0012
1
2A0018
2A0021 FS5972-35-07 35 4.6 8.1 × 2.0 × 14.0 6.9 × 13.2
2A0030
2A0040
FS5972-60-07 60 8.8 9.3 × 2.6 × 16.1 8.1 × 15.4
2A0056
2A0069
FS5972-100-35 100 7.5 3.5 × 5.9 × 13.0 2.6 × 10.0
2A0081
2A0110
FS5972-170-40 170 13.2 4.7 × 6.7 × 17.8 4.0 × 14.4 2
2A0138
2A0169
FS5972-250-37 250 25.8 5.1 × 9.5 × 24.0 3.5 × 19.6
2A0211
2A0250
FS5972-410-99 410 23.1 10.2 × 4.5 × 15.2 9.3 × 4.7
2A0312
3
2A0360
FS5972-600-99 600 24.3 10.2 × 5.3 × 15.2 9.3 × 4.7
2A0415
4A0002
4A0004
FS5972-10-07 10 2.7 5.6 × 1.8 × 13.0 4.5 × 12.3
4A0005
4A0007
4A0009
FS5972-18-07 18 2.9 5.6 × 1.8 × 13.0 4.5 × 12.3
4A0011
1
4A0018
4A0023 FS5972-35-07 35 4.6 8.1 × 2.0 × 14.0 6.9 × 13.2
4A0031
4A0038
4A0044 FS5972-60-07 60 8.8 9.3 × 2.6 × 16.1 8.0 × 15.4
4A0058
4A0072
FS5972-100-35 100 16.5 3.5 × 5.9 × 13.0 2.6 × 10.0
4A0088
4A0103
2
4A0139 FS5972-170-35 170 10.4 4.7 × 6.7 × 17.8 4.0 × 14.4
4A0165
4A0208 FS5972-250-37 250 25.8 5.1 × 9.5 × 24.0 3.5 × 19.6
4A0250
4A0296 FS5972-410-99 410 23.1 10.2 × 4.5 × 15.2 9.3 × 4.7

4A0362
3
4A0414
FS5972-600-99 600 24.3 10.2 × 5.3 × 15.2 9.3 × 4.7
4A0515
4A0675 FS5972-800-99 800 69.4 11.8 × 6.3 × 28.2 10.8 × 8.3
C
W
D Y W D
Y
X
H
X
Figure 1
Figure 2
W
Y
H
X
Figure 3
Figure C.5 EMC Filter Dimensions
n DC Link Chokes for EN 61000-3-2 Compliance

Table C.3 DC Link Chokes for Harmonic Reduction
DC Link Chokes
Drive Model
Model Rating
200 V Three-Phase Units
2A0004 5.4 A
UZDA-B
2A0006 8 mH
400 V Three-Phase Units
4A0002 3.2 A
UZDA-B
4A0004 28 mH
Note: DC link chokes are not required for other models to comply with EMC.
C.2 UL and CSA Standards

u UL Standards Compliance
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. It indicates that UL has performed product testing and
evaluation, and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to receive UL
certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure C.6 UL/cUL Mark
This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. The conditions described
below must be met to maintain compliance when using this drive in combination with other equipment:
n Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution degree 2 (UL standard).
n Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. To maintain UL/cUL approval, UL-Listed
closed-loop crimp terminals are specifically required when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models 2A0110 to
2A0415, 4A0058 to 4A0675, and 5A0041 to 5A0242. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for
crimping. Refer to Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size on page 239 for closed-loop crimp terminal recommendations.
Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations
Yaskawa recommends crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP (or equivalent) for the insulation cap. Table C.4 matches
the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Yaskawa-recommended crimp terminals, tools, and insulation caps. Refer to
the appropriate Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size for your drive model. Place
orders with a Yaskawa representative or the Yaskawa sales department.
The closed-loop crimp terminal sizes and values listed in Table C.4 are Yaskawa recommendations.
Wire gauge values shown in bold italic are the recommended values. Refer to local codes for proper selections.
Table C.4 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size
Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil) Crimp Tool Insulation
Screw Terminal
Drive Model Size Model Cap Model Code <1>
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Machine No. Die Jaw No.
Number
200 V Class
2A0004 14 R2-4 TP-003 100-054-028
2A0006 12 M4 YA-4 AD-900
2A0008 R5.5-4 TP-005 100-054-029
2A0010 10
14 14 R2-4 TP-003 100-054-028
2A0012 12 12 M4 YA-4 AD-900
R5.5-4 TP-005 100-054-029
10
– 14 R2-4 TP-003 100-054-028
2A0018 12 M4 YA-4 AD-900
R5.5-4 TP-005 100-054-029
10
12
2A0021 M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
10
10 R5.5-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
2A0030 8 M4 8-4 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
6 14-NK4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033
C

Screw Terminal
Drive Model
Size Model
Cap Model Code <1>
Number
8 8 8-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
2A0040 M4 YA-4
6 6 14-NK4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033
6 R14-6 AD-952 TP-014 100-051-261
2A0056 M6 YA-5
4 R22-6 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-262
4 R22-8 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263
2A0069 M8 YA-5
3 R38-8 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
3
2A0081 M8 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
2
3
2 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
2A0110 M8
1
1/0 R60-8 YA-5 AD-955 TP-060 100-051-265
1 R38-10 TD-321, 100-061-114
TP-060
1/0 R60-10 YF-1 TD-311 100-051-266
2A0138 M10 YET-300-1
TD-323,
2/0 70-10 TP-080 100-054-036
TD-312
2/0 – 70-10 TD-323, 100-054-036
TP-080
3/0 80-10 YF-1 TD-312 100-051-267
2A0169 M10 YET-300-1
TD-324,
4/0 R100-10 TP-100 100-051-269
TD-312
TD-321,
1/0 × 2P R60-10 TP-060 100-051-266
YF-1 TD-311
2A0211 M10 YET-300-1 TD-323,
2/0 × 2P 70-10 TP-080 100-054-036
TD-312
TD-323,
3/0 × 2P 80-L12 TP-080 100-051-558
TD-312
TD-324,
4/0 × 2P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
YF-1 TD-312
2A0250 M12 YET-300-1
– 250 × 2P 150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
TD-325,
250 –
R150-12 TD-313 TP-150 100-051-273
300
TD-323,
3/0 × 2P 3/0 × 2P 80-L12 TP-080 100-051-558
TD-312
YF-1 TD-324,
2A0312 4/0 × 2P 4/0 × 2P M12 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
YET-300-1 TD-312
250 × 2P TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P TD-313
TD-324,
4/0 × 2P 4/0 × 2P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
TD-312
250 × 2P 250 × 2P TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P TD-313
YF-1
2A0360 M12
350 × 2P 180-L12 YET-300-1 TD-327, 100-066-688
TP-200
400 × 2P 200-L12 TD-314 100-051-564
500 × 2P TD-328,
325-12 TP-325 100-051-277
600 600 × 2P TD-315
250 × 2P – TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P 300 × 2P TD-313
350 × 2P 350 × 2P 180-L12 YF-1 TD-327, 100-066-688
2A0415 M12 TP-200
400 × 2P 200-L12 YET-300-1 TD-314 100-051-564
500 × 2P TD-328,
325-12 TP-325 100-051-277
600 × 2P TD-315

Screw Terminal
Drive Model
Size Model
Cap Model Code <1>
Number
400 V Class
4A0002 14 R2-4 TP-003 100-054-028
4A0004
4A0005 12 M4 YA-4 AD-900
4A0007 R5.5-4 TP-005 100-054-029
4A0009 10
14 14 R2-4 TP-003 100-054-028

4A0011 12 12 M4 YA-4 AD-900
R5.5-4 TP-005 100-054-029
10
12
R5.5-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
10
4A0018 M4 YA-4
8 8-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
6 14-NK4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033
10 R5.5-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029
4A0023 8 M4 8-4 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031
6 14-NK4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033
– 10 R5.5-5 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-030
4A0031 8 M5 R8-5 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-032
6 R14-5 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-034
8 8 R8-5 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-032
4A0038 M5 YA-4
6 6 R14-5 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-034
6 R14-6 AD-952 TP-014 100-051-261
4A0044 M6 YA-5
4 R22-6 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-262
6 R14-8 AD-952 TP-014 100-054-035
4A0058 M8 YA-5
4 R22-8 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263
4 R22-8 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263
4A0072 M8 YA-5
3 R38-8 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
3
2 R38-8 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
4A0088 M8 YA-5
1
1/0 R60-8 AD-955 TP-060 100-051-265
2
R38-8 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264
4A0103 1 1 M8 YA-5
1/0 1/0 R60-8 AD-955 TP-060 100-051-265
TD-321,
1/0 R60-10 TP-060 100-051-266
TD-311
2/0 2/0 70-10 YF-1 TD-323, 100-054-036
4A0139 M10 TP-080
3/0 3/0 80-10 YET-300-1 TD-312 100-051-267
TD-324,
4/0 R100-10 TP-100 100-051-269
TD-312
TD-323,
3/0 80-10 TP-080 100-051-267
YF-1 TD-312
4A0165 M10 YET-300-1 TD-324,
4/0 R100-10 TP-100 100-051-269
TD-312
2 × 2P TD-224,
38-L10 TP-038 100-051-556
1 × 2P TD-212
TD-227,
3/0 × 2P 80-L10 TP-080 100-051-557
YF-1 TD-214
4A0208 M10 YET-150-1 TD-228,
4/0 R100-10 TP-100 100-051-269
TD-214
250 TD-229,
R150-10 TP-150 100-051-272
300 TD-215
C

Screw Terminal
Drive Model
Size Model
Cap Model Code <1>
Number
TD-224,
1 × 2P – 38-L10 TP-038 100-051-556
TD-212
TD-227,
3/0 × 2P 80-L10 TP-080 100-051-557
TD-214
YF-1
YET-150-1 TD-228,
4/0 × 2P 100-L10 TP-100 100-051-559
TD-214
4A0250 250 × 2P M10 150-L10 TD-229, TP-150 100-051-561
300 R150-10 TD-215 TP-150 100-051-272
350 180-10 TD-327, 100-066-687
TP-200
400 200-10 TD-314 100-051-563
YF-1
500 YET-300-1
TD-328,
325-10 TP-325 100-051-565
600 TD-315
TD-323,
3/0 × 2P 80-L12 TP-080 100-051-558
TD-312
TD-324,
4/0 × 2P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
TD-312
250 × 2P TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P YF-1 TD-313
4A0296 M12 YET-300-1
– 350 × 2P 180-L12 100-066-688
TD-327,
350 – 180-12 TP-200 100-066-689
TD-314
400 R200-12 100-051-275
500 TD-328,
325-12 TP-325 100-051-277
600 TD-315
TD-323,
3/0 × 2P 80-L12 TP-080 100-051-558
TD-312
TD-324,
4/0 × 2P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
TD-312
250 × 2P TD-325,
150-L12 YF-1 TP-150 100-051-562
4A0362 300 × 2P M12 TD-313
YET-300-1
350 × 2P 180-L12 TD-327, 100-066-688
TP-200
400 × 2P 200-L12 TD-314 100-051-564
500 TD-328,
325-12 TP-325 100-051-277
600 TD-315
TD-324,
4/0 × 2P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
TD-312
YF-1
4A0414 M12
250 × 2P YET-300-1 TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P TD-313
TD-323,
3/0 × 4P 3/0 × 4P 80-L12 TP-080 100-051-558
TD-312
YF-1 TD-324,
4A0515 4/0 × 4P 4/0 × 4P M12 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
YET-300-1 TD-312
250 × 4P TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 2P TD-313
TD-324,
4/0 × 4P 100-L12 TP-100 100-051-560
TD-312
YF-1
4A0675 M12
250 × 4P YET-300-1 TD-325,
150-L12 TP-150 100-051-562
300 × 4P TD-313
<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.
Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should
order two sets of [100-051-272].
Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 2P for both input and output require two sets for input terminals and two sets for output terminals, so the user
should order four sets of [100-051-560].
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowable
temperature of 75 °C 600 Vac UL-approved vinyl-sheathed insulation.
Input Fuse Installation

Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to maintain compliance with UL508C.
Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred. Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table C.5.
Table C.5 Factory Recommended AC Drive Branch Circuit Protection (Normal Duty)
Bussman Semi-
MCCB Rating Time Delay Fuse Non-time
Nominal Delay
AC Drive Input conductor Fuse
Drive Model Output Power Amps Fuse Rating
Amps <1> Rating Amps <2> Rating (Fuse
HP Amps <3> Ampere) <4>
200 V Class
2A0004 0.75 3.9 15 6.25 10 FWH-70B (70)
2A0006 1 - 1.5 7.3 15 12 20 FWH-70B (70)
2A0008 2 8.8 15 15 25 FWH-70B (70)
2A0010 3 10.8 20 17.5 30 FWH-70B (70)
2A0012 3 13.9 25 20 40 FWH-70B (70)
2A0018 5 18.5 35 30 50 FWH-90B(90)
2A0021 7.5 24 45 40 70 FWH-90B(90)
2A0030 10 37 60 60 110 FWH-100B (100)
2A0040 15 52 100 90 150 FWH-200B (200)
2A0056 20 68 125 110 200 FWH-200B (200)
2A0069 25 80 150 125 225 FWH-200B (200)
2A0081 30 96 175 150 275 FWH-300A (300)
2A0110 40 111 200 175 300 FWH-300A (300)
2A0138 50 136 250 225 400 FWH-350A (350)
2A0169 60 164 300 250 450 FWH-400A (400)
2A0211 75 200 400 350 600 FWH-400A (400)
2A0250 100 271 500 450 800 FWH-600A (600)
2A0312 125 324 600 500 800 FWH-700A (700)
2A0360 150 394 700 600 1000 <5> FWH-800A (800)
2A0415 175 471 900 800 1400 <5> FWH-1000A (1000)
400 V Class
4A0002 1 2.1 15 3.5 6 FWH-40B (40)
4A0004 2 4.3 15 7.5 12 FWH-50B (50)
4A0005 3 5.9 15 10 17.5 FWH-70B (70)
4A0007 3 8.1 15 12 20 FWH-70B (70)
4A0009 5 9.4 15 15 25 FWH-90B (90)
4A0011 7.5 14 25 20 40 FWH-90B (90)
4A0018 10 20 40 35 60 FWH-80B (80)
4A0023 15 24 45 40 70 FWH-100B (100)
4A0031 20 38 75 60 110 FWH-125B (125)
4A0038 25 44 75 75 125 FWH-200B (200)
4A0044 30 52 100 90 150 FWH-250A (250)
4A0058 40 58 100 100 150 FWH-250A (250)
4A0072 50 71 125 110 200 FWH-250A (250)
4A0088 60 86 150 150 250 FWH-250A (250)
4A0103 75 105 200 175 300 FWH-250A (250)
4A0139 100 142 250 225 400 FWH-350A (350)
4A0165 125 170 300 250 500 FWH-400A (400)

4A0208 150 207 400 350 600 FWH-500A (500)
4A0250 200 248 450 400 700 FWH-600A (600)
4A0296 250 300 600 500 800 FWH-700A (700)
4A0362 300 346 600 600 1000 <5> FWH-800A (800)
C
Bussman Semi-
MCCB Rating Time Delay Fuse Non-time
Nominal Delay
AC Drive Input conductor Fuse
Drive Model Output Power Amps Fuse Rating
Amps <1> Rating Amps <2> Rating (Fuse
HP Amps <3> Ampere) <4>
4A0414 350 410 800 700 1200 <5> FWH-800A (800)
4A0515 400 - 450 465 900 800 1350 <5> FWH-1000A (1000)
4A0675 500 - 600 657 1200 1100 <5> 1800 <5> FWH-1200A (1200)
600 V Class
5A0003 2 3.6 15 6.25 10 FWP-50B (50)
5A0004 3 5.1 15 8 15 FWP-50B (50)
5A0006 5 8.3 15 12 20 FWP-60B (60)
5A0009 7.5 12 20 20 35 FWP-60B (60)
5A0011 10 16 30 25 45 FWP-70B (70)
5A0017 15 23 40 40 60 FWP-100B (100)
5A0022 20 31 60 50 90 FWP-100B (100)
5A0027 25 38 75 60 110 FWP-125A (125)
5A0032 30 45 75 75 125 FWP-125A (125)
5A0041 40 44 75 75 125 FWP-175A (175)
5A0052 50 54 100 90 150 FWP-175A (175)
5A0062 60 66 125 110 175 FWP-250A (250)
5A0077 75 80 150 125 225 FWP-250A (250)
5A0099 100 108 175 175 300 FWP-250A (250)
5A0125 125 129 225 225 350 FWP-350A (350)
5A0145 150 158 300 275 450 FWP-350A (350)
5A0192 200 228 400 350 600 FWP-600A (600)
5A0242 250 263 500 450 700 FWP-600A (600)
<1> Maximum MCCB Rating is 15 A, or 200 % of drive input current rating, whichever is larger. MCCB voltage rating must be 600 VAC or greater.
<2> Maximum Time Delay fuse is 175% of drive input current rating. This covers any Class CC, J or T class fuse.
<3> Maximum Non-time Delay fuse is 300% of drive input current rating. This covers any CC, J or T class fuse.
<4> When using semiconductor fuses, Bussman FWH and FWP are required for UL compliance. Select FWH for 200 V Class and 400 V Class models
and FWP fuses for 600 V models.
<5> Class L fuse is also approved for this rating.
n Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. The external
power supply shall be a UL listed Class 2 power supply source or equivalent only.
Table C.6 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications
Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class
Digital inputs S1 to S8, SC 2 for external power supply.
Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class
Analog inputs / outputs +V, A1, A2, A3, AC, AM, FM 2 for external power supply.
n Drive Short Circuit Rating

The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V Class) when protected by Bussmann
Type FWH or FWP fuses as specified in Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection on page 232.
u CSA Standards Compliance
Figure C.7 CSA Mark
n CSA for Industrial Control Equipment

The drive is CSA-certified as Industrial Control Equipment Class 3211.
Specifically, the drive is certified to: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 04-04 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14-05.
u Drive Motor Overload Protection

Set parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. The internal motor
overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.
n E2-01: Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model-dependent
Default Setting: Model-dependent
Parameter E2-01 protects the motor when parameter L1-01 is not set to 0. The default for L1-01 is 1, which enables protection
for standard induction motors.
If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data entered to T1-04 is automatically written to parameter E2-01.
If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually enter the correct motor rated current to parameter E2-01.
C
n L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection

The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current, and output frequency that protects
the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an external
thermal relay for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table C.7 Overload Protection Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled Disabled the internal motor overload protection of the drive.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self-cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities
1 Standard fan-cooled motor (default) when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically
reduced when running below the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor with self-cooling capability within a speed range of
2 Drive duty motor with a speed range of 1:10 10:1. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when running below
1/10 of the motor rated speed.
Selects protection characteristics for a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed including zero
3 Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 speed (externally cooled motor). The motor overload detection level (oL1) is constant over the
entire speed range.
Selects protection characteristics for a standard self-cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities
6 Standard fan-cooled motor (50 Hz) when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically
reduced when running below the motor rated speed.
When connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation, disable the electronic overload protection
(L1-01 = 0) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal overload relay.
Enable motor overload protection (L1-01 ≠ 0) when connecting the drive to a single motor, unless another motor overload
preventing device is installed. The drive electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which shuts off the output
of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually calculated while the drive
is powered up.
n L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 min
Factory Default: 1.0 min
Parameter L1-02 determines how long the motor is allowed to operate before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is running
at 60 Hz and at 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1
curves up the y axis of the diagram below, but will not change the shape of the curves.
Time (min)
10
7
3
Cold Start
1
0.4
Hot Start
0.1 Motor Current (%)

0 100 150 200 (E2-01=100 %)
Figure C.8 Motor Overload Protection Time
u Precautionary Notes on External Heatsink (IP00/Open Type Enclosure)

When using an external heatsink, UL compliance requires covering exposed capacitors in the main circuit to prevent injury
to surrounding personnel.
The portion of the external heatsink that projects out can be protected with the enclosure or with the appropriate capacitor
cover after completing drive installation. Use Table C.8 to match drive models with available capacitor covers. Order capacitor
covers from a Yaskawa representative or directly from the Yaskawa sales department.
Refer to Figure C.9 for a detailed description of the capacitor cover parts.
Table C.8 Capacitor Cover
Drive Model Code Number Model
2A0110 100-061-273 ECAT31875-11
2A0138 100-061-274 ECAT31876-11
2A0169
100-061-275 ECAT31877-11
2A0211
2A0250
100-061-277 ECAT31726-11
2A0312
2A0360
100-061-278 ECAT31698-11
2A0415
4A0058 100-061-273 ECAT31875-11
4A0072 100-061-274 ECAT31876-11
4A0088
100-061-276 ECAT31878-11
4A0103
4A0139
100-061-275 ECAT31877-11
4A0165
4A0208 100-061-277 ECAT31726-11
4A0250
4A0296 100-061-278 ECAT31698-11
4A0362
4A0414 100-061-279 ECAT31740-11
4A0515
100-061-280 ECAT31746-11
4A0675
5A0041
100-061-274 ECAT31876-11
5A0052
5A0062
5A0077 100-061-275 ECAT31877-11
5A0099
5A0125
100-061-277 ECAT31726-11
5A0145
5A0192
100-061-278 ECAT31698-11
5A0242
<1> Requires two sets. Standards Compliance
C
E
D
A – Drive (outside panel) D – Installation screws
B – Drive (inside panel) E – Capacitor cover
C – Opening to capacitors
Figure C.9 Capacitor Cover
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
Revision
Date of Publication Section Revised Content
Number
August 2012 1 Appendix B Revision: Parameter descriptions corrected.
May 2012 – – First Edition. This manual supports drive software version PRG: 8500.
YASKAWA AC Drive P1000
Industrial Fan and Pump Drive
Quick Start Guide
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax: 81-930-25-4369
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.

Avenda Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude, São Paulo, SP04304-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH

Hauptstrasse 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods, Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-1236-735000 Fax: 44-1236-458182
http://www.yaskawa.co.uk
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg., 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

12F, Carlton Bld., No.21 HuangHe Road, HuangPu District, Shanghai 200003, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE

Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION

9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, 104, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED

#17/A Electronics City, Hosur Road Bangalore 560 100 (Karnataka), India
Phone: 91-80-4244-1900 Fax: 91-80-4244-1901
http://www.yaskawaindia.in
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2012 YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. TOEP YAIP1U 01A <1>

Published in U.S.A August 2012 12-8

18 Yaskawa p1000 Guia Rapida de Inicio Toepyaip1u01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

18 Yaskawa p1000 Guia Rapida de Inicio Toepyaip1u01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

18 Yaskawa p1000 Guia Rapida de Inicio Toepyaip1u01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive P1000

Industrial Fan and Pump Drive

MANUAL NO. TOEP YAIP1U 01A

Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors

Fault Display and Troubleshooting

i. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY.................................................................. 11

3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ...................................................................... 37

Models 2A0004 to 2A0081, 4A0002 to 4A0044, 5A0003 to 5A0032

4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION....................................................... 71

Auto-Tuning Operation Example ..................................................................................................... 113

6. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 149

7. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS ................................................................. 157

A. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................ 163

Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive Models 2A0250 to 2A0415 .......................................................... 166

B. PARAMETER LIST............................................................................................... 177

L4: Speed Detection........................................................................................................................ 207

C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .............................................................................. 231

This Page Intentionally Blank

i.2 General Safety

u General Application Precautions

4000 Power supply harmonics

Figure i.1 Installing a Reactor

u Motor Application Precautions

25% ED (or 15 min)

Figure i.2 Allowable Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Motor

u Drive Label Warning Example

Figure i.3 Warning Information Example

600V 3Phase 5.5kW/3.7kW

Figure i.4 Warning Information Position

1.1 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK....................................................22

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate Check

H MODEL : CIMR-PU2A0004FAA REV : A

FILE NO : E131457 IP20

FILE NO : E131457 IP20

A – Normal Duty Amps E – Lot number

Refer to the tables below

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION.............................................................................26

2.1 Mechanical Installation

u Installation Orientation and Spacing

Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation

n Single Drive Installation

A – 50 mm minimum C – 120 mm minimum

n Multiple Drive Installation (Side-by-Side Installation)

Figure 2.4 IP20/NEMA 1 Side-by-Side Mounting in Enclosure

n IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Drives

Table 2.2 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 200 V Class

Table 2.3 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure: 400 V Class

IP20/NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Conduit Bracket Dimensions

Table 2.5 Conduit Bracket Dimensions for IP20/NEMA Type 1

Dimensions (in) Diameter (in)

Dimensions (in) Diameter (in)

n IP00/Open Type Enclosure Drives

Max W2 Max W2 D Max W2 W Max W2 D

Table 2.6 Dimensions for IP00/Open Type Enclosure: 200 V Class

IP20/NEMA Type 1 Kit Selection

This Page Intentionally Blank

3.1 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM.................................................................38

3.1 Standard Connection Diagram

Forward Run / Stop S1 Option board

selection wire link